WO2024032570A1 - Interventional planning system, method and apparatus, and a storage medium - Google Patents

Interventional planning system, method and apparatus, and a storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024032570A1
WO2024032570A1 PCT/CN2023/111597 CN2023111597W WO2024032570A1 WO 2024032570 A1 WO2024032570 A1 WO 2024032570A1 CN 2023111597 W CN2023111597 W CN 2023111597W WO 2024032570 A1 WO2024032570 A1 WO 2024032570A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
target
parameters
puncture
planning
individual
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/111597
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
汪国强
张璟
方伟
Original Assignee
武汉联影智融医疗科技有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202210946070.0A external-priority patent/CN117562632A/en
Application filed by 武汉联影智融医疗科技有限公司 filed Critical 武汉联影智融医疗科技有限公司
Publication of WO2024032570A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024032570A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B17/34Trocars; Puncturing needles
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B34/00Computer-aided surgery; Manipulators or robots specially adapted for use in surgery
    • A61B34/10Computer-aided planning, simulation or modelling of surgical operations
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B34/00Computer-aided surgery; Manipulators or robots specially adapted for use in surgery
    • A61B34/20Surgical navigation systems; Devices for tracking or guiding surgical instruments, e.g. for frameless stereotaxis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B90/00Instruments, implements or accessories specially adapted for surgery or diagnosis and not covered by any of the groups A61B1/00 - A61B50/00, e.g. for luxation treatment or for protecting wound edges

Definitions

  • This specification relates to the technical field of medical devices, and in particular to an intervention planning system, method, device and storage medium.
  • Percutaneous interventional surgery is a commonly used clinical treatment or detection method. Percutaneous interventional surgery can be used for puncture biopsy, ablation therapy, and TPS radioactive seed implantation. Currently, before an interventional needle enters human tissue, doctors need to plan appropriate target parameters for interventional surgery based on preoperative images and experience. Planning target parameters is difficult. Especially for ablation treatment of lesions with a diameter of 3-5cm, it is necessary to consider the method of combined multiple needle ablation, which brings greater challenges to preoperative planning and also increases the difficulty of the doctor's work.
  • the interventional planning system includes a control module, which is used to: obtain patient data of a target patient; and determine target parameters based on the patient data.
  • the target parameter includes a target puncture path
  • determining the target puncture path includes: determining the structural characteristics of the target patient based on the patient data; determining the target target based on the structural characteristics; and determining candidate puncture based on the structural characteristics and the target target.
  • Path set determine the target puncture path from the candidate puncture path set.
  • determining the structural features of the target patient based on the patient data includes: determining a three-dimensional medical image of the target patient based on the patient data; and determining the structural features based on the three-dimensional medical image.
  • determining the set of candidate puncture paths based on the structural features and the target target point includes: determining the target target point as the perspective projection center; using the perspective projection center as the radiation source to emit multiple rays outward, based on the structural features, Calculate the judgment value of the clinical strong constraint conditions of the puncture path corresponding to each ray; determine the puncture path whose judgment value of the clinical strong constraint condition satisfies the preset conditions as the candidate puncture path; determine the set of candidate puncture paths as the candidate Collection of puncture paths.
  • strong clinical constraints include one or more of the following conditions: the puncture path does not contact and does not penetrate puncture risk structures, the length of the puncture path is less than the preset needle length threshold, and the angle between the puncture path and the target tissue is not The distance between the puncture path and the structure to be punctured is less than the preset angle threshold and the length of the puncture path passing through the structure to be punctured is greater than the preset distance threshold.
  • the set of candidate puncture paths includes at least one candidate puncture path
  • determining the target puncture path from the set of candidate puncture paths includes: calculating path association information of at least one candidate puncture path; based on the path association of the at least one candidate puncture path Information, the target puncture path is determined through a preset search algorithm.
  • the path association information includes one or more of the following information: the distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, the length of the candidate puncture path, and the angle between the candidate puncture path and the target tissue.
  • the preset search algorithm includes a quantum annealing algorithm. Based on path association information of at least one candidate puncture path, determining the target puncture path through the preset search algorithm includes: constructing a first function term according to the path association information; based on the first The function term determines the target puncture path through a preset search algorithm.
  • the target parameters include a target puncture path, a target stop point position, and a target ablation sphere parameter.
  • determining the target parameters includes: determining at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data; based on at least one set of planning parameters, Determine the target parameters; wherein, determining the target parameters includes: generating an individual set based on the individual generator.
  • the individual set includes multiple individuals, each individual corresponds to a set of planning parameters; performing at least one first iteration update on the individual set until the An iteration completion condition is met; based on the updated individual set, at least one set of intermediate parameters is determined; and based on at least one set of intermediate parameters, the target parameters are determined.
  • determining at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data includes: performing three-dimensional reconstruction on the patient data to obtain a three-dimensional medical image, where the patient data includes CT or MR data of the patient; and determining at least one set of planning parameters based on the three-dimensional medical image. planning parameters.
  • determining at least one set of planning parameters based on the three-dimensional medical image includes: performing a preprocessing operation on the three-dimensional medical image.
  • the preprocessing operation includes one or more of region of interest cropping, data point downsampling, and blood vessel coarse and subdivided grading. ; and based on preprocessing The results obtained from the operation determine at least one set of planning parameters.
  • each of the at least one first iteration includes: generating at least one new individual based on the individual generator; and adding at least one new individual to the individual set.
  • each iteration in at least one first iteration includes: filtering each individual in the individual set based on the individual filter, updating the individual set, and the filtering includes performing a selection operation on the individuals in the individual set. ;
  • the selection operation includes: calculating the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value of each individual in the individual set; and selecting individuals based on the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value, and determining the updated individual set.
  • determining at least one set of intermediate parameters based on the updated set of individuals includes: determining a Pareto front solution based on the updated set of individuals, and using the Pareto front solution as at least one set of intermediate parameters.
  • the target parameters include target puncture path, target stop point position and target ablation sphere parameters.
  • determining the target parameters includes: determining the number of puncture paths and the ablation sphere parameter range based on the patient data; based on the patient data, puncture Determine at least one set of planning parameters based on the number of paths and the range of ablation sphere parameters; determine at least one set of feasible solutions based on at least one set of planning parameters; and determine target parameters based on at least one set of feasible solutions.
  • determining at least one set of feasible solutions based on at least one set of planning parameters includes: generating a planning set based on at least one set of planning parameters, where the planning set includes a plurality of intermediate solutions, each intermediate solution corresponding to a set of planning parameters; Perform at least one round of second iteration optimization on the planning set until the second iteration completion condition is met to obtain the optimal planning set; and determine at least one set of feasible solutions based on the optimal planning set.
  • determining the ablation sphere parameter range includes: determining a lesion mask based on the patient data; determining the lesion long axis and the lesion short axis based on the lesion mask; and determining the ablation sphere parameters based on the lesion long axis and the lesion short axis. scope.
  • determining at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data, the number of puncture paths, and the ablation sphere parameter range includes: performing three-dimensional reconstruction of the patient data to obtain a three-dimensional medical image; performing a preprocessing operation on the three-dimensional medical image; and At least one set of planning parameters is determined based on the results obtained from the preprocessing operation, the number of puncture paths, and the ablation sphere parameter range.
  • each iteration in at least one second iteration includes: performing a transformation operation on the planning set to obtain a first preset number of new intermediate solutions; and adding the new intermediate solutions to the planning set to obtain the added A set of plans for new intermediate solutions.
  • each of the at least one second iteration includes: calculating a second evaluation value and a second constraint determination value of each intermediate solution added to the planning set of the new intermediate solution; and based on the second The evaluation value and the second constraint determination value select an intermediate solution to obtain a new planning set containing a second preset number of intermediate solutions.
  • the second constraint determination value is determined based on the determination value of at least one constraint condition, and the at least one constraint condition includes the length of the device. Whether the requirements are met, the second evaluation value includes puncture path score and ablation conformity rate.
  • One embodiment of this specification provides an intervention planning method, which method includes: obtaining patient data of a target patient; and determining target parameters based on the patient data.
  • One embodiment of this specification provides an interventional planning device, which includes an interventional device, a robotic arm, and a processor; the interventional device includes an interventional needle; the robotic arm is used to carry the interventional needle to perform interventional surgery according to target parameters; the processor is used to control the robotic arm, and determining the target parameters.
  • the determination of the target parameters includes: obtaining patient data of the target patient; and determining the target parameters based on the patient data.
  • One or more embodiments of this specification provide a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the storage medium stores computer instructions. After the computer reads the computer instructions in the storage medium, the computer executes the parameter planning method of the intervention planning system.
  • some embodiments of this specification determine the target parameters based on the patient data of the target patient.
  • the set of candidate puncture paths is determined based on the structural characteristics and target points, and then based on the path association information of at least one candidate puncture path, the target puncture path is determined through a preset search algorithm, which can accurately and effectively plan the target puncture path, improving the Target puncture path planning efficiency.
  • more reasonable target parameters can be obtained by determining at least one set of planning parameters based on patient data, and determining target parameters including target puncture path, target stay point location, and target ablation sphere parameters from at least one set of planning parameters. .
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an intervention planning system according to some embodiments of this specification
  • Figure 2 is an exemplary schematic diagram of an intervention planning device according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • Figure 3 is an exemplary flow chart of an intervention planning method according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • Figure 4 is an exemplary flowchart of determining a target puncture path according to some embodiments of this specification
  • Figure 5 is an exemplary schematic diagram of a divided area of a light source according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • Figure 6 is an exemplary schematic diagram of a set of candidate puncture paths according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • Figure 7 is another exemplary flow chart for determining a target puncture path according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • Figure 8 is an exemplary flow chart of a quantum annealing algorithm according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • Figure 9 is an exemplary flowchart of determining target parameters according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • Figure 10 is an exemplary schematic diagram of planning parameters according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • Figure 11 is another exemplary flowchart of determining target parameters according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • Figure 12 is an exemplary flow diagram of an individual filter screening process according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • Figure 13 is another exemplary flowchart of determining target parameters according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • Figure 14 is an exemplary schematic diagram of determining the maximum short axis of a lesion according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • Figure 15 is an exemplary flowchart of determining planning parameters according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • Figure 16A is an exemplary schematic diagram of another planning parameter according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • Figure 16B is an exemplary schematic diagram of determining the needle entry point set and the target point set according to some embodiments of this specification;
  • Figure 17 is another exemplary flowchart for determining target parameters according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • Figure 18 is a schematic flowchart of selecting an intermediate solution according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • Figure 19 is an exemplary flowchart of the internal structure of a computer device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • Interventional surgery on patients is a commonly used clinical treatment or examination method.
  • a device capable of performing interventional surgery is required.
  • target parameters such as the target puncture path, target stop point location, and target ablation sphere parameters.
  • Some embodiments of this specification illustrate such methods. These methods are not directly implemented on living human or animal bodies, but on devices that perform interventional surgeries. Its role is not to identify, determine or eliminate the cause or lesion, but to optimize the puncture process, such as improving the doctor's surgical efficiency and reducing work intensity.
  • the device for performing interventional surgery may be the interventional planning device described in this specification.
  • system means of distinguishing between different components, elements, parts, portions or assemblies at different levels.
  • said words may be replaced by other expressions if they serve the same purpose.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an intervention planning system according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system may include an image scanning device 110, a processing device 120, an intervention planning device 130, and a patient 140.
  • the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system may also include storage devices, networks and/or user terminals (not shown in the figure).
  • Image scanning device 110 refers to a device for scanning a patient 140 to obtain patient data.
  • positron emission tomography (PET) equipment direct digital flat-panel X-ray imaging (Digital Radiography, DR) equipment, magnetic resonance imaging (Magnetic Resonance Imaging, MRI) equipment, and electronic computed tomography used to obtain patient data (Computed Tomography, CT) equipment, etc.
  • the image scanning device 110 can scan the patient 140 and send the scanned image data to the processing device 120 for three-dimensional reconstruction and subsequent processing to determine target parameters.
  • the processing device 120 may be used to process the patient data obtained by the image scanning device 110 to determine target parameters. For example, processing device 120 may obtain patient data of the target patient. Further, the processing device 120 may determine the target parameters based on the patient data. In some embodiments, processing device 120 may send target parameters to intervention planning device 130 for ablation treatment.
  • processing device 120 may include one or more sub-processing devices (eg, a single-core processing device or a multi-core processing device).
  • processing device 120 may include a central processing unit (CPU), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or the like.
  • processing device 120 may be integrated or installed in interventional planning device 130 (eg, interventional device 131).
  • Interventional planning device 130 may be used to perform interventional procedures on patient 140 .
  • the interventional planning device 130 may include an interventional device 131, a robotic arm 132, and a processor (not shown in the figure).
  • Interventional device 131 may include an interventional needle (not shown).
  • electrodes may be provided on the interventional needle for delivering ablation energy.
  • the robotic arm 132 may be used to carry an interventional needle to perform interventional surgery according to target parameters.
  • the processor is used to control the robotic arm and determine target parameters.
  • the processor may be a part of the processing device 120, or the processor may be two independent components from the processing device 120. For more information about the intervention planning device 130, see Figure 2 and its associated description.
  • the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system may also include some or more other devices, such as storage devices, networks and/or user terminals (not shown in the figure).
  • Storage devices may be used to store data, instructions, and/or any other information.
  • the storage device may store data and/or instructions related to the interventional procedure.
  • the storage device may store patient data scanned by image scanning device 110 .
  • the storage device may also store target parameters determined by the processing device 120 and the like.
  • the storage device may include one or more storage components, and each storage component may be an independent device or a part of other devices (such as the processing device 120, etc.). In some embodiments, the storage device may be implemented on a cloud platform.
  • the network may connect various components in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system for communication.
  • image scanning device 110 may send patient data over the network to processing device 120 for processing.
  • processing device 120 may send the target parameters to the interventional planning device 130 through the network for performing the interventional surgery.
  • the network may be any one or more of a wired network or a wireless network.
  • User terminal refers to one or more terminal devices or software used by users.
  • the user using the user terminal can be one or multiple users.
  • the doctor who performs the ablation treatment operation can select the target parameters from at least a set of intermediate parameters or feasible solutions determined by the processing device 120 through the user terminal to perform the ablation treatment operation.
  • the user terminal may be one or any combination of a mobile device, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a desktop computer, and other devices with input and/or output functions.
  • Figure 2 is an exemplary schematic diagram of an intervention planning device 130 according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • the interventional planning device 130 may include an interventional device 131 , a robotic arm 132 and a processor 133 .
  • the interventional device 131 refers to a device that can enter the patient's body tissue to perform interventional surgery.
  • interventional surgery is used for biopsy, the interventional device 131 can be used to puncture and sample the target patient to further detect the lesion.
  • interventional surgery is used for TPS radioactive seed implantation, the interventional device 131 can be used to puncture the target patient and implant the radioactive seeds into the tumor to achieve precise tumor treatment.
  • interventional surgery is used for ablation treatment, the interventional device 131 can be used to puncture the target patient and perform ablation treatment on the lesion.
  • the interventional device 131 is provided with an interventional needle 131-1 for entering the patient's lesion area to perform interventional surgery on the lesion.
  • the interventional device 131 can perform interventional surgery with target parameters under the control of the processor 133 .
  • the interventional needle 131-1 may include a thermal interventional needle, a cryointerventional needle, a chemical interventional needle and other devices.
  • one or more interventional needles 131-1 may be provided on the interventional device 131.
  • the needle tip of the interventional needle 131-1 is provided with an ablation electrode, which can deliver ablation energy to the lesion according to the ablation power for ablation treatment.
  • the ablation energy means that when acting on the lesion, it can cause destructive damage to the cells of the lesion and cause them to die.
  • the ablation power is controlled by the processor 133.
  • the interventional device 131 can perform thermal ablation treatment (eg, microwave ablation, radiofrequency ablation, etc.), cold ablation treatment, chemical ablation, etc., on the lesion area.
  • thermal ablation treatment means that the electrode of the interventional needle 131-1 locally generates a high temperature reaching 70 degrees, cauterizing the lesion and stimulating necrosis; cold ablation treatment means releasing argon and helium gas at the electrode, and the electrode reaches a low temperature of -185 degrees.
  • chemical ablation refers to injecting some absolute alcohol and other chemical drugs into the lesion through the interventional needle 131-1 to cause the lesion to achieve necrosis.
  • the interventional equipment 131 suitable for different ablation treatment methods can be configured according to specific needs.
  • the robotic arm 132 may be used to carry the interventional needle 131-1 to perform interventional surgery according to target parameters.
  • the robotic arm 132 refers to an instrument that provides support for the interventional needle 131-1 to perform interventional surgery.
  • the robotic arm 132 may include an operating surgical robot, a positioning surgical robot, and the like.
  • the processor 133 may be used to control the robotic arm 132 to carry the interventional needle 131-1 to perform interventional surgery according to target parameters.
  • the processor 133 may control the robotic arm 132 to carry the interventional needle 131-1 into the human tissue at a target needle entry point in target parameters.
  • the processor 133 may determine the number of interventional needles 131-1 used by the interventional device 131 based on the number of target puncture paths in the target parameters.
  • the processor 133 can control the robotic arm 132 to carry the interventional needle 131-1 into the human tissue from the target needle entry point, and perform ablation treatment according to the target ablation sphere parameters at the target stay point.
  • the processor 133 can automatically control the robotic arm 132 to carry the interventional needle 131-1 to perform interventional surgery according to target parameters.
  • the processor 133 can navigate the doctor based on the target parameters, and the doctor controls the robotic arm 132 to carry the interventional needle 131-1 according to the navigation to perform the interventional surgery according to the target parameters.
  • navigation can display target parameters based on three-dimensional medical images and implement The position of the interventional needle 131-1 and/or the progress of the operation during the interventional operation are displayed.
  • the user may input relevant instructions instructing the robotic arm 132 to perform interventional surgery on the target patient via the user terminal.
  • the processor 133 can also perform access surgery based on other methods, for example, direct operation by a doctor based on navigation.
  • Figure 3 is an exemplary flowchart of an intervention planning method according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in Figure 3, process 300 includes the following steps. In some embodiments, one or more operations of the process 300 shown in FIG. 3 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 . For example, the process 300 shown in FIG. 3 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
  • Step 310 Obtain patient data of the target patient.
  • the target patient is the person who is to undergo interventional surgery.
  • Patient data refers to data that reflects the lesion status of the target patient.
  • patient data may include PET image data, DR image data, MRI image data, CT image data, etc.
  • processing device 120 may obtain patient data in a variety of ways. For example, after the image scanning device 110 scans a patient, the scanned patient data can be directly sent to the processing device 120 through the network. For another example, the image scanning device 110 scans the patient and stores the patient data in the storage device. The processing device 120 can actively read the patient data in the storage device when needed (such as when the user issues relevant instructions through the user terminal).
  • Step 320 Determine target parameters based on patient data.
  • the target parameters refer to parameters used by the interventional planning device to perform the interventional surgery.
  • processing device 120 may control parameters for interventional device 131 to perform ablation at target parameters.
  • the target parameters may include a target puncture path.
  • the target parameters when interventional surgery is used for ablation treatment, may also include target stop point positions and target ablation sphere parameters.
  • the target puncture path can be determined by the target needle entry point and the target target point.
  • the target puncture path refers to the trajectory of the interventional needle of the interventional device entering human tissue.
  • the target puncture path can be ⁇ P i1j1 , P i2j2 ⁇ , where P i1j1 can be determined by the target needle entry point P i1 and the target target point P j1 , and P i2j2 can be determined by the target needle entry point P. i2 and target target point P j2 are determined.
  • the target stop point position refers to the stop point position of the interventional needle electrode during the puncture process of the interventional needle along the target puncture path.
  • the target stay point position on the target puncture path P i1j1 is ⁇ T 1p1 , T 2p1 ⁇
  • the target stay point position on the target puncture path P i2j2 is T 1p2 .
  • the target ablation sphere parameters refer to the size data of the ablation area of the interventional needle during ablation treatment surgery.
  • the ablation sphere parameters can be the size of the major and minor axes of the ablation sphere. Since the thermal diffusion ability is the same in all directions and is circular in the direction perpendicular to the axis, the parameters of the ablation sphere can be expressed as a ⁇ a ⁇ c, where a is the short axis length of the ablation sphere ellipsoid, and c is the ablation sphere ellipsoid. The length of the major axis.
  • the ablation sphere parameter range refers to the respective value ranges of the long and short axes of the ablation sphere. Different ablation power and ablation time correspond to different ablation sphere sizes. The greater the ablation power, the longer the ablation time, and the larger the ablation sphere.
  • the target ablation sphere parameter can be R (for example, if the target ablation sphere is an ellipsoid, R can be an ellipsoid of 36 ⁇ 36 ⁇ 42 mm, where 36 is the short axis length of the ellipsoid, 42 is the length of the major axis of the ellipsoid).
  • the target parameters may include a target puncture path
  • the processing device 120 may determine structural characteristics of the target patient based on the patient data, and determine the target target point based on the structural characteristics. Next, the processing device 120 may determine a set of candidate puncture paths based on the structural features and the target target point, and then determine the target puncture path from the set of candidate puncture paths. After the target puncture path is determined, the processor can control the robotic arm to carry the interventional needle to puncture the target patient according to the target puncture path. For example, when the interventional surgery is used for needle biopsy, the processing device 120 can control the robotic arm to carry the interventional needle to puncture the target patient and extract the tissue according to the target puncture path.
  • the processing device 120 can control the robotic arm to carry the interventional needle, puncture the target patient according to the target puncture path, and implant multiple particles at multiple stay points. The resulting multiple doses are superimposed to form a larger therapeutic range.
  • the processing device 120 can control the robotic arm to carry the interventional needle to puncture the target patient according to the target puncture path, and perform ablation treatment with the target ablation sphere parameters at the target stop point.
  • the target stop point position and target ablation sphere parameters during the puncture process can be set by the doctor.
  • the target stop point position and target ablation sphere parameters during the puncture process can also be obtained through other methods, for example, further determined based on the method in Figure 9 or Figure 13. For more information on determining the target puncture path, see Figures 4-8 and their related descriptions.
  • the target parameters may include a target puncture path, a target stop point position, and a target ablation sphere parameter.
  • the processing device 120 may determine at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data, and based on At least one set of planning parameters to determine the target parameters. For example, the processing device 120 can generate an individual set based on the individual generator. The individual set includes multiple individuals, each individual corresponds to a set of planning parameters, and performs at least one first iteration update on the individual set until the first iteration. The completion condition is met. Next, the processing device 120 may determine at least one set of intermediate parameters based on the updated set of individuals, and determine the target parameters based on the at least one set of intermediate parameters. For more information on the above-mentioned determination of target parameters, please refer to Figures 9 to 12 and their related descriptions.
  • the target parameters may include the target puncture path and the target stay point.
  • the processing device 120 may determine the number of puncture paths and the ablation sphere parameter range based on the patient data, and determine at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data, the number of puncture paths, and the ablation sphere parameter range.
  • the processing device 120 may determine at least one set of feasible solutions based on at least one set of planning parameters, and determine the target parameters based on at least one set of feasible solutions.
  • process 300 is only for example and illustration, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification.
  • various modifications and changes can be made to the process 300 under the guidance of this description. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification.
  • the processing device 120 may adopt the process of FIG. 4 to determine the target puncture path.
  • the processing device 120 can use a target puncture path to implant TPS radioactive seeds, and the processing device 120 can adopt the process in Figure 4 to determine the target puncture path.
  • the size of the lesion is small and the number of target puncture paths is 1, the ablation can be completed.
  • the processing device 120 can adopt the process of FIG. 4 to determine the target puncture path. See Figure 13 and its related description for more details on determining the number of target puncture paths.
  • Figure 4 is an exemplary flowchart of determining a target puncture path according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • process 400 includes the following steps.
  • one or more operations of the process 400 shown in FIG. 4 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the process 400 shown in FIG. 4 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
  • the target parameters include a target puncture path.
  • the processing device 120 can acquire a surgical area to be punctured (or a target object) constructed of several voxels, and determine a candidate needle entry point based on the target target point in the structure to be punctured inside the surgical area to be punctured.
  • Set; several voxels include surface voxels and internal voxels.
  • the voxels corresponding to each candidate needle entry point in the candidate needle entry point set belong to the surface voxels, and there are corresponding candidate punctures between each candidate needle entry point and the target target point.
  • Path determine the path association information corresponding to each candidate puncture path; the path association information includes the separation distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure inside the surgical area to be punctured, and the path length of the candidate puncture path; combine the separation distance and path length , and the preset path search parameters, construct a Hamiltonian (or path selection function); according to the Hamiltonian, search for the target puncture path from each candidate puncture path, and use the candidate needle entry point corresponding to the target puncture path as Target entry point.
  • the path search parameters include iteration parameters used to indicate the path search calculation.
  • Step 410 Determine the structural characteristics of the target patient based on the patient data.
  • Structural features refer to the features of the surgical area to be punctured surrounded by the surface contour of the structure to be punctured.
  • the surgical area to be punctured may include surface voxels and internal voxels, and the structure to be punctured refers to the organ to which the target patient's lesion belongs (for example, taking a liver tumor as an example, the structure to be punctured may refer to the liver of the target patient).
  • the structural features may include features of the structure to be punctured 510 , surface voxels 520 , target tissue 530 , puncture risk structure 540 and other structures.
  • the processing device 120 may determine a three-dimensional medical image of the target patient based on the patient data, and determine structural features based on the three-dimensional medical image.
  • Three-dimensional medical imaging refers to three-dimensional rendered images used to represent surface voxels and internal voxels.
  • Three-dimensional medical images can be used to display the local anatomical scene of the target patient (for example, the abdominal anatomical scene) to clarify the anatomical structure and spatial location of the target patient's lesions.
  • surface voxels can be used to characterize the epidermal contour
  • internal voxels can be used to characterize internal anatomical structures.
  • the processing device 120 can perform three-dimensional reconstruction of the surgical area to be punctured based on the patient data of the target patient and match the spatial coordinates to obtain a three-dimensional model of the target patient constructed from voxels, that is, a three-dimensional medical image.
  • the processing device 120 can distinguish the boundaries between different tissues and organs based on the grayscale features of different tissues in the patient data, and then segment the tissues, organs, etc. in the three-dimensional medical image to determine the structural features.
  • the tissues and organs that need to be segmented may include structures to be punctured, skin, lesions, bones, tissues adjacent to the structures to be punctured, blood vessels inside the structures to be punctured, etc.
  • the above-mentioned segmentation method may include automatic segmentation and interactive editing segmentation.
  • automatic segmentation may include but is not limited to threshold-based segmentation, machine learning-based segmentation, and deep learning-based segmentation methods.
  • Interactive editing segmentation may include but is not limited to region growing, flood filling, slice interpolation, and interactive rendering.
  • Step 420 Determine the target target based on the structural characteristics.
  • the target point refers to the target point of the lesion on the structure to be punctured.
  • the target point may be the center of mass of the lesion.
  • the target target point can also be other points on the lesion.
  • the target target point can be the geometric center of the lesion.
  • the processing device 120 may determine the centroid of the lesion on the structure to be punctured based on the structural characteristics, and use the determined centroid as the target target.
  • Step 430 Determine a set of candidate puncture paths based on structural features and target points.
  • the processing device 120 can obtain the patient data of the target patient and generate a target rendering corresponding to the target patient.
  • Image the target rendering image is used to represent the surgical area to be punctured based on patient data
  • the target point in the structure to be punctured is the perspective projection center
  • the puncture risk structure is the perspective projection object
  • a perspective projection model is established; the perspective projection model is used , determine the set of candidate needle entry points.
  • the method of determining the set of candidate needle entry points using a perspective projection model may include: the processing device 120 may use a perspective projection model to obtain the light collision results corresponding to each target source light; the target source light is based on the target target point, and The light is scattered in all directions at the location of the structure to be punctured.
  • the light collision results are used to characterize the collision results of the target source light and puncture risk structures and/or surface voxels; according to the strong clinical constraints (or preset partition conditions) ), based on the light collision results corresponding to the light rays of each target point, determine the feasible needle entry voxels from the surface voxels of the surgical area to be punctured, as candidate needle entry points; the pre-clinical strong constraints are for the surgical area to be punctured Whether the surface voxels meet the constraints required for puncture, the candidate puncture path corresponding to each candidate needle entry point is obtained based on the target source light path corresponding to each feasible needle entry voxel; a set of candidate needle entry points is obtained based on each candidate needle entry point .
  • Strong clinical constraints may include any one or more of the following: the candidate puncture path does not contact and does not penetrate the puncture risk structure, the path length of the candidate puncture path is less than the preset needle length threshold, and the distance length of the candidate puncture path through the structure to be punctured is greater than Default distance threshold.
  • the set of candidate puncture paths refers to a set composed of paths that can be used as puncture paths.
  • the set of candidate puncture paths may include at least one candidate puncture path.
  • Candidate puncture paths can be obtained by removing obviously unreasonable paths through strong clinical constraints.
  • the candidate puncture path may be composed of at least one candidate needle entry point and a target target point. The voxel corresponding to each of the at least one candidate needle entry point belongs to the surface voxel.
  • the processing device 120 can determine the perspective projection center based on the target target, and use the perspective projection center as the source to emit multiple rays outwards, and calculate the clinical strength of the puncture path corresponding to each ray based on the structural characteristics. The judgment value of the constraint condition. Further, the processing device 120 may determine puncture paths whose judgment values of strong clinical constraints satisfy preset conditions as candidate puncture paths, and determine a set of candidate puncture paths as a candidate puncture path set.
  • the perspective projection center refers to the center of the perspective projection model.
  • the center of the perspective projection can be the target target point.
  • processing device 120 may determine the target target point as the perspective projection center.
  • Strong clinical constraints refer to constraints that can determine whether the puncture path corresponding to each ray meets the puncture requirements.
  • the puncture path corresponding to each ray refers to the puncture path that coincides with each ray.
  • strong clinical constraints may include one or more of the following: the puncture path does not contact and does not penetrate puncture risk structures, the length of the candidate puncture path is less than the preset needle length threshold, and the angle between the puncture path and the target tissue It is not less than the preset angle threshold and the distance length of the puncture path through the structure to be punctured is greater than the preset distance threshold.
  • strong clinical constraints may include that the puncture path does not contact or penetrate puncture risk structures, that is, the puncture path needs to avoid contacting or penetrating inaccessible risk structures.
  • risk structures can include thicker blood vessels, important organs, bones, etc.
  • the structural features can reflect the conditions of key parts such as organs and bones in the surgical area to be punctured, and the processing device 120 can determine whether the puncture path contacts and/or penetrates puncture risk structures based on the structural features.
  • the target point O can be used as the perspective projection center, and the target point O can be used as the radiation source to emit multiple rays (for example, OP 1 , OP 2 , OP 3 , OP 4 , OP 5 , OP 6 ), 540 is the puncture risk structure.
  • processing device 120 may consider the intersection of ray OP 6 that strikes the puncture risk mechanism and surface voxel 520 as a no-no point. Further, the processing device 120 may mark the body surface area behind the puncture risk structure 540 as a prohibited needle entry area, and determine a line connecting a point on the prohibited needle entry area and the target point O as a prohibited puncture path.
  • the clinically strong constraint may include that the length of the puncture path is less than a preset needle length threshold.
  • the preset needle length threshold can be 10cm ⁇ 15cm. Taking the interventional needle length as 15cm as an example, according to clinical standards, 15cm can be selected as the preset needle length threshold.
  • the processing device 120 may calculate the length of the puncture path, determine the puncture path whose length is greater than or equal to the preset needle length threshold as the prohibited puncture path, and determine the intersection of the prohibited puncture path and the surface voxel as the prohibited puncture path. into the needle area.
  • the strong clinical constraint may include that the angle between the puncture path and the target tissue is not less than a preset angle threshold.
  • the target tissue refers to the outermost membranous structure of the structure to be punctured.
  • the angle threshold can be 10° to 30° according to clinical standards.
  • the target tissue is the splenic capsule.
  • the angle between the puncture path and the target tissue refers to the angle between the puncture path and the normal vector of the target tissue surface.
  • the angle between the puncture path OP 5 and the target tissue 530 is the angle ⁇ between the puncture path OP 5 and the normal vector of the surface of the target tissue 530 .
  • the strong clinical constraint may not be considered.
  • the strong constraint angle condition may not be considered. If the structure to be punctured is the heart, lungs, etc., the strong constraint angle condition may not be considered. If the structure to be punctured is the liver or spleen, the strong constraint angle condition may be considered.
  • the interventional needle will more easily penetrate the liver parenchyma during the puncture process and produce smaller stress deformation.
  • ⁇ >20° can be selected as the angle threshold.
  • the processing device 120 calculates the angle between the ray direction and the normal vector of the target tissue surface, and then for rays greater than the angle threshold, all fluoroscopic body surface areas behind the ray can be calibrated as needle-inhibited areas, and Align the points on the prohibited needle area with the target The line connecting the target point O is determined as the prohibited puncture path.
  • the processing device 120 may also record the obtained angle value ⁇ in each voxel of the feasible needle insertion area on the body surface (ie, the voxel corresponding to the candidate needle insertion point) to facilitate subsequent stage calculation processing.
  • the strong clinical constraint may include that the distance length of the puncture path through the structure to be punctured is greater than a preset distance threshold.
  • the preset distance threshold can be 3 mm to 8 mm.
  • the distance between the puncture path OP 5 and the structure to be punctured is the length between OH.
  • 5 mm can be selected as the preset distance threshold.
  • the processing device 120 can mark all the fluoroscopic body surface areas behind the rays whose puncture path passes through the structure to be punctured and whose distance length is less than or equal to the preset distance threshold as the needle-inhibited area, and place the needle-inhibited areas on the rays.
  • the line connecting the point and the target point O is determined as the prohibited puncture path.
  • the judgment value of a strong clinical constraint refers to a numerical value or letter that can reflect whether the strong clinical constraint is satisfied. For example, when a certain strong clinical constraint condition is satisfied, the judgment value of the strong clinical constraint condition is assigned a value of 0; otherwise, the value assigned is -1. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may calculate the sum of the determination values of different clinical strong constraint conditions, and use the summed value as the clinical strong constraint condition.
  • the processing device may determine a puncture path whose determination value of the strong clinical constraint satisfies the preset condition as a candidate puncture path.
  • the preset conditions may include that the judgment value of the clinical strong constraint condition is 0, the judgment value of the clinical strong constraint condition is not greater than 1, the judgment value of the clinical strong constraint condition is not greater than 2, etc.
  • the processing device can calculate the union of the prohibited needle entry areas calibrated by multiple strong clinical constraints, and then obtain the feasible needle entry point area on the body surface (as represented by the feasible needle entry point area 610 in Figure 6 (shown), the feasible needle entry point area includes the screened candidate needle entry points. Further, the processing device 120 may determine a line connecting the candidate needle entry point and the target target point O as the candidate puncture path.
  • candidate puncture paths whose judgment values of clinical strong constraints meet preset conditions are determined, providing data support for subsequent puncture path planning.
  • Step 440 Determine the target puncture path from the set of candidate puncture paths.
  • the processing device 120 may calculate path association information of at least one candidate puncture path, and determine the target puncture path through a preset search algorithm based on the path association information of the at least one candidate puncture path. For more information on determining the target puncture path through the preset search algorithm, see Figure 7 and its related description.
  • a candidate puncture path whose judgment value satisfies the preset conditions for strong clinical constraints can be determined, so that a reasonable target puncture can be obtained automatically and efficiently. path.
  • process 400 is only for example and illustration, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification.
  • various modifications and changes can be made to the process 400 under the guidance of this description. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification.
  • Figure 7 is another exemplary flowchart of determining a target puncture path according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • process 700 includes the following steps.
  • one or more operations of the process 700 shown in FIG. 7 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the process 700 shown in FIG. 7 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
  • Step 710 Calculate path association information of at least one candidate puncture path.
  • the set of candidate puncture paths may include at least one candidate puncture path.
  • Path related information refers to information that can reflect whether the candidate puncture path meets the puncture requirements.
  • the path association information may include one or more of the following information: the distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, the length of the candidate puncture path, and the angle between the candidate puncture path and the target tissue. For more information about the distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, the length of the candidate puncture path, and the angle between the candidate puncture path and the target tissue, see Figure 4 and its related description.
  • the skin needle insertion points can be uniformly sampled based on the light source emission angle.
  • L is the maximum length of the original body surface
  • W is the maximum width of the original body surface
  • each surface voxel P ij is a candidate needle entry point.
  • the prohibition of needle entry can be The surface voxels corresponding to the area are filled in the matrix with 0.
  • Each candidate needle entry point and the target target point can be combined into a candidate puncture path, that is, the surface voxel P ij corresponding to each candidate needle entry point can have a candidate puncture path.
  • the candidate puncture path passes through multiple voxels
  • the processing device 120 can use a classic computer to calculate the distances between the multiple voxels passed by the candidate puncture path and all puncture risk structures using a three-dimensional distance transform (Distance Transform, DTF) algorithm, and recorded in each voxel. Then the distances recorded in each voxel are averaged, and the minimum value of the average distance of each voxel is determined as the distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, which can be represented by D dangerous .
  • DTF distance Transform
  • the processing device can scale the number of passing voxels into the actual path length, which is recorded as d ij .
  • the processing device 120 can retrieve the included angle value ⁇ in the voxel of each candidate needle insertion point when calculating strong clinical constraints, and use the included angle value ⁇ as the candidate corresponding to the candidate needle insertion point.
  • the angle between the puncture path and the target tissue is recorded as ⁇ ij .
  • Step 720 Determine the target puncture path through a preset search algorithm based on the path association information of at least one candidate puncture path.
  • the processing device 120 can construct the first function term according to the separation distance, path length, feature angle, and preset weight information according to the preset selection conditions; the preset selection condition is for the separation distance, path length, The constraint conditions of the characteristic angle; according to the preset path search parameters, the first function term is used to construct the Hamiltonian based on the quantum annealing algorithm; the path search parameters include iteration parameters used to indicate the path search calculation.
  • the method of constructing the first function term may include: the processing device 120 may obtain preset weight information; the preset weight information includes a first weight coefficient for distance, a second weight coefficient for path length, and a characteristic angle. The third weight coefficient; according to the preset selection conditions, the first function term is obtained based on the distance and the first weight coefficient, the path length and the second weight coefficient, the characteristic angle and the third weight coefficient.
  • the preset algorithm may include a quantum annealing algorithm.
  • the quantum annealing algorithm is a quantum algorithm applied to combinatorial optimization problems. It finds the optimal solution by utilizing the inherent characteristics of quantum systems, such as quantum superposition states and quantum entanglement states.
  • the quantum annealing algorithm generally consists of two parts: one part is called Hamiltonian potential energy, which maps the objective function to be optimized into a potential field applied to the quantum system, that is, the objective function is regarded as the potential energy part of the Hamiltonian of the quantum system.
  • the other part is called Hamiltonian kinetic energy, which is usually introduced as a kinetic energy term with controllable amplitude as a perturbation to the system (for example, it can be imagined as a perturbation of a transverse magnetic field).
  • Hamiltonian kinetic energy which is usually introduced as a kinetic energy term with controllable amplitude as a perturbation to the system (for example, it can be imagined as a perturbation of a transverse magnetic field).
  • the system will gradually evolve along the direction of smaller gradient in the solution space, and even directly “pass through” the part with higher potential energy through the quantum tunneling effect. With the gradual iteration, the energy of the quantum system will become lower and lower (that is, the temperature will decrease), and finally it will converge to the ground state of the system. This process is equivalent to obtaining the global optimum of the objective function.
  • the processing device 120 may construct a first function term according to the path association information, then construct a second function term, and construct a Hamiltonian based on the first function term, the second function term and the coupling coefficient, thereby based on the Hamiltonian Quantity, the target puncture path is determined through the quantum annealing algorithm.
  • the first function term can characterize the potential energy part of the Hamiltonian in the quantum annealing algorithm
  • the second function term can characterize the kinetic energy part of the Hamiltonian in the quantum annealing algorithm.
  • the processing device 120 may use formula (1) to construct the first function term of the candidate puncture path corresponding to the surface voxel P ij .
  • R ij is the distance between the normalized candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure
  • L ij is the length of the normalized candidate puncture path
  • a ij is the distance between the normalized candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure.
  • w 1 is the weight of the distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure
  • w 2 is the weight of the length of the candidate puncture path
  • w 3 is the weight of the angle between the candidate puncture path and the target tissue.
  • w 1 +w 2 +w 3 1 to ensure that the weight of each group is normalized.
  • R ij is the distance between the normalized candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure
  • L ij is the length of the normalized candidate puncture path
  • a ij is the distance between the normalized candidate puncture path and the target tissue.
  • Angle D ij is the distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure
  • d ij is the length of the candidate puncture path
  • ⁇ ij is the angle between the candidate puncture path and the target tissue
  • ⁇ 1 is the normalization parameter of D ij
  • ⁇ 2 is the normalization parameter of d ij
  • ⁇ 3 is the normalization parameter of ⁇ ij
  • D min and D max are respectively the minimum and maximum values of the distances between all candidate puncture paths and puncture risk structures
  • d min and d max are respectively the minimum value and the maximum value among the lengths of all candidate puncture paths
  • ⁇ min and ⁇ max are respectively the minimum value and the maximum value among the angles between all candidate puncture paths and the target tissue.
  • the processing device 120 may determine the candidate puncture corresponding to the surface voxel P ij based on equations (2) to (4) R ij , L ij and A ij of the path, and then substitute R ij , L ij and A ij into formula (1) to obtain the first function term of the candidate puncture path corresponding to the surface voxel P ij
  • the processing device 120 can construct the second candidate puncture path corresponding to the surface voxel P ij using equation (5).
  • function term. H k ⁇ 0 e -1/T (5)
  • ⁇ 0 is a constant term
  • e is a natural number
  • T is the temperature of the iterative process.
  • the temperature T of the iterative process can be determined using formula (6), which can be a linear function.
  • T(s) is the temperature when the current iteration number of the outer loop is s
  • T 0 is the initial temperature during the iteration process
  • s is the current iteration number of the outer loop
  • M is the preset maximum number of iterations of the outer loop.
  • the meaning of the outer loop is to jump out of the currently selected initial needle entry point, randomly update another initial needle entry point on the body surface contour (that is, any other candidate needle entry point), and re-search for the optimal path at the current location, once N iterations need to be executed in the outer loop to find the optimal needle entry point that meets the conditions.
  • a new solution P′ can be obtained based on random step sizes.
  • the new solution can be updated as the criterion. Otherwise, if it is larger than the current solution , you can judge whether to accept the new solution according to exp(- ⁇ H/T)>random(0,1). As the number of iterations of the outer loop increases or decreases, the temperature gradually drops from T 0 to zero, and H k also drops accordingly. . As the temperature decreases, the probability of acceptance will become lower and lower, that is, the probability of "passing through" the potential barriers on both sides of the local optimal solution (ie, the optimal path analysis result) due to the quantum tunneling effect becomes lower and lower. For more information on outer loop, inner loop, new solution, etc., see Figure 8 and its related descriptions.
  • the processing device 120 may use formula (7) to construct the Hamiltonian of the candidate puncture path corresponding to the surface voxel P ij .
  • J T is the coupling coefficient, which satisfies J T > 0 and is usually a constant, Its meaning is to adjust the energy ratio of the potential energy term and the kinetic energy term
  • H k is the second function term (that is, the kinetic energy part of the Hamiltonian). It represents the disturbance to the entire system and can be described by a function that changes linearly with the number of iterations or by describing the thermal balance.
  • the function composition of the state can be determined based on formula (5).
  • the processing device may calculate the Hamiltonian of all candidate puncture paths based on formula (7), and determine the candidate puncture path corresponding to the smallest Hamiltonian as the target puncture path.
  • the processing device 120 may determine the target puncture path through a quantum annealing algorithm based on the Hamiltonian. For more information on determining the target puncture path through the quantum annealing algorithm, see Figure 8 and its related description.
  • the first function term is constructed according to the path association information, and then the second function term is constructed, and the Hamiltonian is constructed based on the first function term, the second function term and the coupling coefficient, and then based on the Hamiltonian Quantity, the target puncture path is determined through the quantum annealing algorithm, which improves the algorithm efficiency and the probability of finding the optimal solution.
  • process 700 is only for example and explanation, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification.
  • process 700 under the guidance of this specification.
  • FIG. 8 is an exemplary flowchart of a quantum annealing algorithm according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • process 800 includes the following steps.
  • one or more operations of the process 800 shown in FIG. 8 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the process 800 shown in FIG. 8 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
  • Step 8010 Initialize various parameters and the number of outer loop iterations.
  • the user can initially set the weight w 1 for the distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, the weight w 2 for the length of the candidate puncture path, the weight w 3 for the angle between the candidate puncture path and the target tissue, and the step size.
  • coupling coefficient J T , initial temperature T 0 during the iteration process, maximum number of iterations of the outer loop M, maximum number of iterations of the inner loop N; and set the number of iterations of the outer loop s to 1.
  • the above parameters and the number of iterations can also be preset fixed configurations without user input.
  • the processing device 120 may perform at least one round of outer loop by executing steps 8020 to 8130 until s>M. During each outer loop, the processing device may perform at least one round of inner loop by executing steps 8030 to 8110 until s>N.
  • Step 8020 Randomly initialize the needle entry point and the number of inner loop iterations.
  • the processing device 120 can randomly initialize the needle entry point, determine the initial needle entry point for this round of outer loop iterations, and set the number of inner loop iterations t to 1.
  • the processing device 120 may randomly select any candidate needle insertion point as the initial needle insertion point.
  • the processing device 120 can determine the needle insertion point mass distribution, and divide the candidate needle insertion point set into at least one sample according to the needle insertion point quality distribution. area. Then, one of the sampling areas is selected as the target sampling area from at least one sampling area with unequal probability, and the initial entry point of this round of outer loop iteration is determined from the target sampling area.
  • the preset external circulation times threshold can be set manually, for example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, etc.
  • the processing device 120 may use the above method to determine the initial needle insertion point each time it determines the initial needle insertion point. In some embodiments, when the number of external loops is greater than or equal to the preset threshold of the number of external loops, the processing device 120 may determine the number of external loop iterations using the above method to determine the initial needle entry point according to the preset rules. Among them, the preset rules may include interval selection, random selection, etc. For example, if the preset outer loop number threshold is 200 times and the maximum number of outer loop iterations is 500, the processing device 120 can use the above method at the 200th, 210th, 220th... 490th and 500th times. Determine the initial needle entry point.
  • the mass distribution of needle entry points may include needle entry points and their corresponding point evaluation values for each iteration of the outer loop and/or inner loop iterations.
  • Point evaluation value refers to letters, numerical values, etc. that can evaluate the quality of the needle entry point.
  • the processing device 120 may use the value of the first function term corresponding to the needle insertion point as the point evaluation value. The lower the point evaluation value, the better the needle insertion point.
  • the processing device 120 may calculate the value of the first function term corresponding to the needle entry point, and based on the value of the first function term, determine that the value of the first function term corresponding to the needle entry point is the value of the first function term corresponding to the needle entry point after completing the outer loop and /or the ranking value among the values of the first function term corresponding to the needle entry point of each iteration in the inner loop iteration. Further, based on the ranking value, the point evaluation value corresponding to the needle entry point is determined.
  • the processing device 120 may calculate the value of the first function term corresponding to the needle entry point based on formula (1), and calculate the value of the first function term corresponding to the needle entry point of each iteration of the completed outer loop and/or inner loop iteration.
  • the values are arranged from small to large to determine the ranking value of the value of the first function item corresponding to the needle entry point. The lower the ranking value, the better the needle entry point and the higher the point evaluation value.
  • the sampling area refers to multiple areas where needle entry points with similar point evaluation values are divided together based on the characteristics of needle entry point mass distribution.
  • the sampling areas can be 2, 3, 4, etc.
  • the processing device 120 may divide the sampling area using a random division method. Specifically, the processing device 120 can randomly divide the sampling area, and sequentially evaluate whether each division can meet the preset requirements. If the preset requirements can be met, the sampling area divided this time will be used as the final sampling area; otherwise, the sampling area will be randomly divided again.
  • the preset requirement may be that the variance of the value of the first function term corresponding to the needle entry point in each sampling area is less than the preset variance value.
  • the processing device 120 may also use other methods to divide the sampling area, such as clustering.
  • the target sampling area refers to the final selected sampling area.
  • the processing device 120 may select one of the sampling areas from at least one sampling area as the target sampling area with non-equal probability. For example, for each sampling area in at least one sampling area, the processing device 120 may calculate the average point evaluation value of the needle entry point of all completed outer loop and/or inner loop iterations of each iteration in the sampling area. , and use this evaluation value as the average point evaluation value. Next, the processing device 120 may determine the probability of selecting each sampling area as the target sampling area based on the proportion of the average point evaluation value of each sampling area in the at least one sampling area.
  • the probability of selecting sampling area 1 as the target sampling area for The probability of selecting sampling area 2 as the target sampling area is The probability of selecting sampling area 3 as the target sampling area is
  • the processing device 120 may randomly select any candidate needle entry point from the target sampling area as the initial needle entry point.
  • the set of candidate needle entry points is divided into at least one sampling area, and one of the sampling areas is selected as the target sampling area with unequal probability, and is sampled from the target
  • the needle entry point of this round of outer loop iteration is determined in the area, and a better needle entry point of this round of outer loop iteration can be selected, which is beneficial to subsequent determination of the optimal target puncture path. Since one of the sampling areas is selected as the target sampling area with unequal probability, rather than one of the sampling areas as the target sampling area, falling into a local optimum is avoided.
  • Step 8030 randomly move the needle entry point with a step size ⁇ to generate a new solution P'.
  • the needle entry point P ij is randomly moved with a step size ⁇ to generate a new needle entry point Pi ⁇ ,j or Pi,j ⁇ .
  • the new needle entry point needs to be one of the candidate needle entry points.
  • the solution of the previous iteration is P, and the new solution generated is P'.
  • the step size ⁇ can be any positive integer.
  • can be a smaller value such as 1, 2, 3, etc.
  • the processing device 120 may randomly select a positive integer within 10 as the step size ⁇ .
  • the processor 120 may determine the average curvature of the skin surface where the preset neighborhood of the current needle insertion point position is located, and determine the step size ⁇ of the loop iteration within this round based on the average curvature.
  • the preset neighborhood refers to the set of voxel points whose distance from the needle entry point is no greater than the preset threshold.
  • the preset threshold may be a preset threshold.
  • the average curvature is a physical quantity that reflects the curvature of the skin surface where the preset neighborhood is located.
  • the processing device 120 may obtain the curvature radius of each surface voxel on the skin surface where the preset neighborhood is located, calculate the average of all curvature radii, and use the reciprocal of the average of the curvature radii as the average curvature. The greater the average curvature, the smaller the average curvature radius, and the greater the undulations of the skin surface where the preset neighborhood is located, then the two adjacent voxel points on the skin surface may have a greater difference when used as the needle insertion point. Therefore, The step size ⁇ needs to be reduced.
  • the processing device may determine the step size of the loop iteration within this round based on the average curvature of the skin surface where the preset neighborhood of the current needle entry point location is located. For example, the greater the average curvature of the skin surface where the preset neighborhood of the current needle entry point is located, the smaller the path point step size ⁇ can be.
  • the step size of the inner loop iteration of this round is determined based on the average curvature of the skin surface where the preset neighborhood of the current needle entry point is located. Taking into account the difference in surrounding voxels, it can be used This step size is more reasonable.
  • Step 8040 calculate the first function term H p (P').
  • the processing device 120 may calculate the first function term H p (P') of the new solution P' based on formula (1).
  • Step 8050 determine whether the system energy is reduced.
  • the processing device 120 can compare the Hamiltonian H(P) of the solution P in the previous iteration with the Hamiltonian H(P') of the new solution P', and determine H(P') Whether it decreases relative to H(P). In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may compare the first function term H p (P) of the solution P in the previous iteration with the first function term H p (P') of the new solution P', and determine H Whether p (P') decreases relative to H p (P).
  • processing device 120 in response to a decrease in system energy, may perform step 8070. In some embodiments, in response to the system energy not being reduced, processing device 120 may perform step 8060.
  • Step 8060 determine whether exp(- ⁇ H/T)>random(0, 1).
  • the processing device can determine whether the Metropolis criterion is met, that is, whether exp(- ⁇ H/T)>random(0, 1) is true.
  • ⁇ H is the difference between the Hamiltonian H(P') of the new solution P' and the Hamiltonian H(P best ) of the current optimal solution P best
  • T is the temperature of the iterative process
  • random (0, 1 ) is a random number of (0, 1).
  • exp(- ⁇ H/T)>random(0,1) can represent the condition for accepting new solutions that perform poorly.
  • the temperature gradually decreases from T 0 to zero, and the second function term H k also decreases.
  • the probability of its acceptance will become lower and lower, that is, the probability of "passing through” the potential barriers on both sides of the local optimal solution due to the quantum tunneling effect will become lower and lower.
  • processing device 120 in response to exp(- ⁇ H/T)>random(0,1), processing device 120 may perform step 8070. In some embodiments, processing device 120 may perform step 8100 in response to exp(- ⁇ H/T) ⁇ random(0,1).
  • Step 8080 determine whether H(P') ⁇ H(P best ).
  • the processing device 120 may determine whether the Hamiltonian H(P′) of the solution P′ is smaller than the Hamiltonian H(P best ) of the current optimal solution P best .
  • processing device 120 in response to H(P') ⁇ H(P best ), may perform step 8090. In some embodiments, processing device 120 may perform step 8100 in response to H(P′) ⁇ H(P best ).
  • Step 8100 determine whether t ⁇ N.
  • processing device 120 in response to t ⁇ N, may perform step 8110. In some embodiments, in response to t>N, processing device 120 may perform step 8120.
  • Step 8120 determine whether s ⁇ M.
  • processing device 120 in response to s ⁇ M, may perform step 8130. In some embodiments, in response to s>M, processing device 120 may perform step 8140.
  • Step 8140 Determine the target puncture path.
  • the processing device may determine the candidate puncture path corresponding to the optimal solution P best as the target puncture path.
  • the optimal solution is determined through a quantum annealing algorithm, and the candidate puncture path corresponding to the optimal solution is determined as the target puncture path, which can accurately and effectively plan the target puncture path and improve the efficiency of target puncture path planning.
  • target puncture path planning is a clinical multi-constraint optimization problem, the problem is a non-deterministic polynomial problem, that is, there is a definite answer, but the time complexity of obtaining the solution increases exponentially.
  • Classic computers have calculation problems due to their own performance limitations.
  • the technical solution of this embodiment can be run on a quantum annealing machine, such as mapping the Hamiltonian to the real qubits of the quantum annealing machine, so that The puncture path planning is more efficient and can achieve fast and accurate preoperative puncture path planning.
  • process 800 is only for example and illustration, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification.
  • process 800 under the guidance of this specification. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification.
  • the processing device can calculate the path analysis result corresponding to the target search point according to the Hamiltonian based on the candidate puncture path corresponding to any candidate needle entry point;
  • the optimal path analysis result is searched from multiple path analysis results, and the candidate puncture path corresponding to the optimal path analysis result is used as the target puncture path.
  • the processing device 120 may calculate the Hamiltonian corresponding to all candidate puncture paths, and determine the candidate puncture path with the smallest Hamiltonian as the target puncture path.
  • the processing device 120 may determine the target puncture path through other preset search algorithms. For example, genetic algorithm, simulated annealing algorithm, etc.
  • the target parameters may include target puncture path, target stop point location, and target ablation sphere parameters.
  • the processing device 120 may adopt the process of FIG. 9 or FIG. 13 to determine the target parameters.
  • Figure 9 is an exemplary flowchart of determining target parameters according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • process 900 includes the following steps.
  • one or more operations of the process 900 shown in FIG. 9 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the process 900 shown in FIG. 9 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
  • Step 910 Generate at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data.
  • Planning parameters refer to a set of parameters that can be selected as an interventional device to perform an ablation treatment procedure.
  • the planning parameters may include the number of puncture paths n, the needle entry point set ⁇ P i1 , Pi2 , ..., P in ⁇ and the interventional needle target point set ⁇ P j1 , P j2 , ..., P jn ⁇
  • the puncture path consisting of ⁇ P i1j1 , P i2j2 ,..., P injn ⁇ , at least one stop point position on each puncture path ⁇ T 1p1 , T 2p1 ,..., T kpn ⁇ , optional ablation ball parameters ⁇ R 1 , R 2 ,..., R s ⁇ etc.
  • Different ablation power and ablation time correspond to different ablation sphere parameters. The greater the ablation power, the longer the ablation time, and the larger the ablation sphere corresponding to the ablation sphere parameters.
  • P injn represents the nth path composed of the needle entry point P in and the target point of the interventional needle P jn ;
  • T kpn represents the kth stop point position on the nth path;
  • R s represents the sth power-time
  • the corresponding ablation sphere parameters (for example, if the ablation sphere is an ellipsoid, R s can be an ellipsoid with a length of 36 ⁇ 36 ⁇ 42 mm in its major and minor axes), s represents the number of different ablation sphere parameters for selection.
  • the ablation sphere may be in the shape of an ellipsoid, a sphere, or the like.
  • ablation ball parameters corresponding to different stop point positions on the same puncture path may be the same.
  • the puncture path ⁇ P i1j1 , P i2j2 ⁇ composed of P j1 , P j2 ⁇
  • the puncture path P i1j1 has a stay point position ⁇ T 1p1 , T 2p1 ⁇
  • the puncture path P i2j2 has a stay point position T 1p2
  • optional Ablation sphere parameters ⁇ R 1 , R 2 , R 3 ⁇ .
  • the processing device 120 can perform three-dimensional reconstruction of patient data to obtain a three-dimensional medical image, and determine structural features based on the three-dimensional medical image, thereby determining at least one set of planning parameters based on the three-dimensional medical image.
  • three-dimensional medical imaging see Figure 4 and its related description for more information on structural characteristics.
  • the processing device 120 may determine planning parameters based on the three-dimensional medical images in various ways. For example, the processing device 120 may use a path composed of any two points in the area of interest as a puncture path, randomly select at least one point on each puncture path as at least one stop point position on each puncture path, and select Select ablation sphere parameters to determine the ablation sphere parameters. For another example, doctors can manually input planning parameters based on three-dimensional medical images. For another example, the processing device 120 may use actual parameters corresponding to three-dimensional medical images similar to the three-dimensional medical images in the historical database as planning parameters.
  • the processing device 120 can also perform a preprocessing operation on the three-dimensional medical image, where the preprocessing operation includes one or more of region of interest cropping, data point downsampling, and blood vessel coarse subdivision grading; and then based on the preprocessing The results obtained from the operation determine at least one set of planning parameters.
  • Region-of-interest cropping refers to cropping three-dimensional medical images based on the location of the lesion, thereby limiting the effective range of the needle entry point.
  • the processing device 120 can select upper and lower adjacent Lmm (for example, 10mm, 20mm, 30mm, etc.) slices for needle entry point planning based on the target area bounding box or the target area centroid position.
  • the processing device 120 may crop a 1/4 area of the skin contour bounding box as the effective needle entry point area based on the skin contour bounding box and the center position of the target point.
  • the processing device 120 may use the above two methods to crop the area of interest.
  • Data point downsampling can sparse the higher-precision data points in three-dimensional medical images, thereby sparse points in the lesion area and skin points.
  • Methods for downsampling data points include but are not limited to resampling, interpolation, etc.
  • Blood vessel thickness grading refers to grading blood vessels in three-dimensional medical images according to their diameter. Blood vessels of different thicknesses have different effects on ablation.
  • the blood vessel thickness classification allows the path planning to be processed according to the results of different blood vessel thickness classifications to avoid the puncture path passing through thicker blood vessels and the ablation field causing damage to thicker blood vessels.
  • the processing device 120 can distinguish blood vessels in three-dimensional medical images, construct blood vessel tree branches through graph theory, and calculate blood vessel segment diameters through blood vessel center lines to complete blood vessel thickness classification.
  • the results of the blood vessel thickness classification can be expressed in grades based on the diameter of the blood vessel segment. For example, the blood vessel diameter can be divided into level 1, level 2, level 3, etc. from small to large according to the diameter of the blood vessel.
  • the processing device 120 can determine the needle entry point set and the target point set in the planning parameters based on the downsampling results of data points in the cropped region of interest obtained by the preprocessing operation (for example, the downsampling results are obtained by The data points are used as needle entry point set, target point set, etc.), you can filter out the puncture paths that will pass through thicker blood vessels based on the blood vessel thickness classification results, and set the ablation range composed of optional ablation sphere parameters so as not to affect thicker blood vessels. within the range of blood vessel damage.
  • the pressure brought by the determination process of target parameters on the performance of the processing equipment can be alleviated, while the efficiency of optimizing the ablation process can be improved.
  • Step 920 Determine target parameters based on at least one set of planning parameters.
  • the target parameters may include target puncture path, target stop point location, and target ablation sphere parameters.
  • target puncture path For more information on target parameters, target puncture path, target stop point location, and target ablation sphere parameters, see Figure 3 and its related descriptions.
  • the processing device 120 may generate a set of individuals based on the individual generator. Perform at least one iterative update on the individual collection until the first iteration completion condition is met. Based on the updated individual set, at least one set of intermediate parameters is determined, and then based on at least one set of intermediate parameters, the target parameters are determined. For more information on determining target parameters, see Figure 11 and its associated description.
  • process 900 is only for example and illustration, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification.
  • various modifications and changes can be made to process 900 under the guidance of this specification. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification.
  • one or more of the preprocessing operations in step 910 may be omitted, or all of them may be omitted.
  • the processing device 120 may first determine the target puncture path based on the process of FIG. 4 , and then determine the target parameters other than the target puncture path (ie, the target stay point position and the target ablation sphere parameters) based on the process of FIG. 9 .
  • the processing device 120 can generate at least one set of planning parameters only by changing the stay point position and the ablation ball parameters.
  • Figure 11 is another exemplary flowchart for determining target parameters illustrated in some embodiments of the present specification.
  • process 1100 includes the following steps.
  • one or more operations of the process 1100 shown in FIG. 11 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the process 1100 shown in FIG. 11 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
  • Step 1110 Generate an individual set based on the individual generator.
  • each individual refers to a specific subject corresponding to the planning parameters.
  • each individual can correspond to a set of planning parameters, that is, each individual can include a set of puncture paths, ablation sphere parameters, stay point locations and other parameters.
  • the individual generator can generate at least one individual based on certain rules and calculate individual attributes of each of the at least one individual.
  • the individual attributes may include the individual's first evaluation value, first constraint determination value, etc.
  • first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value please refer to step 1130 and its related description.
  • An individual collection refers to a collection of multiple individuals. For example, a set of multiple planning parameters.
  • processing device 120 may generate a set of individuals based on the individual generator in a variety of ways.
  • the individual generator can randomly select the needle entry point and the target point from the needle entry point set and the target point set to pair up to form at least one puncture path, and determine the stop point position according to certain intervals on each puncture path. (such as at the midpoint, trisection point, etc. of the intersection between the puncture path and the lesion area), and randomly select the ablation sphere parameters from the optional ablation sphere parameters, and add at least one path with a stay point position and ablation sphere parameters. Randomly combine to form multiple individuals containing at least one puncture path, and the multiple individuals constitute an individual set.
  • the individual generator can also use the actual parameter corresponding to at least one patient data whose similarity is higher than the similarity threshold in the historical database as an individual to construct an individual set.
  • the similarity is the similarity between the three-dimensional medical image corresponding to the patient data and the three-dimensional medical image corresponding to the patient data in the historical database.
  • the similarity threshold can be set manually.
  • Step 1120 Generate at least one new individual based on the individual generator, and add at least one new individual to the individual set.
  • a new individual refers to an individual whose at least one parameter is different from any of the original individuals in the individual set. For example, a new individual whose needle entry point is different from all the original individuals.
  • the number of new individuals may be the same as the number of individuals in the original individual set, or may be different from the number of individuals in the original individual set.
  • the individual generator can generate new individuals in the same manner as generating individuals in the individual set described in step 1110 above, which will not be described again here.
  • the individual generator can also generate a new individual by changing at least one parameter of the individuals in the collection (eg, needle entry point, target point, number of stay points, stay point locations, ablation sphere parameters, etc.) .
  • the individual generator can reduce the ablation sphere parameters of at least one individual by 20% to generate at least one new individual.
  • the individual generator can also pair individuals with the same number of original puncture paths in the individual set, and use the paired individuals to generate new individuals through crossover operations, etc., where the crossover operation can include a single At least one of point crossover, multi-point crossover, uniform crossover, polynomial crossover, etc.
  • the individual generator can generate a third individual with a higher probability and use the third individual as a new individual.
  • the third individual is an individual of the same dimension that has the highest proportion in the current individual set.
  • the third individual refers to the individual with the same latitude as the dimension with the highest proportion in the current individual set. For example, if the proportion of individuals of a certain dimension in the current individual set is 60%, and the individuals of other dimensions are less than 60%, then the dimensions of the third individual are the same as the above dimensions.
  • Dimension refers to the number of certain parameters in the planning parameters corresponding to the individual. For example, the number of puncture paths, the number of stopping points on each puncture path, etc. in the individual planning parameters.
  • the same dimension means that the dimensions of individuals are exactly the same.
  • the number of puncture paths for individual A is 2, and the number of stay points on each puncture path is 3.
  • the number of puncture paths for individual B is also 2, and the number of stay points on each puncture path is also 3. Then the individual A and individual B have the same dimensions.
  • the individual generator generates the third individual with a higher probability, which can stabilize the dimensions of the individuals in the individual set, improve the efficiency of iterative updates, and at the same time promote the individual generator to generate a higher probability.
  • the probability of generating a new individual based on the current set of individuals.
  • the individual generator in response to satisfying the preset conditions, may also generate new individuals based on the current individual set with a higher probability.
  • Preset conditions refer to the requirements that a collection of individuals needs to meet.
  • the preset condition may be that the number of iterative updates of the individual collection is greater than the iteration number threshold (such as 500 times, etc.).
  • the preset condition may also be that the proportion of individuals in a certain dimension in the individual collection is higher than a proportion threshold (such as 80%).
  • the individual generator in response to satisfying the preset conditions, can generate a new individual based on at least one current individual through a certain evolutionary method. For example, new individuals are generated through evolutionary methods such as genetic mutation and particle swarm, rather than randomly generating new individuals.
  • the dimensions of the individuals in the individual set tend to be the same.
  • the individual corresponding to the dimension with the largest proportion in the individual set has a greater probability of being a better individual.
  • the individual generator can evolve to generate new individuals based on individuals of this dimension with a higher probability.
  • the individual generator can generate new individuals based on current individuals with a higher probability through various methods. For example, the individual generator can pair individuals corresponding to the highest proportion of dimensions, and then exchange at least one parameter (such as needle entry point, ablation sphere parameters, etc.) of the paired individuals to form two new individuals. For another example, the individual generator can also allow the new individual generated after at least one parameter exchange to randomly change at least one of its parameters (such as the number of stay points, the location of the stay points, etc.) according to a certain probability to generate a new individual. For another example, the individual generator can directly randomly change at least one parameter of the individual corresponding to the dimension with the highest proportion (such as the number of stay points, the location of the stay points, etc.) to generate a new individual.
  • the individual generator can directly randomly change at least one parameter of the individual corresponding to the dimension with the highest proportion (such as the number of stay points, the location of the stay points, etc.) to generate a new individual.
  • the individual generator generates a new individual based on the current individual with a higher probability, so that the generated new individual can retain some relatively reliable parameters that still survive after multiple iterative updates, defining The variation range of parameters during iterative update keeps the quality of the individual collection relatively stable during iterative update and obtains high-quality individuals faster.
  • the individual generator can add new individuals to the individual set based on certain rules. For example, an individual generator can add all new individuals generated to the individual collection. For another example, the individual generator can also randomly select new individuals with the same number as the number of individuals in the current individual set to join the individual set.
  • the processing device 120 may add individuals whose first constraint determination value is greater than the determination value threshold (eg, -1, -2, -3, etc.) to the individual set based on the individual generator.
  • the judgment value threshold can be set manually.
  • the first constraint determination value please refer to step 1140 and its related description.
  • the processing device 120 may filter individuals in the individual set based on the individual filter to update the individual set.
  • the screening may include performing the selection operations of steps 1130 to 1140 on the individuals in the individual collection.
  • Step 1130 Calculate the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value of each individual in the individual set.
  • the first constraint judgment value refers to a numerical value or letter that can reflect the degree of compliance of an individual with the constraint conditions.
  • the first constraint determination value can be represented by a numerical value between 1-10, or letters a-f, or a star rating. The larger the value, the greater the dictionary sorting, or the higher the star rating, the higher the degree of compliance.
  • the first constraint decision value may be determined based on the decision value of at least one constraint condition.
  • at least one constraint may include whether the instrument length meets the requirements.
  • Constraints refer to conditions that restrict the selection of planning parameters. For example, the length of the interventional needle will limit the length of the puncture path and thus the location of the needle entry point and target point.
  • the constraints may include whether the instrument length meets the requirements, the puncture does not penetrate the risk structure, the ablation field completely covers the lesion, the ablation electrode distance is reasonable and the angle between the puncture paths is reasonable, etc.
  • the judgment value of a constraint condition refers to a numerical value or letter that can reflect whether the constraint condition is satisfied. For example, when a certain constraint is satisfied, the judgment value is assigned a value of 0, and when the constraint is not satisfied, the judgment value is assigned a value of -1.
  • the instrument length meets the required constraints refers to the limitation of the instrument length on the length of the puncture path.
  • the length of the puncture path cannot exceed the length of the instrument, otherwise the interventional needle may not be able to reach the target point and/or the stop point, resulting in the inability to perform ablation treatment on the lesion area.
  • the instrument length may be the length of the interventional needle.
  • the processing device 120 can calculate the length of the path P injn composed of the needle entry point P in and the target point P jn of each puncture path in the individual based on the individual generator, and compare the length of P injn with the instrument length. Compare to determine whether the instrument length constraint is met. When the instrument length constraint is satisfied, the judgment value of the constraint is 0; when the instrument length constraint is not satisfied, the judgment value is -1.
  • the constraint that the puncture does not penetrate the risk structure refers to the restriction of the puncture path by the dangerous tissue.
  • Dangerous tissues can include thicker blood vessels, vital organs, etc.
  • the processing device 120 may characterize the structure to determine whether at least one puncture path of the individual punctures but does not penetrate the risk structure. See Figure 4 and its associated description for more information on structural features. When the puncture path does not interfere with dangerous tissues in the three-dimensional medical image, the constraint is satisfied, and the judgment value is 0. When the puncture path interferes with at least one dangerous tissue, the constraint is not satisfied, and the judgment value is - 1.
  • the constraint that the ablation area completely covers the lesion is the restriction on the scope of the ablation field.
  • the processing device 120 can combine the individual's puncture path, stop point location, and ablation sphere parameters with three-dimensional medical images to determine whether all ablation field ranges corresponding to the individual completely encompass the lesion area.
  • the ablation field range completely surrounds the lesion area the constraint that the ablation area completely covers the lesion is satisfied.
  • the corresponding judgment value is 0, otherwise, the corresponding judgment value is -1.
  • the constraint on the rationality of the ablation electrode distance is the restriction on the ablation electrode distance between multiple puncture paths.
  • the processing device 120 can calculate the shortest distance between the ablation electrode segments of different puncture paths in the individual.
  • the distance threshold can be set according to the power parameters and usage specifications of the interventional device.
  • the constraints on the rationality of the safety of the angles between puncture paths refer to the constraints on the angles of the puncture paths under multiple puncture paths.
  • the processing device 120 can project different puncture paths in an individual onto the same plane and calculate the included angle of the projection.
  • the included angle is less than the included angle threshold, the constraints on the rationality of the angle between the puncture paths are safe. is satisfied, the corresponding judgment value is assigned to 0, otherwise, the judgment value is assigned to -1.
  • the processing device 120 may calculate the sum of the determination values of different constraint conditions, and use the sum of the determination values of the constraint conditions as the first constraint determination value.
  • the first evaluation value refers to a numerical value that can reflect the quality of an individual.
  • the first evaluation value may include the number of puncture paths and the ablation conformation rate.
  • the number of puncture paths refers to the number of interventional needle paths included in an individual. When an interventional needle enters the human body, it will cause more or less damage to the human body. The smaller the number of individual puncture paths, the smaller the damage to the patient's body, which can be used to evaluate the individual's pros and cons. For example, if the number of puncture paths for individual A is 2 and the number of puncture paths for individual B is 3, then individual A will cause less damage to the patient's body due to the smaller number of puncture paths.
  • the ablation conformity rate refers to the percentage of the lesion volume to the total planned ablation volume under complete ablation conditions.
  • the lesion volume is 1.5 cubic centimeters and the total planned ablation volume is 2 cubic centimeters, so the ablation conformity rate is 75%.
  • the total planned ablation volume is the volume of the union of the planned ablation volumes corresponding to all stay point positions.
  • the planned ablation volume corresponding to the stay point position T 1p1 is 2 cubic centimeters
  • the planned ablation volume corresponding to the stay point position T 2p1 is 2.5 cubic centimeters
  • the planned ablation volume corresponding to the stay point position T 1p2 is 2 cubic centimeters.
  • the planned ablation volumes corresponding to the stay point positions T 1p1 and T 2p1 have an overlap of 1 cubic centimeter (i.e., the diagonal line part).
  • the greater the ablation conformity rate the smaller the damage to surrounding tissue caused by the ablation treatment surgery, and the more it meets the treatment expectations.
  • Step 1140 Select individuals based on the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value, and determine an updated individual set.
  • the individual filter when the number of new individuals is the same as the number of individuals in the original individual set, the individual filter can randomly select two individuals from the individual set added to the new individual as two matching individuals, And select one of the individuals based on the first evaluation value and the first constraint judgment value, then randomly select two individuals from the remaining individual set and select one of them, and so on, all the selected individuals are collected as an update The subsequent collection of individuals.
  • the processing device 120 may calculate the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value of the individuals in the individual set, select the individual based on the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value, and determine the updated individual set. For more information about the individual filter selecting individuals based on the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value, see Figure 12 and its related description.
  • Step 1150 Determine whether the first iteration completion condition is met. In response to the first iteration completion condition being satisfied, the processing device may perform step 1160; in response to the first iteration completion condition being not satisfied, the processing device 120 may perform step 1120.
  • the first iteration completion condition refers to the condition that needs to be met for the individual collection to stop iterative update.
  • the number of iterative updates reaches the maximum number threshold (such as 500 times, 1200 times, 2000 times, etc.).
  • the proportion of individuals of a certain dimension in the individual set exceeds the maximum threshold (such as 80%, 85%, 90%, etc.).
  • the proportion difference of the individuals with the highest proportion in the individual set is less than the minimum threshold (such as 1%, 2%, 3%, etc.).
  • the processing device 120 while the processing device 120 iteratively updates the individual set, it counts each iterative update. For example, when the first update of the individual set is completed, the count is 1; when the second update of the individual set is completed, the count is 2. When the count exceeds the maximum times threshold, it is determined that the first iteration completion condition is met. In some embodiments, after each iteration update is completed, the processing device 120 can calculate the proportion of individuals in each dimension in the current individual set. When the proportion of individuals in a certain dimension exceeds the maximum threshold, it is determined that the first iteration completion condition is met. .
  • the processing device 120 can calculate the difference between the individual proportion of the dimension with the highest proportion and the proportion when the last iterative update is completed. When the proportion difference is less than the minimum threshold, It is determined that the first iteration completion condition is met.
  • the processing device 120 may determine the target parameter by performing step 1160 . In some embodiments, in response to the first iteration completion condition being not satisfied, processing device 120 may continue to step 1120 .
  • Step 1160 Determine at least one set of intermediate parameters based on the updated individual set.
  • the intermediate parameters refer to a better set of planning parameters for selection.
  • the processing device 120 may determine a Pareto front solution based on the updated set of individuals, using the Pareto front solution as at least one set of intermediate parameters.
  • the Pareto front solution refers to a set of individuals that are not completely dominated by other individuals.
  • the processing device 120 may compare the first evaluation value of any individual in the individual set with the first evaluation values of other individuals to see whether there is any indicator in the first evaluation value of some other individual ( For example, the number of puncture paths, ablation conformity rate) are better than any one individual, and the first evaluation value in response to the absence of some other individual is better than any one individual (that is, the number of puncture paths for any one individual) , at least one of the ablation conformal rates is better than other individuals in the individual set), then any individual is determined to be one of the Pareto front solutions.
  • multiple individuals in the Pareto front solution are used as intermediate parameters for selection, which allows users to select the most appropriate target parameters according to their own surgical habits and improves the universality of the puncture path planning scheme. sex.
  • Step 1170 Determine target parameters based on at least one set of intermediate parameters.
  • the processing device 120 may use the intermediate parameter with the highest ablation conformation rate among at least one set of intermediate parameters as the target parameter.
  • the processing device 120 may send at least one set of intermediate parameters to the user terminal used by the doctor for the doctor to independently select, and use the intermediate parameters independently selected by the doctor as target parameters.
  • the doctor may also choose to automatically recommend the target parameters.
  • the processing device 120 can calculate the damage value F of at least one set of intermediate parameters, and recommend the intermediate parameter with the smallest damage value F to the user as the target parameter.
  • n is the number of puncture paths
  • eta is the ablation conformation rate
  • L is the total length of all puncture paths in the same set of intermediate parameters
  • a is a larger constant, used to make the damage value as close as possible to the number of puncture paths.
  • the smaller the number of puncture paths the smaller the damage to healthy tissue, the smaller the damage value F, and the easier it is to be used as a target parameter
  • b is a parameter that can balance the number of puncture paths and the ablation conformity rate.
  • the individual generator generates individual sets and new individuals, and the Pareto front solution is used as at least one set of intermediate parameters, which can expand the scope of searching for optimal individuals and screen out relatively small global ones.
  • Optimal solution, thereby avoiding the final confirmed target parameters are only local optimal parameters.
  • process 1100 is only for example and explanation, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification.
  • various modifications and changes can be made to the process 1100 under the guidance of this description. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification.
  • you can choose one round of iterative update that is, iteratively update the individual collection by generating 10 new individuals each time, for a total of 10 iterative updates, and merge them to directly generate 100 at a time.
  • the individual filter is directly generated from Determine at least one set of intermediate parameters among 100 individuals to achieve one-time iterative update.
  • Figure 12 is an exemplary flow diagram of an individual filter screening process according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in Figure 12, process 1200 includes the following steps. In some embodiments, one or more operations of the process 1200 shown in FIG. 12 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 . For example, the process 1200 shown in FIG. 12 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
  • Step 1210 Calculate the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value WA, WB of the two matching individuals A and B.
  • the individual filter when the individual generator calculates the individual attributes of each of at least one individual, can directly call the first of the two matching individuals A and B in the individual attributes calculated by the individual generator.
  • Each index in the evaluation value for example, the number of puncture paths, ablation conformity rate
  • the individual filter may calculate each indicator in the first evaluation value of the two matching individuals A and B and the individual A's first evaluation value. A constraint determination value W A and the first constraint determination value WB of individual B.
  • Step 1220 determine whether W A ⁇ WB .
  • processing device 120 may perform step 1260 of selecting individual B. In some embodiments, in response to W A ⁇ WB , processing device 120 may proceed to step 1230 .
  • Step 1240 determine whether individual A completely dominates individual B.
  • processing device 120 in response to individual A completely dominating individual B, may perform step 1280 of selecting individual A. In some embodiments, in response to individual A not fully dominating individual B, processing device 120 may proceed to step 1250.
  • Complete dominance means that the first evaluation value of an individual is better than that of another individual. For example, when the number of puncture paths for individual A is 2 and the ablation conformity rate is 95%, and the number of puncture paths for individual B is 3 and the ablation conformity rate is 85%, the number of puncture paths and the ablation conformity rate for individual A are both equal. is better than individual B, then individual A is said to completely dominate individual B.
  • Step 1250 determine whether individual B completely dominates individual A.
  • processing device 120 in response to individual B not completely dominating individual A, may perform step 1270 of randomly selecting. In some embodiments, in response to individual B completely dominating individual A, processing device 120 may perform step 1260 of selecting individual B.
  • Step 1260 select individual B.
  • Step 1270 random selection.
  • step 1250 determines, in response to individual B not completely dominating individual A, that is, when two matching individuals do not completely dominate each other (that is, individual A does not completely dominate individual B, and individual B does not completely dominate individual A)
  • the processing device 120 may determine the updated individual set based on the number of individuals that the two matching individuals each fully dominate in the individual set.
  • Matching individuals refer to two individuals randomly selected from the individual set to which the new individual is added. For more information about pairwise matching, please refer to step 1140 and its related description.
  • the processing device 120 may determine the number of individuals that are completely dominated by each of the two matching individuals by determining the relationship between the first evaluation values of the two matching individuals and other individuals in the individual set, and assign the respective The set of individuals is updated as the proportion of the number of fully dominated individuals to the total number of individuals dominated by the two matched individuals as the probability that the two matched individuals are retained.
  • Step 1280 select individual A.
  • process 1200 is only for example and illustration, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification.
  • various modifications and changes can be made to the process 1200 under the guidance of this description. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification.
  • steps 1220 to 1230 may be omitted, that is, the processing device 120 may determine whether individual A completely dominates individual B based only on the first evaluation values of the two matching individuals A and B.
  • the processing device 120 may perform step 1280, that is, selecting individual A; in response to individual B completely dominating individual A, the processing device 120 may perform step 1260, that is, selecting individual B; in response to individual A and individual B are not completely dominated by each other, and the processing device 120 can perform step 1270, that is, perform random selection.
  • the processing device 120 can determine whether the length of the instrument meets the requirements, the puncture does not penetrate the risk structure, the ablation field range completely covers the lesion, and the ablation electrode is used in the pre-processing stage. Constraints such as the rationality of distance and the safety of angles between puncture paths restrict the selection range of planning parameters to ensure that individuals in the individual set satisfy the constraints.
  • Figure 13 is another exemplary flowchart for determining target parameters according to some embodiments of the present specification.
  • process 1300 includes the following steps.
  • one or more operations of the process 1300 shown in FIG. 13 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the process 1300 shown in FIG. 13 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
  • Step 1310 Determine the number of puncture paths and the parameter range of the ablation sphere based on the patient data.
  • the processing device 120 may determine the lesion volume based on the patient data and determine the number of puncture paths based on the lesion volume.
  • the number of puncture paths is the same as the number of needle insertion points.
  • Lesion volume refers to the volume of the lesion area. For example, the volume of a patient's tumor.
  • the processing device 120 may identify voxels of the lesion area based on the patient data and calculate the lesion volume based on the voxels of the lesion area. For example, the processing device 120 may determine the volume of the lesion area based on the number of voxel points in the target lesion area in the three-dimensional medical image of the patient data and the voxel equivalent value. Among them, the voxel equivalent value is the actual physical size corresponding to a voxel point. For more information on three-dimensional reconstruction, see Figure 5 and its related description.
  • the processing device 120 may determine the number of puncture paths based on the relationship between the lesion volume and the volume threshold, where the volume threshold is a preset lesion volume.
  • the volume threshold can be determined based on manual experience or historical data.
  • the volume threshold can include the maximum lesion volume that can be ablated by a single needle ablation in historical data, etc.
  • the volume thresholds can be V 1 , V 2 , V 3 ,..., when the lesion volume V satisfies 0 ⁇ V ⁇ V 1 , the number of puncture paths is 1; when the lesion volume V satisfies V 1 ⁇ V ⁇ V When 2 , the number of puncture paths is 2; when the lesion volume V satisfies V 2 ⁇ V ⁇ V 3 , the number of puncture paths is 3.
  • the time for determining target parameters can be reduced and the efficiency of puncture path planning can be improved.
  • the processing device 120 can determine the lesion mask based on the patient data, determine the long axis of the lesion and the short axis of the lesion based on the lesion mask, and then determine the ablation sphere parameter range based on the long axis of the lesion and the short axis of the lesion.
  • the lesion mask refers to the lesion area segmented from the patient data.
  • tumor regions segmented from patient data may be three-dimensional.
  • the processing device 120 can segment the lesion area from the patient data to generate a lesion mask. For example, the processing device 120 may set voxel values in areas other than lesions in the patient data to 0, thereby generating a lesion mask.
  • patient data can be processed using a mask extraction model to obtain a lesion mask.
  • patient data can be input into a mask extraction model, and the mask extraction model outputs a lesion mask.
  • the mask extraction model may be a graph neural network (Graph Neural Network, GNN), a convolutional neural network (Convolutional Neural Networks, CNN), or a deep neural network (Deep Neural Networks, DNN), etc.
  • the patient data in historical data can be used as training data to train the mask extraction model, so that the mask extraction model can output the lesion mask based on the patient data.
  • the labels corresponding to the training data can be determined by manually annotated lesion masks.
  • the long axis of the lesion refers to the longest line segment connecting any two points on the boundary of the lesion area.
  • the processing device 120 can obtain the peripheral boundary points of the lesion according to the lesion mask to form a set E. Next, the processing device 120 can randomly select two points A 1 and A 2 from the set E. A 1 and A 2 are connected to form a space line segment, and calculate the length L 1 of the line segment; fix point A 1 and update A 2 from E.
  • the short axis of the lesion refers to the longest line segment in the smallest projected area of the lesion area.
  • the processing device 120 can obtain the peripheral boundary points of the lesion according to the lesion mask to form a set F; use a distance field calculation method to calculate the center point Y of the lesion mask (for example, the lesion center of mass, geometric center, etc.); treat Y as a radiation source and emit rays in all directions; take a ray I in a certain direction and calculate the projection H of the lesion on the plane G perpendicular to the ray I; calculate the minimum circumference of the projection H
  • the diameter D I of the circle C is such that the circle can just completely cover the projection of the lesion; repeat the above steps to obtain a set D of diameters of the smallest circles in all directions, and take the minimum value in the set D as the length d of the short axis of the lesion.
  • the parameter range of ablation balls on multiple puncture paths can all be d ⁇ a ⁇ l.
  • the number of determined puncture paths is 2 (satisfying n ⁇ 1)
  • the short axis length of the ablation spherical ellipsoid of the first puncture path is a 1
  • the short axis length of the ablation spherical ellipsoid of the second puncture path is is a 2
  • a 1 and a 2 can be different
  • the ablation sphere parameter range of the first puncture path can be d ⁇ a 1 ⁇ l
  • the ablation sphere parameter range of the second puncture path can be d ⁇ a 2 ⁇ l.
  • the range of ablation sphere parameters is limited by the long axis of the lesion and the short axis of the lesion, and the selection range of the ablation sphere parameters can be compressed to speed up the subsequent determination of target parameters through iterative optimization.
  • Step 1320 Determine at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data, the number of puncture paths, and the ablation sphere parameter range.
  • the needle insertion point P i1 is adjusted to the needle insertion point P (i 1 , j 1 ).
  • Point P i2 is adjusted to needle insertion point P(i 2 , j 2 ), target point P j1 is adjusted to target point Q 1 , and target point P j2 is adjusted to target point Q 2 .
  • Planning parameters refer to a set of parameters that can be selected as an interventional device to perform an ablation treatment procedure.
  • the planning parameters include the needle entry point set ⁇ P(i 1 , j 1 ), P(i 2 , j 2 ), ..., P(i n , j n ) ⁇ and the target point set ⁇ Q 1 , Q 2 ,..., Q n ⁇ composed of puncture path P(i n , j n )-Q n , system ablation ball parameters ⁇ R 1 , R 2 ,..., R s ⁇ , each The stop point position T kpn on the puncture path.
  • a set of planning parameters can include the needle entry point set ⁇ P(i 1 , j 1 ), P(i 2 , j 2 ) ⁇ and the target point set ⁇ Q 1 , Q 2 ⁇ to form two puncture paths P(i 1 , j 1 )-Q 1 , P(i 2 , j 2 )-Q 2 , there are stay point positions T 1p1 , T 2p1 on the puncture path P(i 1 , j 1 )-Q 1 , the puncture path P(i 2 , there is a stay point position T 2p1 on j 2 )-Q 2 , and the optional ablation ball parameter is R.
  • the length range of the minor axis a of R is:
  • the size of the major axis c of R is determined based on the corresponding minor axis.
  • the size of the major axis c corresponding to different minor axes a can be determined by querying a comparison table.
  • the comparison table can be obtained from the interventional equipment manufacturer.
  • ablation ball parameters at different stop point locations on the same puncture path may be the same.
  • the ablation ball parameters at the stay point positions T 1p1 and T 2p1 on the puncture path P(i 1 , j 1 )-Q 1 may be the same.
  • the processing device 120 may determine the needle entry point set ⁇ P(i 1 , j 1 ), P(i 2 , j 2 ), ..., P(in , j n ) based on the skin area corresponding to the lesion . ) ⁇ . In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may use a set of points in the lesion area as a target point set ⁇ Q 1 , Q 2 , ..., Q n ⁇ .
  • the processing device 120 can connect at least one line segment formed by connecting the point P( in , jn ) in the needle insertion point set and the point Qn in the target point set as at least one puncture path P( in ,j n )-Q n , and set the possible stay point position T kpn and ablation ball parameter R on the puncture path. For example, set the stay point position equidistantly at the intersection of the puncture path and the lesion area, and randomly select the ablation ball parameter R . See Figure 15 and its associated description for more information on determining planning parameters.
  • Step 1330 Determine at least one set of feasible solutions based on at least one set of planning parameters.
  • the processing device 120 can generate a planning set based on at least one set of planning parameters.
  • the planning set includes multiple intermediate solutions, each intermediate solution corresponding to a set of planning parameters; and perform at least one round of iterative optimization on the planning set until The second iteration completion condition is met, and the optimal planning set is obtained; based on the optimal planning set, at least one set of feasible solutions is determined. See Figures 17-18 and their associated descriptions for more information on determining at least one set of feasible solutions.
  • Step 1340 Determine target parameters based on at least one set of feasible solutions.
  • processing device 120 may determine target parameters based on at least one set of feasible solutions. For more information on determining target parameters, see Figures 17-18 and their related descriptions.
  • At least one set of planning parameters is determined by determining the number of puncture paths and the parameter range of the ablation sphere, And by determining the target parameters based on at least one set of planning parameters, the range of planning parameters can be narrowed, and more reasonable target parameters can be obtained more quickly to improve the doctor's surgical efficiency and reduce the difficulty of the doctor's work.
  • process 1300 is only for example and explanation, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification.
  • process 1300 can be made to process 1300 under the guidance of this description. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification.
  • the processing device 120 may first determine the target puncture path based on the process of FIG. 4 , and then determine the target parameters other than the target puncture path (ie, the target stop point position and the target ablation sphere parameters) based on the process of FIG. 13 . In step 1320, since the target puncture path has been determined, the processing device 120 can generate at least one set of planning parameters only by changing the stay point position and the ablation ball parameters.
  • the user can manually draw the target puncture path, and then determine the target parameters other than the target puncture path (ie, the target stop point location and the target ablation sphere parameters) based on the process of FIG. 13 .
  • the processing device 120 can generate at least one set of planning parameters only by changing the stay point position and the ablation ball parameters.
  • Figure 15 is an exemplary flowchart of determining planning parameters according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in Figure 15, process 1500 includes the following steps. In some embodiments, one or more operations of the process 1500 shown in FIG. 15 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 . For example, the process 1500 shown in FIG. 15 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
  • Step 1510 Perform three-dimensional reconstruction on the patient data to obtain a three-dimensional medical image.
  • the patient data may include CT or MR data of the patient. See Figure 3 and its associated description for more information on patient data.
  • the processing device 120 can perform three-dimensional reconstruction of patient data to obtain a three-dimensional medical image, and determine structural features based on the three-dimensional medical image. For more information on three-dimensional medical images and structural features, see Figure 4 and its related descriptions.
  • Step 1520 Perform preprocessing operations on the three-dimensional reconstruction results.
  • the processing device 120 can also perform preprocessing operations on the results of the three-dimensional reconstruction, where the preprocessing operations include one or more of region of interest cropping, data point downsampling, and blood vessel coarse subdivision grading. See Figure 9 and its associated description for more information on preprocessing operations.
  • Step 1530 Determine at least one set of planning parameters based on the results of the preprocessing operation, the number of puncture paths, and the ablation sphere parameter range.
  • Figure 16B is a schematic diagram of a region of interest of a lesion in the lungs.
  • the dotted area in the cross-sectional view of the patient's lungs is the patient's lesion
  • point Q is a point in the lesion area
  • point Z is the surrounding body of the region of interest.
  • the center point of a circle of skin outline select the skin corresponding to the 1/4 area of interest that contains the most lesion areas as the needle entry point planning area, use the center point Z of the skin outline as the radiation source, and move towards the 1/4 area of interest.
  • the side boundary emits a number of M rays uniformly (for example, the dotted line with an arrow in the figure), calculates the intersection point of the ray and the skin contour, and stores the intersection points in a counterclockwise order (for example, starting from the first point on the right in a counterclockwise direction) They are stored in sequence as P(1,1), P(2,1), P(3,1),...P(M,1). Among them, the center point Z can be determined by the center of mass solution. Then, in this Arrange N slices evenly in the vertical direction of the boundary. Repeat the above steps for different slices to find intersection points. An N ⁇ M matrix of needle entry points can be constructed, so that N ⁇ M needle entry point sets can be confirmed.
  • P(i, j) in the figure can be the coordinates of a needle entry point, where i is the i-th counterclockwise ray, and j represents the j-th layer.
  • the processing device 120 may determine the target point set based on the results of downsampling the data points. For example, as shown in Figure 16B, the processing device can use the downsampled data points in the lesion area as target points Qn , and multiple target points constitute a target point set ⁇ Q1 , Q2 ,..., Qn ⁇ .
  • the processing device 120 may determine the puncture path based on the results of the blood vessel coarse subdivision. For example, the processing device 120 can pair the points in the needle entry point concentration and the points in the target point concentration to form multiple line segments, and combine the line segments of the blood vessels that do not pass through the preset thickness level (for example, the blood vessel thickness level is level 2 and above).
  • the puncture path as a planning parameter.
  • the processing device 120 may equidistantly set possible stay point locations based on the portion of the puncture path that intersects the lesion area.
  • the needle entry point set ⁇ P(i 1 , j 1 ), P(i 2 , j 2 ) ⁇ and the target point set ⁇ Q 1 , Q 2 ⁇ form two puncture paths P( i 1 , j 1 )-Q 1 , P(i 2 , j 2 )-Q 2 , there are stay point positions T 1p1 , T 2p1 on the puncture path P(i 1 , j 1 )-Q 1 , the puncture path P( There is a stay point position T 2p1 on i 2 , j 2 )-Q 2 .
  • the processing device 120 can be based on selectable ablation sphere parameters and ensure that the ablation sphere parameters are within the above-determined ablation sphere parameter range while not causing damage to blood vessels of a preset thickness level.
  • three-dimensional reconstruction is performed based on patient data to obtain three-dimensional medical images, and preprocessing operations are performed on the three-dimensional medical images to determine planning parameters.
  • the planning parameters can be adaptively reduced according to different lesion conditions. scope, regulation
  • the delineation parameters are more suitable for the lesion conditions of different patients and improve the efficiency of subsequent iterative optimization.
  • Figure 17 is an exemplary flowchart of determining target puncture parameters according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in Figure 17, process 1700 includes the following steps. In some embodiments, one or more operations of the process 1700 shown in FIG. 17 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 . For example, the process 1700 shown in FIG. 17 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
  • Step 1710 Generate a planning set based on at least one set of planning parameters.
  • the planning set includes a plurality of intermediate solutions, each intermediate solution corresponding to a set of planning parameters.
  • a planning set is a set composed of multiple intermediate solutions.
  • the intermediate solution is the specific subject corresponding to the planning parameters.
  • the properties of the intermediate solution include a second constraint determination value and a second evaluation value. For more information about the second constraint determination value and the second evaluation value, please refer to step 1740 and its related description.
  • the processing device 120 may randomly select intermediate solutions corresponding to a certain number (for example, 20 groups, 30 groups, etc.) of planning parameters to form a planning set based on at least one set of planning parameters.
  • the processing device 120 may select an intermediate solution from at least one set of planning parameters as a planning set based on a tournament selection strategy. For example, the processing device 120 may randomly select m (eg, 5, 10, etc.) intermediate solutions from at least one set of planning parameters, and use the optimal intermediate solution as the optimal intermediate solution based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value.
  • the planning set is repeated N times until the number of planning sets meets the quantity requirements, where the quantity requirements can be set in advance.
  • the processing device 120 may perform step 1720 to perform at least one round of iterative optimization on the planning set until the second iteration completion condition is satisfied, thereby obtaining the optimal planning set.
  • Step 1720 Perform a transformation operation on the planning set to obtain a first preset number of new intermediate solutions.
  • the transformation operation refers to the operation of generating a new intermediate solution based on the intermediate solution in the planning set. For example, operations such as crossover operations and mutation operations are performed on the parameters of the intermediate solution to generate a new intermediate solution.
  • the processing device 120 can pair the intermediate solutions in the planning set (for example, randomly pair them), and perform a crossover operation on the intermediate solutions in the two paired planning sets to obtain two new intermediate solutions.
  • the crossover operation refers to exchanging at least one parameter among the planning parameters corresponding to the paired intermediate solutions through single-point crossover, multi-point crossover, uniform crossover, arithmetic crossover, etc., to generate two new intermediate solutions.
  • planning parameters For example, at least one of the needle entry points, target points, ablation sphere parameters, etc. of two paired intermediate solutions is exchanged with each other to generate planning parameters corresponding to two new intermediate solutions.
  • the processing device 120 can perform a mutation operation on the intermediate solutions in the planning set to obtain a new intermediate solution.
  • the mutation operation refers to making certain changes to at least one parameter in the planning parameters corresponding to the intermediate solution in the planning set to obtain the planning parameters corresponding to the new intermediate solution. For example, at least one of the needle entry point, stay point position, target point, ablation sphere parameters, etc. of the intermediate solution in the planning set is changed.
  • the processing device 120 may perform a mutation operation on at least one of the new intermediate solutions obtained by the crossover operation to obtain a mutated new intermediate solution.
  • the processing device 120 may construct a set of confirmed N ⁇ M needle insertion points and determine the coordinates of the needle insertion points as (i, j). Next, the processing device 120 can calculate the minimum bounding box of the lesion through the patient data of the lesion (eg, CT, MR data, etc.) and determine the coordinates (x, y, z) of the lesion target in the XYZ direction. Further, the processing device 120 may sort the ablation spheres from small to large based on the ablation sphere parameter size, and set the ablation sphere encoding of each size to (0, s).
  • the processing device 120 may sort the ablation spheres from small to large based on the ablation sphere parameter size, and set the ablation sphere encoding of each size to (0, s).
  • the processing device 120 may determine a set of planning parameters as (i, j, x, y, z, s), that is, there are 6 variables. In some embodiments, when the number of puncture paths is 2, the processing device 120 may determine a set of planning parameters as (i 1 , j 1 , x 1 , y 1 , z 1 , s 1 , i 2 , j 2 , x 2 , y 2 , z 2 , s 2 ), that is, there are 12 variables. It should be noted that, in order to simplify the complexity of problem design, there is no need to consider the situation that there are different stop point locations on the puncture path. The optimal stop point position that satisfies complete ablation can be determined based on the ablation sphere size and lesion volume without treating the stop point position as a variable.
  • the processing device may use coding and interleaving methods to determine the new intermediate solution. For example, for two parent intermediate solutions, the processing device 120 may adjust the integer variable to a binary value encoding, and use an integer crossover operator to generate two offspring intermediate solutions. The integer values of the intermediate solution of the child and the intermediate solution of the parent remain consistent and will not generate points that deviate too far from the position of the current intermediate solution of the parent, thus achieving an iterative convergence effect.
  • the processing device may adopt a mutation method to determine a new intermediate solution. For example, for a parent intermediate solution, the processing device 120 can adjust the integer variable to a binary value encoding, and randomly invert certain bits of the binary encoding by 0 and 1 to generate a new binary value, thereby forming the descendant intermediate solution. untie.
  • Each variable in the planning problem is an integer or floating point real number type, and the polynomial mutation method is used to generate new individuals.
  • the processing device 120 may perform transformation operations on the planning set in other ways to obtain a new intermediate solution, for example, perform transformation operations through polynomial crossover, polynomial mutation, etc. to obtain a new intermediate solution.
  • a new intermediate solution refers to an intermediate solution in which at least one of the planning parameters is different from the original intermediate solution in the planning set. For example, by crossing The new intermediate solution obtained by operation and mutation operation.
  • the processing device 120 may select two intermediate solutions from the planning set based on the second constraint determination value and perform the crossover operation in the above manner to generate two new intermediate solutions. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may select an intermediate solution from the planning set based on the second constraint determination value and perform a mutation operation in the above manner to generate a new intermediate solution. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can perform crossover operations and mutation operations simultaneously to generate a new intermediate solution.
  • the processing device 120 can also evolve to generate a new intermediate solution through other methods (such as particle swarm algorithm, etc.).
  • the first preset number refers to the number of new intermediate solutions set in advance. In some embodiments, the first preset number may be the same as the number of intermediate solutions in the planning set, or may be different from the number of intermediate solutions in the planning set.
  • Meeting the conditions means that the planning parameters corresponding to the new intermediate solution satisfy the conditions.
  • meeting the conditions includes that the needle entry point, target point, and puncture path meet the restriction range after the pretreatment operation, and the ablation sphere parameters satisfy the ablation sphere parameter range, wherein the restriction range includes that the needle entry point does not exceed the area of interest cropping The obtained 1/4 area of interest and puncture path do not pass through thick blood vessels, etc.
  • Step 1730 Add the new intermediate solution to the planning set to obtain a planning set with the new intermediate solution added.
  • Step 1740 Calculate the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value of each intermediate solution added to the planning set of the new intermediate solution.
  • the second evaluation value refers to the value obtained by evaluating the quality of the intermediate solution.
  • the second evaluation value may be at least one of puncture path score and ablation conformity rate.
  • the puncture path score is to rate the quality of the puncture path.
  • L is the length of the puncture path
  • h is the shortest distance between the puncture path and the dangerous organ
  • c is the number of slices spanned by the puncture path
  • w 1 and w 3 are coefficients less than
  • w 2 is a coefficient greater than 0.
  • the specific values of w 1 , w 2 , and w 3 can be set according to actual needs.
  • the puncture path score S is positively correlated with h and negatively correlated with L and c. The higher the puncture path score, the better the puncture path.
  • the processing device 120 may calculate the ablation conformity rate based on the lesion volume and the planned total ablation volume.
  • the total planned ablation volume is the volume of the union of the planned ablation volumes corresponding to all stay point positions. See Figure 11 and its associated description for more information on ablation conformity rate.
  • the processing device 120 may calculate the sum of the determination values of different constraint conditions, and use the sum of the determination values of the constraint conditions as the second constraint determination value.
  • the second constraint determination value is similar to the first constraint determination value, and will not be described again here.
  • the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value may be determined in other ways, for example, the second evaluation value is determined based on the lesion coverage or the puncture path length, and the second constraint determination value is determined based on the ablation conformity rate, There are no restrictions here.
  • Step 1750 Select an intermediate solution based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value, and obtain a new planning set containing a second preset number of intermediate solutions.
  • the processing device 120 may select the intermediate solution based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint decision value of the intermediate solution being high. For more information on selecting an intermediate solution based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint decision value, see Figure 18 and its related description.
  • the second preset number refers to the number of new planning sets after selecting the intermediate solution.
  • the second preset number is the same as the number of intermediate solutions in the planning set.
  • selecting an intermediate solution through the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value can ensure the feasibility of the planning parameters corresponding to the intermediate solution in each generation of planning set.
  • Step 1760 Determine whether the second iteration completion condition is met.
  • the second iteration completion condition refers to the condition used to determine whether the iteration optimization is completed. For example, the number of iterations reaches the maximum value, the second evaluation value reaches the preset evaluation threshold, etc.
  • the processing device 120 may count each round of iterative optimization, starting from 0, and adding 1 to the count for each iteration. When the count reaches the maximum number of iterative optimization times, it is determined that the second iteration completion condition is met. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may also compare the second evaluation value of the intermediate solution in the planning set after each round of iterative optimization with the preset evaluation threshold, when the second evaluation value is greater than or equal to the preset evaluation threshold. , determine that the second iteration completion condition is met.
  • the processing device 120 may use the new planning set as the planning set, and continue to iteratively update the planning set by performing step 1720 until the second iteration completion condition is satisfied. In response to the second iteration completion condition being satisfied, processing device 120 may perform step 1770.
  • Step 1770 Obtain the optimal planning set, and determine at least one set of feasible solutions based on the optimal planning set.
  • the optimal planning set refers to the planning set after the second iteration completion condition is satisfied.
  • the planning set generated after the last iteration of optimization the planning set containing intermediate solutions whose second evaluation value exceeds the preset evaluation threshold, etc.
  • the processing device 120 may regard the planning set that satisfies the second iteration completion condition as the optimal planning set.
  • the processing device 120 may determine the Pareto front solution based on the set of optimal plans as at least one set of feasible solutions.
  • the process of determining feasible solutions is similar to the process of determining intermediate parameters. For more information on determining intermediate parameters, see Figure 11 and its related description.
  • Step 1780 Determine target parameters based on at least one set of feasible solutions.
  • the processing device 120 may use the feasible solution with the highest ablation conformation rate among at least one set of feasible solutions as the target parameter. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may send at least one set of feasible solutions to the user terminal used by the doctor for the doctor to independently select, and use the feasible solutions independently selected by the doctor as target parameters.
  • the processing device 120 may determine the objective function values of at least one set of feasible solutions based on the puncture path score and the ablation conformation rate, and determine the target puncture parameters based on the objective function values.
  • the objective function value refers to the numerical value used to select the target puncture parameters. For example, values related to puncture path score and ablation conformity rate.
  • S is the puncture path score
  • eta is the ablation conformity rate
  • z 1 and z 2 are parameters greater than 0, which are used to balance the puncture path score and the ablation conformity rate.
  • the processing device 120 may determine the puncture parameter with the largest objective function value as the target puncture parameter.
  • the target parameter is determined through the objective function value, taking into account not only the ablation effect, but also the degree of harm to the patient, which can ensure that the obtained target parameter is the most balanced and suitable second evaluation value in all aspects. Parameters of the current lesion status.
  • the optimal planning set can be searched globally to avoid the intermediate solutions in the optimal planning set from tending to the local optimum; through the optimal The optimal planning set determines the target parameters, and the most suitable target parameters can be obtained.
  • process 1700 is only for example and illustration, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification.
  • process 1700 can be made under the guidance of this specification. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification.
  • Figure 18 is a schematic flowchart of selecting an intermediate solution according to some embodiments of this specification.
  • the processing device 120 may select an intermediate solution based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value to obtain a new planning set including a second preset number of intermediate solutions. For example, the processing device 120 may hierarchize the planning set to which the new intermediate solution is added based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value, and then determine the congestion distance of each intermediate solution based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value. , thereby selecting a new planning set.
  • the processing device 120 can divide the planning set into several layers according to the dominance relationship.
  • the first layer is the Pareto front solution of the planning set
  • the second layer is the result of removing the first layer of intermediate solutions from the planning set.
  • the third level of the Pareto front solution obtained is the Pareto front solution obtained after removing the intermediate solutions of the first and second levels from the planning set, and so on.
  • the processing device 120 may divide the planning set to which a new intermediate solution is added into the first layer, the second layer, the third layer, etc. according to the above method.
  • S is the puncture path score
  • eta is the ablation conformity rate
  • W is the second constraint judgment value
  • m 1 , m 2 and m 3 are all parameters greater than 0, which are used to balance the puncture path score, ablation conformity rate and The second constraint decision value.
  • the processing device 120 can calculate the selection function value of each intermediate solution in the planning set added to the new intermediate solution, and sort all the intermediate solutions in ascending order based on the selection function value of each intermediate solution, ranking first, that is, The crowding distance of the intermediate solution with the smallest function value and the crowding distance of the last intermediate solution with the largest function value are set to infinity, that is, for each selection function, the boundary intermediate solution (the intermediate solution with the largest and smallest selection function values) ) and the corresponding crowding distance is set to infinity.
  • the crowding distance of the non-boundary i-th intermediate solution can be calculated by formula (12):
  • f is the selection function
  • i is the serial number of the intermediate solution arranged in ascending order
  • f max is the maximum value of the selection function values corresponding to all intermediate solutions in the planning set that adds the new intermediate solution
  • f min is the value of the new intermediate solution added
  • d is the crowding distance.
  • the processing device 120 may first add the intermediate solutions in the first layer to the new planning set. If the number of intermediate solutions in the first layer is less than the second preset number, then add the intermediate solutions in the second layer.
  • the new planning set is deduced in sequence until the x-th layer is added and the number of new planning sets is greater than or equal to the second preset number.
  • the number of new planning sets is equal to the second preset number, the x-th layer and the previous intermediate solutions are used as the new planning set; when the x-th layer is added, the number of new planning sets is greater than When the second preset number is reached, the congestion distance of the xth layer is sorted in descending order, and new planning sets are added from front to back until the number of new planning sets is equal to the 2.
  • Default quantity For example, as shown in Figure 9, assume that the number of planning sets is 50, the number of new intermediate solutions is 50, the number of the first level divided by the planning set adding the new intermediate solution is 25, the number of the second level is 10, and the number of the second level is 10. The number of three layers is 30...
  • the intermediate solution of the first layer is added to the new planning set.
  • the number of intermediate solutions of the new planning set is 25, which does not reach the second preset number (that is, the number of planning sets is 50); then The intermediate solutions of the second level are also added to the new planning set.
  • the number of intermediate solutions in the new planning set is 35, which does not reach the second preset number.
  • the intermediate solutions of the third level are also added to the new planning set.
  • the specific selection method is: calculate the crowding distance of each intermediate solution in the third layer, arrange the crowding distance in descending order, take the first 15 intermediate solutions and add them to the new planning set, the last 15 in the third layer and the first Layers other than the first, second and third layers are not superior enough and will be eliminated. Since the larger the crowding distance is, the smaller the crowding degree is. Therefore, choosing an intermediate solution with a larger crowding distance can maintain the diversity of the planning set and avoid falling into local optimality.
  • an intermediate solution is selected based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint judgment value, and the intermediate solution with better effect and lowest damage to the patient can be selected to enter the next round of iterative update, thereby promoting the iterative update.
  • the processing device 120 only filters the intermediate solution through the second evaluation value to determine the new planning set to enter the next round of iteration, that is, the selection function f in formula (11) may not include the last term m 3 ⁇ W.
  • the processing device 120 may calculate the dominance relationship of the intermediate solution based on the second evaluation value and stratify the planning set, and based on the stratification result and the crowding distance calculated by the selection function f excluding the m 3 ⁇ W term, by The intermediate solutions are screened to determine the new planning set in the aforementioned process.
  • the processing device 120 can determine the length of the instrument, the puncture not penetrating the risk structure, the ablation field range completely covering the lesion, the rationality of the ablation electrode distance, and the puncture path in the pre-processing stage. Constraints such as the rationality of angle safety constrain the selection range of planning parameters to ensure that the intermediate solutions in the planning set satisfy the constraints.
  • a computer device is provided.
  • the computer device may be a terminal, and its internal structure diagram may be as shown in Figure 19.
  • the computer device includes a processor, memory, communication interface, display screen and input device connected through a system bus.
  • the processor of the computer device is used to provide computing and control capabilities.
  • the memory of the computer device includes non-volatile storage media and internal memory.
  • the non-volatile storage medium stores operating systems and computer programs. This internal memory provides an environment for the execution of operating systems and computer programs in non-volatile storage media.
  • the communication interface of the computer device is used for wired or wireless communication with external terminals.
  • the wireless mode can be implemented through WIFI, mobile cellular network, NFC (Near Field Communication) or other technologies.
  • the computer program implements a puncture path planning method when executed by the processor.
  • the display screen of the computer device may be a liquid crystal display or an electronic ink display.
  • the input device of the computer device may be a touch layer covered on the display screen, or may be a button, trackball or touch pad provided on the computer device shell. , it can also be an external keyboard, trackpad or mouse, etc.
  • Figure 19 is only a block diagram of a partial structure related to the solution of the present application, and does not constitute a limitation on the computer equipment to which the solution of the present application is applied.
  • the specific computer equipment may May include more or fewer parts than shown, or combine certain parts, or have a different arrangement of parts.
  • the computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions. After the computer reads the computer instructions in the storage medium, the computer runs the parameter planning method of the intervention planning system.
  • the beneficial effects that may be brought about by the embodiments of this specification include but are not limited to: (1) By obtaining the patient data of the target patient and then determining the target parameters, more reasonable target parameters can be obtained to improve the doctor's surgical efficiency and reduce the difficulty of the doctor's work. . (2) By determining the structural characteristics and target points of the target patient, the candidate puncture path whose judgment value satisfies the preset conditions for strong clinical constraints can be determined, and a reasonable target puncture path can be obtained automatically and efficiently.
  • target puncture path planning is a clinical multi-constraint optimization problem
  • the problem is a non-deterministic polynomial problem, that is, there is a definite answer, but the time complexity of obtaining the solution increases exponentially.
  • Classic computers have calculation problems due to their own performance limitations. If the time is too long or the optimal solution cannot be reached, the technical solution of this embodiment can be run on a quantum annealing machine, such as mapping the Hamiltonian to the real qubits of the quantum annealing machine, so that The puncture path planning is more efficient and can achieve fast and accurate preoperative puncture path planning.
  • the range of planning parameters can be narrowed and more reasonable target parameters can be obtained more quickly to improve Improve the doctor's surgical efficiency and reduce the difficulty of the doctor's work.
  • the range of planning parameters can be adaptively narrowed according to different lesion conditions, so that the planning parameters The number is more suitable for the lesion conditions of different patients and improves the efficiency of subsequent iterative optimization.
  • numbers are used to describe the quantities of components and properties. It should be understood that such numbers used to describe the embodiments are modified by the modifiers "about”, “approximately” or “substantially” in some examples. Grooming. Unless otherwise stated, “about,” “approximately,” or “substantially” means that the stated number is allowed to vary by ⁇ 20%. Accordingly, in some embodiments, the numerical parameters used in the specification and claims are approximations that may vary depending on the desired features of the individual embodiment. In some embodiments, numerical parameters should account for the specified number of significant digits and use general digit preservation methods. Although the numerical ranges and parameters used to identify the breadth of ranges in some embodiments of this specification are approximations, in specific embodiments, such numerical values are set as accurately as is feasible.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Surgery (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Robotics (AREA)
  • Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery (AREA)
  • Apparatus For Radiation Diagnosis (AREA)

Abstract

Embodiments of the present description provide an interventional planning system, method and apparatus, and a storage medium. The system comprises a control module, the control module being used for: acquiring patient data of a target patient; and determining a target parameter on the basis of the patient data.

Description

一种介入规划系统、方法、装置和存储介质Intervention planning system, method, device and storage medium
交叉引用cross reference
本申请要求于2022年08月08日提交的申请号为202210946070.0的中国申请的优先权,于2022年12月28日提交的申请号为202211695278.6的中国申请的优先权,以及于2022年12月28日提交的申请号为202211695301.1的中国申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用并入本文。This application claims the priority of the Chinese application with application number 202210946070.0 submitted on August 8, 2022, the priority of the Chinese application with application number 202211695278.6 submitted on December 28, 2022, and the priority of the Chinese application with application number 202211695278.6 submitted on December 28, 2022 Priority to the Chinese application with application number 202211695301.1 filed on 2020-01-28, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本说明书涉及医疗器械技术领域,特别涉及一种介入规划系统、方法、装置和存储介质。This specification relates to the technical field of medical devices, and in particular to an intervention planning system, method, device and storage medium.
背景技术Background technique
经皮介入手术是临床上常用的治疗或检测手段,经皮介入手术可以用于穿刺活检,也可以用于消融治疗,还可以用于TPS放射性粒子植入等。目前,介入针进入人体组织前,医生需要基于术前影像,依据经验规划合适的目标参数进行介入手术,规划目标参数有一定的难度。尤其是针对直径3-5cm较大的病灶进行消融治疗,需考虑多针联合消融的方式进行,给术前规划带来了更大的挑战,同时也增加了医生的工作难度。Percutaneous interventional surgery is a commonly used clinical treatment or detection method. Percutaneous interventional surgery can be used for puncture biopsy, ablation therapy, and TPS radioactive seed implantation. Currently, before an interventional needle enters human tissue, doctors need to plan appropriate target parameters for interventional surgery based on preoperative images and experience. Planning target parameters is difficult. Especially for ablation treatment of lesions with a diameter of 3-5cm, it is necessary to consider the method of combined multiple needle ablation, which brings greater challenges to preoperative planning and also increases the difficulty of the doctor's work.
因此,期望提出一种介入规划系统、方法、装置和存储介质,能自动规划合理的目标参数,以提高医生的手术效率、减轻工作强度。Therefore, it is expected to propose an interventional planning system, method, device and storage medium that can automatically plan reasonable target parameters to improve doctors' surgical efficiency and reduce work intensity.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本说明书一个或多个实施例提供一种介入规划系统。介入规划系统包括控制模块,控制模块用于:获取目标患者的患者数据;以及基于患者数据,确定目标参数。One or more embodiments of this specification provide an intervention planning system. The interventional planning system includes a control module, which is used to: obtain patient data of a target patient; and determine target parameters based on the patient data.
在一些实施例中,目标参数包括目标穿刺路径,确定目标穿刺路径包括:基于患者数据,确定目标患者的结构特征;基于结构特征,确定目标靶点;基于结构特征和目标靶点,确定候选穿刺路径集合;从候选穿刺路径集合中,确定目标穿刺路径。In some embodiments, the target parameter includes a target puncture path, and determining the target puncture path includes: determining the structural characteristics of the target patient based on the patient data; determining the target target based on the structural characteristics; and determining candidate puncture based on the structural characteristics and the target target. Path set; determine the target puncture path from the candidate puncture path set.
在一些实施例中,基于患者数据,确定目标患者的结构特征包括:基于患者数据,确定目标患者的三维医学影像;基于三维医学影像,确定结构特征。In some embodiments, determining the structural features of the target patient based on the patient data includes: determining a three-dimensional medical image of the target patient based on the patient data; and determining the structural features based on the three-dimensional medical image.
在一些实施例中,基于结构特征和目标靶点,确定候选穿刺路径集合包括:将目标靶点,确定为透视投影中心;以透视投影中心为射源向外发射多条射线,基于结构特征,计算每条射线对应的穿刺路径的临床强约束条件的判定值;将临床强约束条件的判定值满足预设条件的穿刺路径,确定为候选穿刺路径;将候选穿刺路径构成的集合,确定为候选穿刺路径集合。In some embodiments, determining the set of candidate puncture paths based on the structural features and the target target point includes: determining the target target point as the perspective projection center; using the perspective projection center as the radiation source to emit multiple rays outward, based on the structural features, Calculate the judgment value of the clinical strong constraint conditions of the puncture path corresponding to each ray; determine the puncture path whose judgment value of the clinical strong constraint condition satisfies the preset conditions as the candidate puncture path; determine the set of candidate puncture paths as the candidate Collection of puncture paths.
在一些实施例中,临床强约束条件包括以下一种或者多种条件:穿刺路径不接触且不贯穿穿刺风险结构、穿刺路径的长度小于预设针长度阈值、穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角不小于预设夹角阈值和穿刺路径经过待穿刺结构的距离长度大于预设距离阈值。In some embodiments, strong clinical constraints include one or more of the following conditions: the puncture path does not contact and does not penetrate puncture risk structures, the length of the puncture path is less than the preset needle length threshold, and the angle between the puncture path and the target tissue is not The distance between the puncture path and the structure to be punctured is less than the preset angle threshold and the length of the puncture path passing through the structure to be punctured is greater than the preset distance threshold.
在一些实施例中,候选穿刺路径集合包括至少一条候选穿刺路径,从候选穿刺路径集合中,确定目标穿刺路径包括:计算至少一条候选穿刺路径的路径关联信息;基于至少一条候选穿刺路径的路径关联信息,通过预设搜索算法确定目标穿刺路径。In some embodiments, the set of candidate puncture paths includes at least one candidate puncture path, and determining the target puncture path from the set of candidate puncture paths includes: calculating path association information of at least one candidate puncture path; based on the path association of the at least one candidate puncture path Information, the target puncture path is determined through a preset search algorithm.
在一些实施例中,路径关联信息包括以下一种或者多种信息:候选穿刺路径与穿刺风险结构的距离、候选穿刺路径的长度和候选穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角。In some embodiments, the path association information includes one or more of the following information: the distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, the length of the candidate puncture path, and the angle between the candidate puncture path and the target tissue.
在一些实施例中,预设搜索算法包括量子退火算法,基于至少一条候选穿刺路径的路径关联信息,通过预设搜索算法确定目标穿刺路径包括:根据路径关联信息构建第一函数项;基于第一函数项,通过预设搜索算法确定目标穿刺路径。In some embodiments, the preset search algorithm includes a quantum annealing algorithm. Based on path association information of at least one candidate puncture path, determining the target puncture path through the preset search algorithm includes: constructing a first function term according to the path association information; based on the first The function term determines the target puncture path through a preset search algorithm.
在一些实施例中,目标参数包括目标穿刺路径、目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数,基于患者数据,确定目标参数包括:基于患者数据,确定至少一组规划参数;基于至少一组规划参数,确定目标参数;其中,确定目标参数包括:基于个体生成器,生成个体集合,个体集合包括多个个体,每个个体对应一组规划参数;对个体集合进行至少一轮第一迭代更新,直至第一迭代完成条件被满足;基于更新后的个体集合,确定至少一组中间参数;以及基于至少一组中间参数,确定目标参数。In some embodiments, the target parameters include a target puncture path, a target stop point position, and a target ablation sphere parameter. Based on the patient data, determining the target parameters includes: determining at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data; based on at least one set of planning parameters, Determine the target parameters; wherein, determining the target parameters includes: generating an individual set based on the individual generator. The individual set includes multiple individuals, each individual corresponds to a set of planning parameters; performing at least one first iteration update on the individual set until the An iteration completion condition is met; based on the updated individual set, at least one set of intermediate parameters is determined; and based on at least one set of intermediate parameters, the target parameters are determined.
在一些实施例中,基于患者数据,确定至少一组规划参数包括:对患者数据进行三维重建,以获得三维医学影像,患者数据包括患者的CT或MR数据;以及基于三维医学影像确定至少一组规划参数。In some embodiments, determining at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data includes: performing three-dimensional reconstruction on the patient data to obtain a three-dimensional medical image, where the patient data includes CT or MR data of the patient; and determining at least one set of planning parameters based on the three-dimensional medical image. planning parameters.
在一些实施例中,基于三维医学影像确定至少一组规划参数包括:对三维医学影像进行预处理操作,预处理操作包括感兴趣区域裁剪、数据点降采样以及血管粗细分级中的一个或多个;以及基于预处理 操作得到的结果确定至少一组规划参数。In some embodiments, determining at least one set of planning parameters based on the three-dimensional medical image includes: performing a preprocessing operation on the three-dimensional medical image. The preprocessing operation includes one or more of region of interest cropping, data point downsampling, and blood vessel coarse and subdivided grading. ; and based on preprocessing The results obtained from the operation determine at least one set of planning parameters.
在一些实施例中,至少一轮第一迭代中的每轮迭代包括:基于个体生成器,生成至少一个新的个体;以及将至少一个新的个体加入个体集合。In some embodiments, each of the at least one first iteration includes: generating at least one new individual based on the individual generator; and adding at least one new individual to the individual set.
在一些实施例中,至少一轮第一迭代中的每轮迭代包括:基于个体筛选器,对个体集合中的每个个体进行筛选,更新个体集合,筛选包括对个体集合中的个体进行选择操作;其中,选择操作包括:计算个体集合中的每个个体的第一评估值和第一约束判定值;以及基于第一评估值和第一约束判定值选择个体,确定更新后的个体集合。In some embodiments, each iteration in at least one first iteration includes: filtering each individual in the individual set based on the individual filter, updating the individual set, and the filtering includes performing a selection operation on the individuals in the individual set. ; Wherein, the selection operation includes: calculating the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value of each individual in the individual set; and selecting individuals based on the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value, and determining the updated individual set.
在一些实施例中,基于更新后的个体集合,确定至少一组中间参数包括:基于更新后的个体集合确定帕累托前沿解,将帕累托前沿解作为至少一组中间参数。In some embodiments, determining at least one set of intermediate parameters based on the updated set of individuals includes: determining a Pareto front solution based on the updated set of individuals, and using the Pareto front solution as at least one set of intermediate parameters.
在一些实施例中,目标参数包括目标穿刺路径、目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数,基于患者数据,确定目标参数包括:基于患者数据确定穿刺路径数量以及消融球参数范围;基于患者数据、穿刺路径数量以及消融球参数范围,确定至少一组规划参数;基于至少一组规划参数,确定至少一组可行解;以及基于至少一组可行解,确定目标参数。In some embodiments, the target parameters include target puncture path, target stop point position and target ablation sphere parameters. Based on the patient data, determining the target parameters includes: determining the number of puncture paths and the ablation sphere parameter range based on the patient data; based on the patient data, puncture Determine at least one set of planning parameters based on the number of paths and the range of ablation sphere parameters; determine at least one set of feasible solutions based on at least one set of planning parameters; and determine target parameters based on at least one set of feasible solutions.
在一些实施例中,基于至少一组规划参数,确定至少一组可行解包括:基于至少一组规划参数,生成规划集合,规划集合包括多个中间解,每个中间解对应一组规划参数;对规划集合进行至少一轮第二迭代优化,直至第二迭代完成条件被满足,得到最优规划集合;以及基于最优规划集合,确定至少一组可行解。In some embodiments, determining at least one set of feasible solutions based on at least one set of planning parameters includes: generating a planning set based on at least one set of planning parameters, where the planning set includes a plurality of intermediate solutions, each intermediate solution corresponding to a set of planning parameters; Perform at least one round of second iteration optimization on the planning set until the second iteration completion condition is met to obtain the optimal planning set; and determine at least one set of feasible solutions based on the optimal planning set.
在一些实施例中,确定消融球参数范围包括:基于患者数据,确定病灶掩膜;基于病灶掩膜,确定病灶长轴与病灶短轴;以及基于病灶长轴与病灶短轴,确定消融球参数范围。In some embodiments, determining the ablation sphere parameter range includes: determining a lesion mask based on the patient data; determining the lesion long axis and the lesion short axis based on the lesion mask; and determining the ablation sphere parameters based on the lesion long axis and the lesion short axis. scope.
在一些实施例中,基于患者数据、穿刺路径数量以及消融球参数范围,确定至少一组规划参数包括:对患者数据进行三维重建,以获得三维医学影像;对三维医学影像进行预处理操作;以及基于预处理操作得到的结果、穿刺路径数量以及消融球参数范围确定至少一组规划参数。In some embodiments, determining at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data, the number of puncture paths, and the ablation sphere parameter range includes: performing three-dimensional reconstruction of the patient data to obtain a three-dimensional medical image; performing a preprocessing operation on the three-dimensional medical image; and At least one set of planning parameters is determined based on the results obtained from the preprocessing operation, the number of puncture paths, and the ablation sphere parameter range.
在一些实施例中,至少一轮第二迭代中的每轮迭代包括:对规划集合进行变换操作,得到第一预设数量的新的中间解;以及将新的中间解加入规划集合,得到加入新的中间解的规划集合。In some embodiments, each iteration in at least one second iteration includes: performing a transformation operation on the planning set to obtain a first preset number of new intermediate solutions; and adding the new intermediate solutions to the planning set to obtain the added A set of plans for new intermediate solutions.
在一些实施例中,至少一轮第二迭代中的每轮迭代包括:计算加入新的中间解的规划集合中的每个中间解的第二评估值和第二约束判定值;以及基于第二评估值和第二约束判定值选择中间解,得到包含第二预设数量的中间解的新的规划集合,第二约束判定值基于至少一个约束条件的判定值确定,至少一个约束条件包括器械长度是否满足要求,第二评估值包括穿刺路径评分、消融适形率。In some embodiments, each of the at least one second iteration includes: calculating a second evaluation value and a second constraint determination value of each intermediate solution added to the planning set of the new intermediate solution; and based on the second The evaluation value and the second constraint determination value select an intermediate solution to obtain a new planning set containing a second preset number of intermediate solutions. The second constraint determination value is determined based on the determination value of at least one constraint condition, and the at least one constraint condition includes the length of the device. Whether the requirements are met, the second evaluation value includes puncture path score and ablation conformity rate.
本说明书实施例之一提供一种介入规划方法,该方法包括:获取目标患者的患者数据;基于患者数据,确定目标参数。One embodiment of this specification provides an intervention planning method, which method includes: obtaining patient data of a target patient; and determining target parameters based on the patient data.
本说明书实施例之一提供一种介入规划装置,包括介入设备、机械臂和处理器;介入设备包括介入针;机械臂用于携带介入针按照目标参数进行介入手术;处理器用于控制机械臂,以及确定目标参数,目标参数的确定包括:获取目标患者的患者数据;以及基于患者数据,确定目标参数。One embodiment of this specification provides an interventional planning device, which includes an interventional device, a robotic arm, and a processor; the interventional device includes an interventional needle; the robotic arm is used to carry the interventional needle to perform interventional surgery according to target parameters; the processor is used to control the robotic arm, and determining the target parameters. The determination of the target parameters includes: obtaining patient data of the target patient; and determining the target parameters based on the patient data.
本说明书一个或多个实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,存储介质存储计算机指令,当计算机读取存储介质中的计算机指令后,计算机执行介入规划系统的参数规划方法。One or more embodiments of this specification provide a computer-readable storage medium. The storage medium stores computer instructions. After the computer reads the computer instructions in the storage medium, the computer executes the parameter planning method of the intervention planning system.
本说明书的一些实施例为了解决如何自动规划目标参数,以提高医生的手术效率、减轻工作难度的问题,基于目标患者的患者数据,确定目标参数。一方面,基于结构特征和目标靶点,确定候选穿刺路径集合,进而基于至少一条候选穿刺路径的路径关联信息,通过预设搜索算法确定目标穿刺路径,能够准确有效地规划目标穿刺路径,提升了目标穿刺路径规划效率。另一方面,基于患者数据,确定至少一组规划参数,并从至少一组规划参数中,确定包括目标穿刺路径、目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数的目标参数,可以获得更合理的目标参数。在确定至少一组规划参数时,还可以通过确定穿刺路径数量和消融球参数范围,缩小规划参数的范围,更快速地获得更合理的目标参数,以提高医生的手术效率,减轻医生的工作难度。In order to solve the problem of how to automatically plan target parameters to improve doctors' surgical efficiency and reduce work difficulty, some embodiments of this specification determine the target parameters based on the patient data of the target patient. On the one hand, the set of candidate puncture paths is determined based on the structural characteristics and target points, and then based on the path association information of at least one candidate puncture path, the target puncture path is determined through a preset search algorithm, which can accurately and effectively plan the target puncture path, improving the Target puncture path planning efficiency. On the other hand, more reasonable target parameters can be obtained by determining at least one set of planning parameters based on patient data, and determining target parameters including target puncture path, target stay point location, and target ablation sphere parameters from at least one set of planning parameters. . When determining at least one set of planning parameters, you can also narrow the range of planning parameters by determining the number of puncture paths and the range of ablation ball parameters, and obtain more reasonable target parameters more quickly, so as to improve the doctor's surgical efficiency and reduce the difficulty of the doctor's work. .
附图说明Description of drawings
本说明书将以示例性实施例的方式进一步说明,这些示例性实施例将通过附图进行详细描述。这些实施例并非限制性的,在这些实施例中,相同的编号表示相同的结构,其中:This specification is further explained by way of example embodiments, which are described in detail by means of the accompanying drawings. These embodiments are not limiting. In these embodiments, the same numbers represent the same structures, where:
图1是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的介入规划系统的应用场景示意图;Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an intervention planning system according to some embodiments of this specification;
图2是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的介入规划装置的示例性示意图;Figure 2 is an exemplary schematic diagram of an intervention planning device according to some embodiments of this specification;
图3是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的介入规划方法的示例性流程图;Figure 3 is an exemplary flow chart of an intervention planning method according to some embodiments of this specification;
图4是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的确定目标穿刺路径的示例性流程图;Figure 4 is an exemplary flowchart of determining a target puncture path according to some embodiments of this specification;
图5是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的光源划分区域的示例性示意图; Figure 5 is an exemplary schematic diagram of a divided area of a light source according to some embodiments of this specification;
图6是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的候选穿刺路径集合的示例性示意图;Figure 6 is an exemplary schematic diagram of a set of candidate puncture paths according to some embodiments of this specification;
图7是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的另一确定目标穿刺路径的示例性流程图;Figure 7 is another exemplary flow chart for determining a target puncture path according to some embodiments of this specification;
图8是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的量子退火算法的示例性流程图;Figure 8 is an exemplary flow chart of a quantum annealing algorithm according to some embodiments of this specification;
图9是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的确定目标参数的示例性流程图;Figure 9 is an exemplary flowchart of determining target parameters according to some embodiments of this specification;
图10是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的规划参数的示例性示意图;Figure 10 is an exemplary schematic diagram of planning parameters according to some embodiments of this specification;
图11是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的另一确定目标参数的示例性流程图;Figure 11 is another exemplary flowchart of determining target parameters according to some embodiments of this specification;
图12是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的个体筛选器筛选过程的示例性流程图;Figure 12 is an exemplary flow diagram of an individual filter screening process according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图13是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的另一确定目标参数的示例性流程图;Figure 13 is another exemplary flowchart of determining target parameters according to some embodiments of this specification;
图14是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的确定病灶最大短轴的示例性示意图;Figure 14 is an exemplary schematic diagram of determining the maximum short axis of a lesion according to some embodiments of this specification;
图15是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的确定规划参数的示例性流程图;Figure 15 is an exemplary flowchart of determining planning parameters according to some embodiments of this specification;
图16A是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的另一规划参数的示例性示意图;Figure 16A is an exemplary schematic diagram of another planning parameter according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图16B是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的确定入针点集和靶点集的示例性示意图;Figure 16B is an exemplary schematic diagram of determining the needle entry point set and the target point set according to some embodiments of this specification;
图17是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的另一确定目标参数的示例性流程图;Figure 17 is another exemplary flowchart for determining target parameters according to some embodiments of the present specification;
图18是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的选择中间解的流程示意图;Figure 18 is a schematic flowchart of selecting an intermediate solution according to some embodiments of this specification;
图19是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的计算机设备的内部结构的示例性流程图。Figure 19 is an exemplary flowchart of the internal structure of a computer device according to some embodiments of the present specification.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
对患者进行介入手术,是临床上常用的治疗或检查手段。但在应用该方法的过程中需要能够实施介入手术的装置。本说明书的一些实施例说明了这样的装置。Interventional surgery on patients is a commonly used clinical treatment or examination method. However, in the process of applying this method, a device capable of performing interventional surgery is required. Some embodiments of this specification illustrate such a device.
而且,在实施介入手术的过程中,需要对目标穿刺路径、目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数等目标参数进行规划,本说明书的一些实施例说明了这样的方法。这些方法并非以有生命的人体或者动物体为直接实施对象,而是以实施介入手术的装置为直接实施对象。其作用不是进行识别、确定或消除病因或病灶,而是优化穿刺过程,例如提高医生的手术效率、减轻工作强度等。其中,实施介入手术的装置可以是本说明书所述的介入规划装置。Moreover, during the process of performing interventional surgery, it is necessary to plan target parameters such as the target puncture path, target stop point location, and target ablation sphere parameters. Some embodiments of this specification illustrate such methods. These methods are not directly implemented on living human or animal bodies, but on devices that perform interventional surgeries. Its role is not to identify, determine or eliminate the cause or lesion, but to optimize the puncture process, such as improving the doctor's surgical efficiency and reducing work intensity. Wherein, the device for performing interventional surgery may be the interventional planning device described in this specification.
为了更清楚地说明本说明书实施例的技术方案,下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单的介绍。显而易见地,下面描述中的附图仅仅是本说明书的一些示例或实施例,对于本领域的普通技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动的前提下,还可以根据这些附图将本说明书应用于其它类似情景。除非从语言环境中显而易见或另做说明,图中相同标号代表相同结构或操作。In order to explain the technical solutions of the embodiments of this specification more clearly, the accompanying drawings needed to be used in the description of the embodiments will be briefly introduced below. Obviously, the drawings in the following description are only some examples or embodiments of this specification. For those of ordinary skill in the art, without exerting any creative efforts, this specification can also be applied to other applications based on these drawings. Other similar scenarios. Unless obvious from the locale or otherwise stated, the same reference numbers in the figures represent the same structure or operation.
应当理解,本文使用的“系统”、“装置”、“单元”和/或“模块”是用于区分不同级别的不同组件、元件、部件、部分或装配的一种方法。然而,如果其他词语可实现相同的目的,则可通过其他表达来替换所述词语。It will be understood that the terms "system", "apparatus", "unit" and/or "module" as used herein are a means of distinguishing between different components, elements, parts, portions or assemblies at different levels. However, said words may be replaced by other expressions if they serve the same purpose.
如本说明书和权利要求书中所示,除非上下文明确提示例外情形,“一”、“一个”、“一种”和/或“该”等词并非特指单数,也可包括复数。一般说来,术语“包括”与“包含”仅提示包括已明确标识的步骤和元素,而这些步骤和元素不构成一个排它性的罗列,方法或者设备也可能包含其它的步骤或元素。As shown in this specification and claims, words such as "a", "an", "an" and/or "the" do not specifically refer to the singular and may include the plural unless the context clearly indicates an exception. Generally speaking, the terms "comprising" and "comprising" only imply the inclusion of clearly identified steps and elements, and these steps and elements do not constitute an exclusive list. The method or apparatus may also include other steps or elements.
本说明书中使用了流程图用来说明根据本说明书的实施例的系统所执行的操作。应当理解的是,前面或后面操作不一定按照顺序来精确地执行。相反,可以按照倒序或同时处理各个步骤。同时,也可以将其他操作添加到这些过程中,或从这些过程移除某一步或数步操作。Flowcharts are used in this specification to illustrate operations performed by systems according to embodiments of this specification. It should be understood that preceding or following operations are not necessarily performed in exact order. Instead, the steps can be processed in reverse order or simultaneously. At the same time, you can add other operations to these processes, or remove a step or steps from these processes.
图1是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的介入规划系统的应用场景示意图。在一些实施例中,介入规划系统的应用场景100可以包括图像扫描设备110、处理设备120、介入规划装置130和患者140。在一些实施例中,介入规划系统的应用场景100还可以包括存储设备、网络和/或用户终端(图中未示出)。Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an intervention planning system according to some embodiments of this specification. In some embodiments, the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system may include an image scanning device 110, a processing device 120, an intervention planning device 130, and a patient 140. In some embodiments, the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system may also include storage devices, networks and/or user terminals (not shown in the figure).
图像扫描设备110是指用于对患者140进行扫描以获取患者数据的设备。例如,用于获取患者数据的正电子发射断层(Positron Emission Tomography,PET)设备、直接数字平板X线成像(Digital Radiography,DR)设备、磁共振成像(Magnetic Resonance Imaging,MRI)设备、电子计算机断层(Computed Tomography,CT)设备等。在一些实施例中,图像扫描设备110可以对患者140进行扫描,并将扫描得到的图像数据发送到处理设备120进行三维重建及后续处理,以确定目标参数。Image scanning device 110 refers to a device for scanning a patient 140 to obtain patient data. For example, positron emission tomography (PET) equipment, direct digital flat-panel X-ray imaging (Digital Radiography, DR) equipment, magnetic resonance imaging (Magnetic Resonance Imaging, MRI) equipment, and electronic computed tomography used to obtain patient data (Computed Tomography, CT) equipment, etc. In some embodiments, the image scanning device 110 can scan the patient 140 and send the scanned image data to the processing device 120 for three-dimensional reconstruction and subsequent processing to determine target parameters.
处理设备120可以用于对图像扫描设备110得到的患者数据进行处理,以确定目标参数。例如,处理设备120可以获取目标患者的患者数据。进一步,处理设备120可以基于患者数据,确定目标参数。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将目标参数发送到介入规划装置130用于消融治疗。The processing device 120 may be used to process the patient data obtained by the image scanning device 110 to determine target parameters. For example, processing device 120 may obtain patient data of the target patient. Further, the processing device 120 may determine the target parameters based on the patient data. In some embodiments, processing device 120 may send target parameters to intervention planning device 130 for ablation treatment.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以包含一个或多个子处理设备(例如,单核处理设备或多核多芯处理设备)。仅作为示例,处理设备120可以包括中央处理器(CPU)、专用集成电路(ASIC)等。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以集成或者安装在介入规划装置130(例如,介入设备131)中。 In some embodiments, processing device 120 may include one or more sub-processing devices (eg, a single-core processing device or a multi-core processing device). By way of example only, processing device 120 may include a central processing unit (CPU), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or the like. In some embodiments, processing device 120 may be integrated or installed in interventional planning device 130 (eg, interventional device 131).
介入规划装置130可以用于对患者140进行介入手术。在一些实施例中,介入规划装置130可以包括介入设备131、机械臂132、处理器(图中未示出)。介入设备131可以包括介入针(图中未示出)。在一些实施例中,介入针上可以设置有电极,用于传递消融能量。机械臂132可以用于携带介入针按照目标参数进行介入手术。处理器用于控制机械臂,以及确定目标参数。处理器可以是处理设备120的一部分,处理器也可以与处理设备120是相互独立的两个部件。关于介入规划装置130的更多内容参见图2及其相关描述。Interventional planning device 130 may be used to perform interventional procedures on patient 140 . In some embodiments, the interventional planning device 130 may include an interventional device 131, a robotic arm 132, and a processor (not shown in the figure). Interventional device 131 may include an interventional needle (not shown). In some embodiments, electrodes may be provided on the interventional needle for delivering ablation energy. The robotic arm 132 may be used to carry an interventional needle to perform interventional surgery according to target parameters. The processor is used to control the robotic arm and determine target parameters. The processor may be a part of the processing device 120, or the processor may be two independent components from the processing device 120. For more information about the intervention planning device 130, see Figure 2 and its associated description.
在一些实施例中,介入规划系统的应用场景100还可以包括一些或多个其他设备,例如,存储设备、网络和/或用户终端(图中未示出)。In some embodiments, the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system may also include some or more other devices, such as storage devices, networks and/or user terminals (not shown in the figure).
存储设备可以用于存储数据、指令和/或任何其他信息。在一些实施例中,存储设备可以存储与介入手术有关的数据和/或指令。例如,存储设备可以存储图像扫描设备110扫描的患者数据。再例如,存储设备还可以存储处理设备120确定的目标参数等。Storage devices may be used to store data, instructions, and/or any other information. In some embodiments, the storage device may store data and/or instructions related to the interventional procedure. For example, the storage device may store patient data scanned by image scanning device 110 . For another example, the storage device may also store target parameters determined by the processing device 120 and the like.
存储设备可以包括一个或多个存储组件,每个存储组件可以是一个独立的设备,也可以是其他设备(如处理设备120等)的一部分。在一些实施例中,存储设备可在云平台上实现。The storage device may include one or more storage components, and each storage component may be an independent device or a part of other devices (such as the processing device 120, etc.). In some embodiments, the storage device may be implemented on a cloud platform.
网络可以连接介入规划系统的应用场景100中的各组成部分以进行通讯。例如,图像扫描设备110可以通过网络将患者数据发送到处理设备120进行处理。再例如,处理设备120可以通过网络将目标参数发送到介入规划装置130用于执行介入手术。在一些实施例中,网络可以是有线网络或无线网络中的任意一种或多种。The network may connect various components in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system for communication. For example, image scanning device 110 may send patient data over the network to processing device 120 for processing. For another example, the processing device 120 may send the target parameters to the interventional planning device 130 through the network for performing the interventional surgery. In some embodiments, the network may be any one or more of a wired network or a wireless network.
用户终端是指用户所使用的一个或多个终端设备或软件。使用用户终端的用户可以是一个或者多个用户。例如,对患者140执行介入手术的医生等。在一些实施例中,执行消融治疗手术的医生可以通过用户终端,从处理设备120确定的至少一组中间参数或可行解中选取目标参数,以执行消融治疗手术。用户终端可以是移动设备、平板计算机、膝上型计算机、台式计算机等其他具有输入和/或输出功能的设备中的一种或其任意组合。User terminal refers to one or more terminal devices or software used by users. The user using the user terminal can be one or multiple users. For example, a doctor who performs an interventional procedure on the patient 140, or the like. In some embodiments, the doctor who performs the ablation treatment operation can select the target parameters from at least a set of intermediate parameters or feasible solutions determined by the processing device 120 through the user terminal to perform the ablation treatment operation. The user terminal may be one or any combination of a mobile device, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a desktop computer, and other devices with input and/or output functions.
应当注意消融手治疗手术系统的应用场景100仅仅是为了说明的目的而提供的,并不意图限制本申请的范围。对于本领域的普通技术人员来说,可以根据本说明书的描述,做出多种修改或变化。然而,这些变化和修改不会背离本申请的范围。It should be noted that the application scenario 100 of the ablative hand treatment surgical system is provided for illustrative purposes only and is not intended to limit the scope of the present application. For those of ordinary skill in the art, various modifications or changes can be made based on the description of this specification. However, such changes and modifications would not depart from the scope of the present application.
图2是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的介入规划装置130的示例性示意图。Figure 2 is an exemplary schematic diagram of an intervention planning device 130 according to some embodiments of the present specification.
在一些实施例中,所述介入规划装置130可以包括介入设备131、机械臂132和处理器133。In some embodiments, the interventional planning device 130 may include an interventional device 131 , a robotic arm 132 and a processor 133 .
介入设备131是指可以进入患者身体组织进行介入手术的装置。当介入手术用于活检时,介入设备131可以用于对目标患者进行穿刺并取样,以对病灶进行进一步检测。当介入手术用于TPS放射性粒子植入时,介入设备131可以用于对目标患者进行穿刺,并将放射性粒子植入肿瘤内,以达到精准治疗肿瘤的目的。当介入手术用于消融治疗时,介入设备131可以用于对目标患者进行穿刺,并对病灶进行消融治疗。在一些实施例中,介入设备131设置有介入针131-1,用于进入患者病灶区域对病灶进行介入手术。在一些实施例中,介入设备131可以在处理器133的控制下,以目标参数进行介入手术。The interventional device 131 refers to a device that can enter the patient's body tissue to perform interventional surgery. When interventional surgery is used for biopsy, the interventional device 131 can be used to puncture and sample the target patient to further detect the lesion. When interventional surgery is used for TPS radioactive seed implantation, the interventional device 131 can be used to puncture the target patient and implant the radioactive seeds into the tumor to achieve precise tumor treatment. When interventional surgery is used for ablation treatment, the interventional device 131 can be used to puncture the target patient and perform ablation treatment on the lesion. In some embodiments, the interventional device 131 is provided with an interventional needle 131-1 for entering the patient's lesion area to perform interventional surgery on the lesion. In some embodiments, the interventional device 131 can perform interventional surgery with target parameters under the control of the processor 133 .
以消融治疗为例,介入针131-1可以包括热介入针、冷冻介入针、化学介入针等装置。在一些实施例中,介入设备131上可以设置有一个或多个介入针131-1。介入针131-1的针尖部分设置有消融电极,可以按照消融功率对病灶传递消融能量以进行消融治疗,其中,消融能量是指作用于病灶时可对病灶的细胞造成破坏性损伤并使其死亡的能量,消融功率由处理器133进行控制。在一些实施例中,介入设备131可以对病灶区域进行热消融治疗(例如,微波消融、射频消融等)、冷消融治疗、化学消融等。其中,热消融治疗是指在介入针131-1的电极,局部产生达到70度的高温,将病灶烧灼刺激坏死;冷消融治疗是指在电极释放氩氦气体,在电极达到-185度的低温,使病灶细胞内的水分结晶,然后再复温导致病灶的坏死;化学消融是指在通过介入针131-1向病灶局部注入一些无水酒精等化学药物,使病灶达到坏死的目的。不同的消融治疗方式所适用的介入设备131可以根据具体需要配置。Taking ablation treatment as an example, the interventional needle 131-1 may include a thermal interventional needle, a cryointerventional needle, a chemical interventional needle and other devices. In some embodiments, one or more interventional needles 131-1 may be provided on the interventional device 131. The needle tip of the interventional needle 131-1 is provided with an ablation electrode, which can deliver ablation energy to the lesion according to the ablation power for ablation treatment. The ablation energy means that when acting on the lesion, it can cause destructive damage to the cells of the lesion and cause them to die. The ablation power is controlled by the processor 133. In some embodiments, the interventional device 131 can perform thermal ablation treatment (eg, microwave ablation, radiofrequency ablation, etc.), cold ablation treatment, chemical ablation, etc., on the lesion area. Among them, thermal ablation treatment means that the electrode of the interventional needle 131-1 locally generates a high temperature reaching 70 degrees, cauterizing the lesion and stimulating necrosis; cold ablation treatment means releasing argon and helium gas at the electrode, and the electrode reaches a low temperature of -185 degrees. , causing the water in the cells of the lesion to crystallize, and then rewarming to cause necrosis of the lesion; chemical ablation refers to injecting some absolute alcohol and other chemical drugs into the lesion through the interventional needle 131-1 to cause the lesion to achieve necrosis. The interventional equipment 131 suitable for different ablation treatment methods can be configured according to specific needs.
机械臂132可以用于携带所述介入针131-1按照目标参数进行介入手术。机械臂132是指为介入针131-1执行介入手术提供支持的器械。例如,机械臂132可以包括操作手术机器人、定位手术机器人等。The robotic arm 132 may be used to carry the interventional needle 131-1 to perform interventional surgery according to target parameters. The robotic arm 132 refers to an instrument that provides support for the interventional needle 131-1 to perform interventional surgery. For example, the robotic arm 132 may include an operating surgical robot, a positioning surgical robot, and the like.
处理器133可以用于控制机械臂132携带介入针131-1按照目标参数进行介入手术。例如,处理器133可以控制机械臂132携带介入针131-1以目标参数中的目标入针点进入人体组织。又例如,以消融治疗为例,处理器133可以基于目标参数中的目标穿刺路径数量确定介入设备131所使用的介入针131-1的数量。再例如,以消融治疗为例,处理器133可以控制机械臂132携带介入针131-1从目标入针点进入人体组织,并在目标停留点位置按照目标消融球参数进行消融治疗。The processor 133 may be used to control the robotic arm 132 to carry the interventional needle 131-1 to perform interventional surgery according to target parameters. For example, the processor 133 may control the robotic arm 132 to carry the interventional needle 131-1 into the human tissue at a target needle entry point in target parameters. For another example, taking ablation treatment as an example, the processor 133 may determine the number of interventional needles 131-1 used by the interventional device 131 based on the number of target puncture paths in the target parameters. For another example, taking ablation treatment as an example, the processor 133 can control the robotic arm 132 to carry the interventional needle 131-1 into the human tissue from the target needle entry point, and perform ablation treatment according to the target ablation sphere parameters at the target stay point.
在一些实施例中,处理器133可以自动控制机械臂132携带介入针131-1按照目标参数进行介入手术。在一些实施例中,处理器133可以基于目标参数对医生进行导航,由医生按照导航控制机械臂132携带介入针131-1按照目标参数进行介入手术。其中,导航可以是基于三维医学影像显示目标参数,并实 时显示介入手术中介入针131-1的位置和/或手术进度等。用户可以经由用户终端输入指示机械臂132对目标患者进行介入手术的相关指令。在一些实施例中,处理器133还可以基于其它方式进行接入手术,例如,由医生基于导航直接操作。In some embodiments, the processor 133 can automatically control the robotic arm 132 to carry the interventional needle 131-1 to perform interventional surgery according to target parameters. In some embodiments, the processor 133 can navigate the doctor based on the target parameters, and the doctor controls the robotic arm 132 to carry the interventional needle 131-1 according to the navigation to perform the interventional surgery according to the target parameters. Among them, navigation can display target parameters based on three-dimensional medical images and implement The position of the interventional needle 131-1 and/or the progress of the operation during the interventional operation are displayed. The user may input relevant instructions instructing the robotic arm 132 to perform interventional surgery on the target patient via the user terminal. In some embodiments, the processor 133 can also perform access surgery based on other methods, for example, direct operation by a doctor based on navigation.
图3是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的介入规划方法的示例性流程图。如图3所示,流程300包括下述步骤。在一些实施例中,图3所示的流程300的一个或一个以上操作可以在图1所示的介入规划系统的应用场景100中实现。例如,图3所示的流程300可以以指令的形式存储在存储设备中,并由处理设备120调用和/或执行。Figure 3 is an exemplary flowchart of an intervention planning method according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in Figure 3, process 300 includes the following steps. In some embodiments, one or more operations of the process 300 shown in FIG. 3 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 . For example, the process 300 shown in FIG. 3 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
步骤310,获取目标患者的患者数据。Step 310: Obtain patient data of the target patient.
目标患者是指待进行介入手术的人员。The target patient is the person who is to undergo interventional surgery.
患者数据是指反映目标患者的病灶情况的数据。例如,患者数据可以包括PET图像数据、DR图像数据、MRI图像数据、CT图像数据等。Patient data refers to data that reflects the lesion status of the target patient. For example, patient data may include PET image data, DR image data, MRI image data, CT image data, etc.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以通过多种方式获取患者数据。例如,图像扫描设备110对患者进行扫描后,可以直接将扫描得到的患者数据通过网络发送到处理设备120。再例如,图像扫描设备110扫描患者后将患者数据存储在存储设备中,处理设备120可以在需要的时候(如用户通过用户终端发出相关指令时)主动读取存储设备中的患者数据。In some embodiments, processing device 120 may obtain patient data in a variety of ways. For example, after the image scanning device 110 scans a patient, the scanned patient data can be directly sent to the processing device 120 through the network. For another example, the image scanning device 110 scans the patient and stores the patient data in the storage device. The processing device 120 can actively read the patient data in the storage device when needed (such as when the user issues relevant instructions through the user terminal).
步骤320,基于患者数据,确定目标参数。Step 320: Determine target parameters based on patient data.
目标参数是指用于介入规划装置执行介入手术的参数。例如,处理设备120可以控制介入设备131以目标参数进行消融的参数。The target parameters refer to parameters used by the interventional planning device to perform the interventional surgery. For example, processing device 120 may control parameters for interventional device 131 to perform ablation at target parameters.
在一些实施例中,目标参数可以包括目标穿刺路径。在一些实施例中,当介入手术用于消融治疗时,目标参数还可以包括目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数。其中,目标穿刺路径可以由目标入针点和目标靶点确定。In some embodiments, the target parameters may include a target puncture path. In some embodiments, when interventional surgery is used for ablation treatment, the target parameters may also include target stop point positions and target ablation sphere parameters. The target puncture path can be determined by the target needle entry point and the target target point.
目标穿刺路径是指介入设备的介入针进入人体组织的轨迹。例如,如图10所示,目标穿刺路径可以为{Pi1j1,Pi2j2},其中,Pi1j1可以由目标入针点Pi1和目标靶点Pj1确定,Pi2j2可以由目标入针点Pi2和目标靶点Pj2确定。The target puncture path refers to the trajectory of the interventional needle of the interventional device entering human tissue. For example, as shown in Figure 10, the target puncture path can be {P i1j1 , P i2j2 }, where P i1j1 can be determined by the target needle entry point P i1 and the target target point P j1 , and P i2j2 can be determined by the target needle entry point P. i2 and target target point P j2 are determined.
目标停留点位置是指介入针在沿目标穿刺路径进行穿刺的过程中,介入针的电极的停留点位置。例如,如图10所示,目标穿刺路径Pi1j1上的目标停留点位置为{T1p1,T2p1}、目标穿刺路径Pi2j2上的目标停留点位置为T1p2The target stop point position refers to the stop point position of the interventional needle electrode during the puncture process of the interventional needle along the target puncture path. For example, as shown in Figure 10, the target stay point position on the target puncture path P i1j1 is {T 1p1 , T 2p1 }, and the target stay point position on the target puncture path P i2j2 is T 1p2 .
目标消融球参数是指介入针在进行消融治疗手术时消融区域的尺寸数据。例如,消融球为椭球时,消融球参数可以为消融球的长短轴大小。由于热扩散的能力各向相同,垂直于轴线方向均为圆形,则消融球参数可以用a×a×c表示,其中,a为消融球椭球的短轴长度,c为消融球椭球的长轴长度。消融球参数范围是指消融球的长短轴各自的取值范围。不同的消融功率和消融时间对应不同的消融球大小,消融功率越大,消融时间越长,消融球越大。例如,如图10所示,目标消融球参数可以为R(例如,以目标消融球是椭球为例,R可以为36×36×42mm的椭球,其中36为椭球的短轴长度,42为椭球的长轴长度)。The target ablation sphere parameters refer to the size data of the ablation area of the interventional needle during ablation treatment surgery. For example, when the ablation sphere is an ellipsoid, the ablation sphere parameters can be the size of the major and minor axes of the ablation sphere. Since the thermal diffusion ability is the same in all directions and is circular in the direction perpendicular to the axis, the parameters of the ablation sphere can be expressed as a × a × c, where a is the short axis length of the ablation sphere ellipsoid, and c is the ablation sphere ellipsoid. The length of the major axis. The ablation sphere parameter range refers to the respective value ranges of the long and short axes of the ablation sphere. Different ablation power and ablation time correspond to different ablation sphere sizes. The greater the ablation power, the longer the ablation time, and the larger the ablation sphere. For example, as shown in Figure 10, the target ablation sphere parameter can be R (for example, if the target ablation sphere is an ellipsoid, R can be an ellipsoid of 36×36×42 mm, where 36 is the short axis length of the ellipsoid, 42 is the length of the major axis of the ellipsoid).
在一些实施例中,目标参数可以包括目标穿刺路径,处理设备120可以基于患者数据,确定目标患者的结构特征,并基于结构特征,确定目标靶点。接着,处理设备120可以基于结构特征和目标靶点,确定候选穿刺路径集合,进而从候选穿刺路径集合中,确定目标穿刺路径。待确定目标穿刺路径之后,处理器可以控制机械臂携带介入针按照目标穿刺路径,对目标患者进行穿刺。例如,当介入手术用于穿刺活检时,处理设备120可以控制机械臂携带介入针按照目标穿刺路径,对目标患者进行穿刺并提取组织。例如,当介入手术用于TPS放射性粒子植入时,处理设备120可以控制机械臂携带介入针按照目标穿刺路径,对目标患者进行穿刺,并且在多个停留点植入多个粒子,多个粒子产生的多个剂量叠加形成更大的治疗范围。又例如,当介入手术用于消融治疗时,处理设备120可以控制机械臂携带介入针按照目标穿刺路径,对目标患者进行穿刺,并且在目标停留点位置,以目标消融球参数进行消融治疗。其中,穿刺过程中的目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数可以由医生进行设置。穿刺过程中的目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数也可以通过其他方式获取,例如,基于图9或图13的方法进一步确定。关于确定目标穿刺路径的更多内容参见图4-图8及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the target parameters may include a target puncture path, the processing device 120 may determine structural characteristics of the target patient based on the patient data, and determine the target target point based on the structural characteristics. Next, the processing device 120 may determine a set of candidate puncture paths based on the structural features and the target target point, and then determine the target puncture path from the set of candidate puncture paths. After the target puncture path is determined, the processor can control the robotic arm to carry the interventional needle to puncture the target patient according to the target puncture path. For example, when the interventional surgery is used for needle biopsy, the processing device 120 can control the robotic arm to carry the interventional needle to puncture the target patient and extract the tissue according to the target puncture path. For example, when interventional surgery is used for TPS radioactive particle implantation, the processing device 120 can control the robotic arm to carry the interventional needle, puncture the target patient according to the target puncture path, and implant multiple particles at multiple stay points. The resulting multiple doses are superimposed to form a larger therapeutic range. For another example, when an interventional surgery is used for ablation treatment, the processing device 120 can control the robotic arm to carry the interventional needle to puncture the target patient according to the target puncture path, and perform ablation treatment with the target ablation sphere parameters at the target stop point. Among them, the target stop point position and target ablation sphere parameters during the puncture process can be set by the doctor. The target stop point position and target ablation sphere parameters during the puncture process can also be obtained through other methods, for example, further determined based on the method in Figure 9 or Figure 13. For more information on determining the target puncture path, see Figures 4-8 and their related descriptions.
在一些实施例中,当介入手术用于消融治疗时,目标参数可以包括目标穿刺路径、目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数,处理设备120可以基于患者数据,确定至少一组规划参数,并基于至少一组规划参数,确定目标参数。示例性地,处理设备120可以基于个体生成器,生成个体集合,个体集合包括多个个体,每个个体对应一组规划参数,并对个体集合进行至少一轮第一迭代更新,直至第一迭代完成条件被满足。接着,处理设备120可以基于更新后的个体集合,确定至少一组中间参数,并基于至少一组中间参数,确定目标参数。关于上述确定目标参数的更多内容参见图9-图12及其相关描述。In some embodiments, when interventional surgery is used for ablation treatment, the target parameters may include a target puncture path, a target stop point position, and a target ablation sphere parameter. The processing device 120 may determine at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data, and based on At least one set of planning parameters to determine the target parameters. For example, the processing device 120 can generate an individual set based on the individual generator. The individual set includes multiple individuals, each individual corresponds to a set of planning parameters, and performs at least one first iteration update on the individual set until the first iteration. The completion condition is met. Next, the processing device 120 may determine at least one set of intermediate parameters based on the updated set of individuals, and determine the target parameters based on the at least one set of intermediate parameters. For more information on the above-mentioned determination of target parameters, please refer to Figures 9 to 12 and their related descriptions.
在一些实施例中,当介入手术用于消融治疗时,目标参数可以包括目标穿刺路径、目标停留点位 置和目标消融球参数,处理设备120可以基于患者数据确定穿刺路径数量以及消融球参数范围,并基于患者数据、穿刺路径数量以及消融球参数范围,确定至少一组规划参数。接着,处理设备120可以基于至少一组规划参数,确定至少一组可行解,并基于至少一组可行解,确定目标参数。关于上述确定目标参数的更多内容参见图13-图19及其相关描述。In some embodiments, when interventional surgery is used for ablation treatment, the target parameters may include the target puncture path and the target stay point. To set and target ablation sphere parameters, the processing device 120 may determine the number of puncture paths and the ablation sphere parameter range based on the patient data, and determine at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data, the number of puncture paths, and the ablation sphere parameter range. Next, the processing device 120 may determine at least one set of feasible solutions based on at least one set of planning parameters, and determine the target parameters based on at least one set of feasible solutions. For more information on the above-mentioned determination of target parameters, please refer to Figures 13 to 19 and their related descriptions.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过获取目标患者的患者数据,进而确定目标参数,可以获得更合理的目标参数以提高医生的手术效率,减轻医生的工作难度。In some embodiments of this specification, by obtaining the patient data of the target patient and then determining the target parameters, more reasonable target parameters can be obtained to improve the doctor's surgical efficiency and reduce the difficulty of the doctor's work.
应当注意的是,上述有关流程300的描述仅仅是为了示例和说明,而不限定本说明书的适用范围。对于本领域技术人员来说,在本说明书的指导下可以对流程300进行各种修正和改变。然而,这些修正和改变仍在本说明书的范围之内。It should be noted that the above description of process 300 is only for example and illustration, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification. For those skilled in the art, various modifications and changes can be made to the process 300 under the guidance of this description. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification.
当介入手术用于穿刺活检时,处理设备120可以采取图4的流程确定目标穿刺路径。当病灶体积较小时,处理设备120可以采用1条目标穿刺路径来进行TPS放射性粒子植入,处理设备120可以采取图4的流程确定目标穿刺路径。当病灶体积较小时,目标穿刺路径数量为1即可完成消融时,处理设备120可以采取图4的流程确定目标穿刺路径。关于确定目标穿刺路径数量的更多具体内容参见图13及其相关描述。When interventional surgery is used for puncture biopsy, the processing device 120 may adopt the process of FIG. 4 to determine the target puncture path. When the lesion is small in size, the processing device 120 can use a target puncture path to implant TPS radioactive seeds, and the processing device 120 can adopt the process in Figure 4 to determine the target puncture path. When the size of the lesion is small and the number of target puncture paths is 1, the ablation can be completed. The processing device 120 can adopt the process of FIG. 4 to determine the target puncture path. See Figure 13 and its related description for more details on determining the number of target puncture paths.
图4是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的确定目标穿刺路径的示例性流程图。如图4所示,流程400包括下述步骤。在一些实施例中,图4所示的流程400的一个或一个以上操作可以在图1所示的介入规划系统的应用场景100中实现。例如,图4所示的流程400可以以指令的形式存储在存储设备中,并由处理设备120调用和/或执行。Figure 4 is an exemplary flowchart of determining a target puncture path according to some embodiments of this specification. As shown in Figure 4, process 400 includes the following steps. In some embodiments, one or more operations of the process 400 shown in FIG. 4 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 . For example, the process 400 shown in FIG. 4 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
在一些实施例中,目标参数包括目标穿刺路径。In some embodiments, the target parameters include a target puncture path.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以获取由若干个体素构造的待穿刺的手术区域(或称目标对象),根据待穿刺的手术区域内部的待穿刺结构中目标靶点,确定候选入针点集合;若干个体素包括表面体素和内部体素,候选入针点集合中各候选入针点对应的体素属于表面体素,各候选入针点与目标靶点之间具有对应的候选穿刺路径;确定各候选穿刺路径对应的路径关联信息;路径关联信息包括候选穿刺路径与待穿刺的手术区域内部的穿刺风险结构之间的相隔距离、候选穿刺路径的路径长度;结合相隔距离和路径长度,以及预设的路径搜索参数,构建哈密顿量(或称路径选取函数);根据哈密顿量,从各候选穿刺路径中搜索出目标穿刺路径,并将目标穿刺路径对应的候选入针点作为目标入针点。其中,路径搜索参数包括用于指示路径搜索计算的迭代参数。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can acquire a surgical area to be punctured (or a target object) constructed of several voxels, and determine a candidate needle entry point based on the target target point in the structure to be punctured inside the surgical area to be punctured. Set; several voxels include surface voxels and internal voxels. The voxels corresponding to each candidate needle entry point in the candidate needle entry point set belong to the surface voxels, and there are corresponding candidate punctures between each candidate needle entry point and the target target point. Path; determine the path association information corresponding to each candidate puncture path; the path association information includes the separation distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure inside the surgical area to be punctured, and the path length of the candidate puncture path; combine the separation distance and path length , and the preset path search parameters, construct a Hamiltonian (or path selection function); according to the Hamiltonian, search for the target puncture path from each candidate puncture path, and use the candidate needle entry point corresponding to the target puncture path as Target entry point. Wherein, the path search parameters include iteration parameters used to indicate the path search calculation.
步骤410,基于患者数据,确定目标患者的结构特征。Step 410: Determine the structural characteristics of the target patient based on the patient data.
结构特征是指可以包裹待穿刺结构的表层轮廓所围成的待穿刺的手术区域的特征。其中,待穿刺的手术区域可以包括表面体素和内部体素,待穿刺结构是指目标患者的病灶所属的器官(例如,以肝肿瘤为例,待穿刺结构可以指目标患者的肝脏)。例如,以图5所示,结构特征可以包括待穿刺结构510、表面体素520、目标组织530、穿刺风险结构540等结构的特征。Structural features refer to the features of the surgical area to be punctured surrounded by the surface contour of the structure to be punctured. The surgical area to be punctured may include surface voxels and internal voxels, and the structure to be punctured refers to the organ to which the target patient's lesion belongs (for example, taking a liver tumor as an example, the structure to be punctured may refer to the liver of the target patient). For example, as shown in FIG. 5 , the structural features may include features of the structure to be punctured 510 , surface voxels 520 , target tissue 530 , puncture risk structure 540 and other structures.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于患者数据,确定目标患者的三维医学影像,并基于三维医学影像,确定结构特征。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine a three-dimensional medical image of the target patient based on the patient data, and determine structural features based on the three-dimensional medical image.
三维医学影像是指用于表征表面体素和内部体素的三维渲染图像。三维医学影像可以用于展示目标患者的局部解剖场景(例如,腹腔解剖场景),以明确目标患者病灶的解剖结构、空间位置。其中,表面体素可以用于表征表皮轮廓,内部体素可以用于表征内部解剖结构。Three-dimensional medical imaging refers to three-dimensional rendered images used to represent surface voxels and internal voxels. Three-dimensional medical images can be used to display the local anatomical scene of the target patient (for example, the abdominal anatomical scene) to clarify the anatomical structure and spatial location of the target patient's lesions. Among them, surface voxels can be used to characterize the epidermal contour, and internal voxels can be used to characterize internal anatomical structures.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以根据目标患者的患者数据对待穿刺的手术区域进行三维重构并匹配空间坐标,得到由体素构造的针对目标患者的三维模型,即三维医学影像。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can perform three-dimensional reconstruction of the surgical area to be punctured based on the patient data of the target patient and match the spatial coordinates to obtain a three-dimensional model of the target patient constructed from voxels, that is, a three-dimensional medical image.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于患者数据中不同组织的灰度特征,区分不同组织与器官之间的边界,进而对三维医学影像中的组织、器官等进行分割,以确定结构特征。在一些实施例中,需要进行分割的组织、器官可以包括待穿刺结构、皮肤、病灶、骨、待穿刺结构邻近组织、待穿刺结构内部血管等。在一些实施例中,上述分割方法可以包括自动分割和交互编辑分割。其中,自动分割可以包括但不限于基于阈值的分割、基于机器学习的分割、基于深度学习的分割方法,交互编辑分割可以包括但不限于区域生长、漫水填充、片层插值、交互绘制。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can distinguish the boundaries between different tissues and organs based on the grayscale features of different tissues in the patient data, and then segment the tissues, organs, etc. in the three-dimensional medical image to determine the structural features. In some embodiments, the tissues and organs that need to be segmented may include structures to be punctured, skin, lesions, bones, tissues adjacent to the structures to be punctured, blood vessels inside the structures to be punctured, etc. In some embodiments, the above-mentioned segmentation method may include automatic segmentation and interactive editing segmentation. Among them, automatic segmentation may include but is not limited to threshold-based segmentation, machine learning-based segmentation, and deep learning-based segmentation methods. Interactive editing segmentation may include but is not limited to region growing, flood filling, slice interpolation, and interactive rendering.
步骤420,基于结构特征,确定目标靶点。Step 420: Determine the target target based on the structural characteristics.
目标靶点是指待穿刺结构上的病灶的靶点。例如,目标靶点可以为病灶的质心。在一些实施例中,目标靶点还可以为病灶上的其它点,例如,目标靶点可以为病灶的几何中心。The target point refers to the target point of the lesion on the structure to be punctured. For example, the target point may be the center of mass of the lesion. In some embodiments, the target target point can also be other points on the lesion. For example, the target target point can be the geometric center of the lesion.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于结构特征确定待穿刺结构上的病灶的质心,并将确定的质心作为目标靶点。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the centroid of the lesion on the structure to be punctured based on the structural characteristics, and use the determined centroid as the target target.
步骤430,基于结构特征和目标靶点,确定候选穿刺路径集合。Step 430: Determine a set of candidate puncture paths based on structural features and target points.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以获取目标患者的患者数据,生成目标患者对应的目标渲染图 像;目标渲染图像用于表征基于患者数据构建的待穿刺的手术区域;以待穿刺结构中的目标靶点为透视投影中心,穿刺风险结构为透视投影对象,建立透视投影模型;采用透视投影模型,确定候选入针点集合。其中,采用透视投影模型,确定候选入针点集合的方法可以包括:处理设备120可以采用透视投影模型,得到各靶点射源光线对应的光线碰撞结果;靶点射源光线为基于目标靶点,以及待穿刺结构所处位置进行全方向散射得到的光线,光线碰撞结果用于表征靶点射源光线与穿刺风险结构和/或表面体素的碰撞结果;按照临床强约束条件(或称预设分区条件),根据各靶点射源光线对应的光线碰撞结果,从待穿刺的手术区域的表面体素中确定可行入针体素,作为候选入针点;预临床强约束条件为针对待穿刺的手术区域的表面体素是否符合穿刺要求的约束条件,各候选入针点对应的候选穿刺路径基于各可行入针体素对应的靶点射源光线路径得到;根据各候选入针点得到候选入针点集合。临床强约束条件可以包括以下任一项或多项:候选穿刺路径不接触且不贯穿穿刺风险结构、候选穿刺路径的路径长度小于预设针长度阈值、候选穿刺路径经过待穿刺结构的距离长度大于预设距离阈值。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can obtain the patient data of the target patient and generate a target rendering corresponding to the target patient. Image; the target rendering image is used to represent the surgical area to be punctured based on patient data; the target point in the structure to be punctured is the perspective projection center, and the puncture risk structure is the perspective projection object, and a perspective projection model is established; the perspective projection model is used , determine the set of candidate needle entry points. Among them, the method of determining the set of candidate needle entry points using a perspective projection model may include: the processing device 120 may use a perspective projection model to obtain the light collision results corresponding to each target source light; the target source light is based on the target target point, and The light is scattered in all directions at the location of the structure to be punctured. The light collision results are used to characterize the collision results of the target source light and puncture risk structures and/or surface voxels; according to the strong clinical constraints (or preset partition conditions) ), based on the light collision results corresponding to the light rays of each target point, determine the feasible needle entry voxels from the surface voxels of the surgical area to be punctured, as candidate needle entry points; the pre-clinical strong constraints are for the surgical area to be punctured Whether the surface voxels meet the constraints required for puncture, the candidate puncture path corresponding to each candidate needle entry point is obtained based on the target source light path corresponding to each feasible needle entry voxel; a set of candidate needle entry points is obtained based on each candidate needle entry point . Strong clinical constraints may include any one or more of the following: the candidate puncture path does not contact and does not penetrate the puncture risk structure, the path length of the candidate puncture path is less than the preset needle length threshold, and the distance length of the candidate puncture path through the structure to be punctured is greater than Default distance threshold.
候选穿刺路径集合是指由可以作为穿刺路径的路径组成的集合。在一些实施例中,候选穿刺路径集合可以包括至少一条候选穿刺路径。候选穿刺路径可以通过临床强约束条件去除明显不合理的路径后得到。候选穿刺路径可以由至少一个候选入针点与目标靶点构成。至少一个候选入针点中的每一个候选入针点对应的体素属于表面体素。The set of candidate puncture paths refers to a set composed of paths that can be used as puncture paths. In some embodiments, the set of candidate puncture paths may include at least one candidate puncture path. Candidate puncture paths can be obtained by removing obviously unreasonable paths through strong clinical constraints. The candidate puncture path may be composed of at least one candidate needle entry point and a target target point. The voxel corresponding to each of the at least one candidate needle entry point belongs to the surface voxel.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于目标靶点,确定透视投影中心,并且以透视投影中心为射源向外发射多条射线,基于结构特征,计算每条射线对应的穿刺路径的临床强约束条件的判定值。进一步地,处理设备120可以将临床强约束条件的判定值满足预设条件的穿刺路径,确定为候选穿刺路径,并将候选穿刺路径构成的集合,确定为候选穿刺路径集合。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can determine the perspective projection center based on the target target, and use the perspective projection center as the source to emit multiple rays outwards, and calculate the clinical strength of the puncture path corresponding to each ray based on the structural characteristics. The judgment value of the constraint condition. Further, the processing device 120 may determine puncture paths whose judgment values of strong clinical constraints satisfy preset conditions as candidate puncture paths, and determine a set of candidate puncture paths as a candidate puncture path set.
透视投影中心是指透视投影模型的中心。例如,透视投影中心可以为目标靶点。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将目标靶点确定为透视投影中心。The perspective projection center refers to the center of the perspective projection model. For example, the center of the perspective projection can be the target target point. In some embodiments, processing device 120 may determine the target target point as the perspective projection center.
临床强约束条件是指可以判断每条射线对应的穿刺路径是否符合穿刺要求的约束条件。其中,每条射线对应的穿刺路径是指与每条射线重合的穿刺路径。Strong clinical constraints refer to constraints that can determine whether the puncture path corresponding to each ray meets the puncture requirements. Among them, the puncture path corresponding to each ray refers to the puncture path that coincides with each ray.
在一些实施例中,临床强约束条件可以包括以下一种或多种:穿刺路径不接触且不贯穿穿刺风险结构、候选穿刺路径的长度小于预设针长度阈值、穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角不小于预设夹角阈值和穿刺路径经过待穿刺结构的距离长度大于预设距离阈值。以下可以以图5为例进行说明。In some embodiments, strong clinical constraints may include one or more of the following: the puncture path does not contact and does not penetrate puncture risk structures, the length of the candidate puncture path is less than the preset needle length threshold, and the angle between the puncture path and the target tissue It is not less than the preset angle threshold and the distance length of the puncture path through the structure to be punctured is greater than the preset distance threshold. The following can be explained by taking Figure 5 as an example.
在一些实施例中,临床强约束条件可以包括穿刺路径不接触且不贯穿穿刺风险结构,即穿刺路径需要避免接触或贯穿不能触及的风险结构。其中,风险结构可以包括较粗的血管、重要的器官、骨骼等。在一些实施例中,结构特征可以反映待穿刺的手术区域中的器官、骨骼等关键部位的情况,处理设备120可以基于结构特征判断穿刺路径是否接触和/或贯穿穿刺风险结构。例如,如图5所示,目标靶点O可以作为透视投影中心,以目标靶点O为射源向外发射多条射线(例如,OP1、OP2、OP3、OP4、OP5、OP6),540为穿刺风险结构。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将碰撞到穿刺风险机构的射线OP6与表面体素520的交点作为禁止入针点。进一步地,处理设备120可以将穿刺风险结构540后方透视体表区域标定为禁止入针区域,并将禁止入针区域上的点与目标靶点O的连线确定为禁止穿刺路径。In some embodiments, strong clinical constraints may include that the puncture path does not contact or penetrate puncture risk structures, that is, the puncture path needs to avoid contacting or penetrating inaccessible risk structures. Among them, risk structures can include thicker blood vessels, important organs, bones, etc. In some embodiments, the structural features can reflect the conditions of key parts such as organs and bones in the surgical area to be punctured, and the processing device 120 can determine whether the puncture path contacts and/or penetrates puncture risk structures based on the structural features. For example, as shown in Figure 5, the target point O can be used as the perspective projection center, and the target point O can be used as the radiation source to emit multiple rays (for example, OP 1 , OP 2 , OP 3 , OP 4 , OP 5 , OP 6 ), 540 is the puncture risk structure. In some embodiments, processing device 120 may consider the intersection of ray OP 6 that strikes the puncture risk mechanism and surface voxel 520 as a no-no point. Further, the processing device 120 may mark the body surface area behind the puncture risk structure 540 as a prohibited needle entry area, and determine a line connecting a point on the prohibited needle entry area and the target point O as a prohibited puncture path.
在一些实施例中,临床强约束条件可以包括穿刺路径的长度小于预设针长度阈值。其中,根据临床标准,预设针长度阈值可以为10cm~15cm。以介入针长度为15cm为例,根据临床标准,可以选用15cm作为预设针长度阈值。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以计算穿刺路径的长度,将穿刺路径的长度大于等于预设针长度阈值的穿刺路径确定为禁止穿刺路径,将禁止穿刺路径与表面体素的交点确定为禁止入针区域。In some embodiments, the clinically strong constraint may include that the length of the puncture path is less than a preset needle length threshold. Among them, according to clinical standards, the preset needle length threshold can be 10cm~15cm. Taking the interventional needle length as 15cm as an example, according to clinical standards, 15cm can be selected as the preset needle length threshold. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may calculate the length of the puncture path, determine the puncture path whose length is greater than or equal to the preset needle length threshold as the prohibited puncture path, and determine the intersection of the prohibited puncture path and the surface voxel as the prohibited puncture path. into the needle area.
在一些实施例中,临床强约束条件可以包括穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角不小于预设夹角阈值。其中,目标组织是指待穿刺结构最外层的膜性结构。例如,待穿刺结构为肝脏时,目标组织为肝包膜,根据临床标准,夹角阈值可以为10°~30°。又例如,待穿刺结构为脾脏时,目标组织为脾包膜。穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角是指穿刺路径与目标组织表面的法向量之间的夹角。例如,以图5为例,穿刺路径OP5与目标组织530的夹角为穿刺路径OP5与目标组织530表面的法向量之间的夹角θ。In some embodiments, the strong clinical constraint may include that the angle between the puncture path and the target tissue is not less than a preset angle threshold. Among them, the target tissue refers to the outermost membranous structure of the structure to be punctured. For example, when the structure to be punctured is the liver and the target tissue is the liver capsule, the angle threshold can be 10° to 30° according to clinical standards. For another example, when the structure to be punctured is the spleen, the target tissue is the splenic capsule. The angle between the puncture path and the target tissue refers to the angle between the puncture path and the normal vector of the target tissue surface. For example, taking FIG. 5 as an example, the angle between the puncture path OP 5 and the target tissue 530 is the angle θ between the puncture path OP 5 and the normal vector of the surface of the target tissue 530 .
需要说明的是,若病灶在待穿刺结构内部,需要考虑穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角不小于预设夹角阈值的临床强约束条件;若病灶不在待穿刺结构内部,如在待穿刺结构表面(例如,目标组织中),可以不需要考虑该临床强约束条件。在一些实施例中,若待穿刺结构为心、肺等也可以不考虑强约束角度条件,若待穿刺结构为肝、脾可以考虑强约束角度条件。It should be noted that if the lesion is inside the structure to be punctured, it is necessary to consider the strong clinical constraint that the angle between the puncture path and the target tissue is not less than the preset angle threshold; if the lesion is not inside the structure to be punctured, such as on the surface of the structure to be punctured, (for example, in the target tissue), the strong clinical constraints may not be considered. In some embodiments, if the structure to be punctured is the heart, lungs, etc., the strong constraint angle condition may not be considered. If the structure to be punctured is the liver or spleen, the strong constraint angle condition may be considered.
以待穿刺结构是肝脏,目标组织是肝包膜为例,若穿刺路径与肝包膜夹角较大,则穿刺过程中介入针较容易刺入肝实质,并产生较小的受力形变,则根据临床标准,可以选用θ>20°作为夹角阈值。For example, if the structure to be punctured is the liver and the target tissue is the liver capsule, if the angle between the puncture path and the liver capsule is large, the interventional needle will more easily penetrate the liver parenchyma during the puncture process and produce smaller stress deformation. According to clinical standards, θ>20° can be selected as the angle threshold.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120计算射线方向与目标组织表面的法向量的夹角,进而可以针对大于夹角阈值的射线,将该射线后方所有透视体表区域标定为禁止入针区域,并将禁止入针区域上的点与目 标靶点O的连线确定为禁止穿刺路径。在一些实施例中,处理设备120还可以将得到的夹角值θ记录在每个体表可行入针区域的体素中(即候选入针点对应的体素),以便于后续阶段计算处理。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 calculates the angle between the ray direction and the normal vector of the target tissue surface, and then for rays greater than the angle threshold, all fluoroscopic body surface areas behind the ray can be calibrated as needle-inhibited areas, and Align the points on the prohibited needle area with the target The line connecting the target point O is determined as the prohibited puncture path. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may also record the obtained angle value θ in each voxel of the feasible needle insertion area on the body surface (ie, the voxel corresponding to the candidate needle insertion point) to facilitate subsequent stage calculation processing.
在一些实施例中,临床强约束条件可以包括穿刺路径经过待穿刺结构的距离长度大于预设距离阈值。其中,根据临床标准,预设距离阈值可以为3mm~8mm。例如,如图5所示,穿刺路径OP5对应的穿刺路径经过待穿刺结构的距离长度为OH之间的长度。以待穿刺结构是肝脏为例,根据临床标准,可以选用5mm作为预设距离阈值。In some embodiments, the strong clinical constraint may include that the distance length of the puncture path through the structure to be punctured is greater than a preset distance threshold. Among them, according to clinical standards, the preset distance threshold can be 3 mm to 8 mm. For example, as shown in FIG. 5 , the distance between the puncture path OP 5 and the structure to be punctured is the length between OH. Taking the structure to be punctured as the liver as an example, according to clinical standards, 5 mm can be selected as the preset distance threshold.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将穿刺路径经过待穿刺结构的距离长度小于等于预设距离阈值的射线,后方的所有透视体表区域标定为禁止入针区域,并将禁止入针区域上的点与目标靶点O的连线确定为禁止穿刺路径。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can mark all the fluoroscopic body surface areas behind the rays whose puncture path passes through the structure to be punctured and whose distance length is less than or equal to the preset distance threshold as the needle-inhibited area, and place the needle-inhibited areas on the rays. The line connecting the point and the target point O is determined as the prohibited puncture path.
临床强约束条件的判定值是指能够反映临床强约束条件是否被满足的数值或字母等。例如,某条临床强约束条件被满足时,该条临床强约束条件判定值赋值为0;反之,则赋值为-1。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以计算不同临床强约束条件的判定值的加和,将加和值作为临床强约束条件。The judgment value of a strong clinical constraint refers to a numerical value or letter that can reflect whether the strong clinical constraint is satisfied. For example, when a certain strong clinical constraint condition is satisfied, the judgment value of the strong clinical constraint condition is assigned a value of 0; otherwise, the value assigned is -1. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may calculate the sum of the determination values of different clinical strong constraint conditions, and use the summed value as the clinical strong constraint condition.
在一些实施例中,处理设备可以将临床强约束条件的判定值满足预设条件的穿刺路径,确定为候选穿刺路径。其中,预设条件可以包括临床强约束条件的判定值为0、临床强约束条件的判定值不大于1、临床强约束条件的判定值不大于2等。在一些实施例中,处理设备可以对多条临床强约束条件标定出的禁止入针区域求取并集,进而得到体表的可行入针点区域(如图6中可行入针点区域610所示),该可行入针点区域包括筛选出的候选入针点。进一步地,处理设备120可以将候选入针点与目标靶点O的连线确定为候选穿刺路径。In some embodiments, the processing device may determine a puncture path whose determination value of the strong clinical constraint satisfies the preset condition as a candidate puncture path. Among them, the preset conditions may include that the judgment value of the clinical strong constraint condition is 0, the judgment value of the clinical strong constraint condition is not greater than 1, the judgment value of the clinical strong constraint condition is not greater than 2, etc. In some embodiments, the processing device can calculate the union of the prohibited needle entry areas calibrated by multiple strong clinical constraints, and then obtain the feasible needle entry point area on the body surface (as represented by the feasible needle entry point area 610 in Figure 6 (shown), the feasible needle entry point area includes the screened candidate needle entry points. Further, the processing device 120 may determine a line connecting the candidate needle entry point and the target target point O as the candidate puncture path.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过采用透视投影模型,基于临床强约束条件,确定了临床强约束条件的判定值满足预设条件的候选穿刺路径,为后续穿刺路径规划提供了数据支持。In some embodiments of this specification, by using a perspective projection model and based on strong clinical constraints, candidate puncture paths whose judgment values of clinical strong constraints meet preset conditions are determined, providing data support for subsequent puncture path planning.
步骤440,从候选穿刺路径集合中,确定目标穿刺路径。Step 440: Determine the target puncture path from the set of candidate puncture paths.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以计算至少一条候选穿刺路径的路径关联信息,并基于至少一条候选穿刺路径的路径关联信息,通过预设搜索算法确定目标穿刺路径。关于通过预设搜索算法确定目标穿刺路径的更多内容参见图7及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may calculate path association information of at least one candidate puncture path, and determine the target puncture path through a preset search algorithm based on the path association information of the at least one candidate puncture path. For more information on determining the target puncture path through the preset search algorithm, see Figure 7 and its related description.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过确定目标患者的结构特征、目标靶点,可以确定临床强约束条件的判定值满足预设条件的候选穿刺路径,进而可以自动且高效地获得合理的目标穿刺路径。In some embodiments of this specification, by determining the structural characteristics and target points of the target patient, a candidate puncture path whose judgment value satisfies the preset conditions for strong clinical constraints can be determined, so that a reasonable target puncture can be obtained automatically and efficiently. path.
应当注意的是,上述有关流程400的描述仅仅是为了示例和说明,而不限定本说明书的适用范围。对于本领域技术人员来说,在本说明书的指导下可以对流程400进行各种修正和改变。然而,这些修正和改变仍在本说明书的范围之内。It should be noted that the above description of process 400 is only for example and illustration, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification. For those skilled in the art, various modifications and changes can be made to the process 400 under the guidance of this description. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification.
图7是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的另一确定目标穿刺路径的示例性流程图。如图7所示,流程700包括下述步骤。在一些实施例中,图7所示的流程700的一个或一个以上操作可以在图1所示的介入规划系统的应用场景100中实现。例如,图7所示的流程700可以以指令的形式存储在存储设备中,并由处理设备120调用和/或执行。Figure 7 is another exemplary flowchart of determining a target puncture path according to some embodiments of this specification. As shown in Figure 7, process 700 includes the following steps. In some embodiments, one or more operations of the process 700 shown in FIG. 7 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 . For example, the process 700 shown in FIG. 7 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
步骤710,计算至少一条候选穿刺路径的路径关联信息。候选穿刺路径集合可以包括至少一条候选穿刺路径。Step 710: Calculate path association information of at least one candidate puncture path. The set of candidate puncture paths may include at least one candidate puncture path.
路径关联信息是指可以反映候选穿刺路径是否符合穿刺要求的信息。在一些实施例中,路径关联信息可以包括以下一种或多种信息:候选穿刺路径与穿刺风险结构的距离、候选穿刺路径的长度和候选穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角。关于候选穿刺路径与穿刺风险结构的距离、候选穿刺路径的长度和候选穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角的更多内容参见图4及其相关描述。Path related information refers to information that can reflect whether the candidate puncture path meets the puncture requirements. In some embodiments, the path association information may include one or more of the following information: the distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, the length of the candidate puncture path, and the angle between the candidate puncture path and the target tissue. For more information about the distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, the length of the candidate puncture path, and the angle between the candidate puncture path and the target tissue, see Figure 4 and its related description.
在一些实施例中,为了便于计算,考虑可行入针区域虽然是三维体素,但只有一层体表元素(即表面体素),则可以基于光源发射角度均匀采样皮肤入针点其中,L为原体表的最大长度,W为原体表的最大宽度,每个表面体素Pij为一个候选入针点,考虑到原体表元素为不规则多边形,可以将禁止入针区域对应的表面体素取0填入矩阵。每个候选入针点与目标靶点可以组合成一条候选穿刺路径,即每个候选入针点对应的表面体素Pij可以具有一条候选穿刺路径。In some embodiments, in order to facilitate calculation, considering that although the feasible needle insertion area is a three-dimensional voxel, it only has one layer of body surface elements (ie, surface voxels), the skin needle insertion points can be uniformly sampled based on the light source emission angle. Among them, L is the maximum length of the original body surface, W is the maximum width of the original body surface, and each surface voxel P ij is a candidate needle entry point. Considering that the original body surface elements are irregular polygons, the prohibition of needle entry can be The surface voxels corresponding to the area are filled in the matrix with 0. Each candidate needle entry point and the target target point can be combined into a candidate puncture path, that is, the surface voxel P ij corresponding to each candidate needle entry point can have a candidate puncture path.
候选穿刺路径与穿刺风险结构的距离越大,则穿刺过程中出现器械性损伤或治疗性损伤的概率将相应降低,穿刺的安全性将相应提高。在一些实施例中,候选穿刺路径途经多个体素,处理设备120可以使用经典计算机用三维距离变换(Distance Transform,DTF)算法计算候选穿刺路径途经的多个体素与所有穿刺风险结构的距离,并记录在每个体素中。接着对每个体素中记录的距离求平均,并将每个体素的距离平均值中的最小值确定为候选穿刺路径与穿刺风险结构的距离,可以用Ddangerous表示。Ddangerous值越大,路径越优,多目标求解时,定义目标函数越小,结果越优,为使目标都朝着最小化的方式求解,将候选穿 刺路径与穿刺风险结构的距离进行反函数运算获得Dij=1/DdangerousThe greater the distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, the probability of instrument injury or therapeutic injury during the puncture process will be reduced accordingly, and the safety of puncture will be improved accordingly. In some embodiments, the candidate puncture path passes through multiple voxels, and the processing device 120 can use a classic computer to calculate the distances between the multiple voxels passed by the candidate puncture path and all puncture risk structures using a three-dimensional distance transform (Distance Transform, DTF) algorithm, and recorded in each voxel. Then the distances recorded in each voxel are averaged, and the minimum value of the average distance of each voxel is determined as the distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, which can be represented by D dangerous . The larger the D dangerous value, the better the path. When solving multi-objectives, the smaller the objective function is defined, the better the result. In order to solve the objectives in a minimizing way, the candidate path is The inverse function operation is performed on the distance between the puncture path and the puncture risk structure to obtain D ij =1/D dangerous .
候选穿刺路径的长度越短,则穿刺过程中需要考虑的关键结构相对较少,癌细胞随介入针沿穿刺路径扩散的几率越小。在一些实施例中,处理设备可以基于途经体素数量,通过比例换算为实际路径长度,记为dijThe shorter the length of the candidate puncture path, the fewer key structures need to be considered during the puncture process, and the smaller the chance of cancer cells spreading along the puncture path with the interventional needle. In some embodiments, the processing device can scale the number of passing voxels into the actual path length, which is recorded as d ij .
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以调取计算临床强约束条件时,每个候选入针点的体素中的夹角值θ,并将夹角值θ作为该候选入针点对应的候选穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角,记为θij。关于夹角值θ的更多内容参见图4及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can retrieve the included angle value θ in the voxel of each candidate needle insertion point when calculating strong clinical constraints, and use the included angle value θ as the candidate corresponding to the candidate needle insertion point. The angle between the puncture path and the target tissue is recorded as θ ij . For more information about the angle value θ, see Figure 4 and its related description.
步骤720,基于至少一条候选穿刺路径的路径关联信息,通过预设搜索算法确定目标穿刺路径。Step 720: Determine the target puncture path through a preset search algorithm based on the path association information of at least one candidate puncture path.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以按照预设选取条件,根据相隔距离、路径长度、特征角度,以及预设权重信息,构建第一函数项;预设选取条件为针对相隔距离、路径长度、特征角度的约束条件;根据预设的路径搜索参数,采用第一函数项构建基于量子退火算法的哈密顿量;路径搜索参数包括用于指示路径搜索计算的迭代参数。其中,构建第一函数项的方法可以包括:处理设备120可以获取预设权重信息;预设权重信息包括针对相隔距离的第一权重系数、针对路径长度的第二权重系数,以及针对特征角度的第三权重系数;按照预设选取条件,根据相隔距离和第一权重系数、路径长度和第二权重系数、特征角度和第三权重系数,得到第一函数项。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can construct the first function term according to the separation distance, path length, feature angle, and preset weight information according to the preset selection conditions; the preset selection condition is for the separation distance, path length, The constraint conditions of the characteristic angle; according to the preset path search parameters, the first function term is used to construct the Hamiltonian based on the quantum annealing algorithm; the path search parameters include iteration parameters used to indicate the path search calculation. The method of constructing the first function term may include: the processing device 120 may obtain preset weight information; the preset weight information includes a first weight coefficient for distance, a second weight coefficient for path length, and a characteristic angle. The third weight coefficient; according to the preset selection conditions, the first function term is obtained based on the distance and the first weight coefficient, the path length and the second weight coefficient, the characteristic angle and the third weight coefficient.
在一些实施例中,预设算法可以包括量子退火算法。量子退火算法是一种应用于组合优化问题的量子算法,它通过利用量子系统的固有特性,如量子叠加态和量子纠缠态,来寻找最优解。量子退火算法的一般由两部分组成:一部分称为哈密顿势能,将待优化的目标函数映射为施加在该量子系统的一个势场,即将目标函数看作是量子系统的哈密顿量的势能部分;另一部分称为哈密顿动能,通常是引入一个幅度可控的动能项视为对该系统的扰动(例如,可以假想为一个横向磁场的扰动)。当扰动存在时,会使体系逐渐沿着解空间内梯度较小的方向演化,甚至通过量子隧穿效应直接“穿过”势能较高的部分。随着逐步迭代,该量子系统的能量将越来越低(即温度下降),最后将收敛于系统基态,此过程等同于目标函数获得全局最优。In some embodiments, the preset algorithm may include a quantum annealing algorithm. The quantum annealing algorithm is a quantum algorithm applied to combinatorial optimization problems. It finds the optimal solution by utilizing the inherent characteristics of quantum systems, such as quantum superposition states and quantum entanglement states. The quantum annealing algorithm generally consists of two parts: one part is called Hamiltonian potential energy, which maps the objective function to be optimized into a potential field applied to the quantum system, that is, the objective function is regarded as the potential energy part of the Hamiltonian of the quantum system. ; The other part is called Hamiltonian kinetic energy, which is usually introduced as a kinetic energy term with controllable amplitude as a perturbation to the system (for example, it can be imagined as a perturbation of a transverse magnetic field). When a perturbation exists, the system will gradually evolve along the direction of smaller gradient in the solution space, and even directly "pass through" the part with higher potential energy through the quantum tunneling effect. With the gradual iteration, the energy of the quantum system will become lower and lower (that is, the temperature will decrease), and finally it will converge to the ground state of the system. This process is equivalent to obtaining the global optimum of the objective function.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以根据路径关联信息构建第一函数项,接着构建第二函数项,并基于第一函数项、第二函数项以及耦合系数构建哈密顿量,从而基于哈密顿量,通过量子退火算法确定目标穿刺路径。其中,第一函数项可以表征量子退火算法中的哈密顿量的势能部分,第二函数项可以表征量子退火算法中的哈密顿量的动能部分。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may construct a first function term according to the path association information, then construct a second function term, and construct a Hamiltonian based on the first function term, the second function term and the coupling coefficient, thereby based on the Hamiltonian Quantity, the target puncture path is determined through the quantum annealing algorithm. Among them, the first function term can characterize the potential energy part of the Hamiltonian in the quantum annealing algorithm, and the second function term can characterize the kinetic energy part of the Hamiltonian in the quantum annealing algorithm.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以利用公式(1)构建表面体素Pij对应的候选穿刺路径的第一函数项。
In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may use formula (1) to construct the first function term of the candidate puncture path corresponding to the surface voxel P ij .
其中,为第一函数项,Rij为归一化后的候选穿刺路径与穿刺风险结构的距离,Lij为归一化后的候选穿刺路径的长度,Aij为归一化后的候选穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角,w1为候选穿刺路径与穿刺风险结构的距离的权重,w2为候选穿刺路径的长度的权重,w3为候选穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角的权重。其中,w1+w2+w3=1,以保证每组的权重归一化。in, is the first function term, R ij is the distance between the normalized candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, L ij is the length of the normalized candidate puncture path, A ij is the distance between the normalized candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure. For the angle between the target tissue, w 1 is the weight of the distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, w 2 is the weight of the length of the candidate puncture path, and w 3 is the weight of the angle between the candidate puncture path and the target tissue. Among them, w 1 +w 2 +w 3 =1 to ensure that the weight of each group is normalized.
由于路径关联信息的候选穿刺路径与穿刺风险结构的距离Dij、候选穿刺路径的长度dij、以及候选穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角θij的量纲不同,可以利用公式(2)-公式(4)对上述关联信息进行归一化处理,以确定表面体素Pij对应的候选穿刺路径的Rij、Lij和Aij


Since the distance D ij between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure of the path correlation information, the length d ij of the candidate puncture path, and the angle θ ij between the candidate puncture path and the target tissue are different in dimensions, formula (2)-Eq. (4) Normalize the above correlation information to determine the R ij , L ij and A ij of the candidate puncture path corresponding to the surface voxel P ij .


其中,Rij为归一化后的候选穿刺路径与穿刺风险结构的距离,Lij为归一化后的候选穿刺路径的长度,Aij为归一化后的候选穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角,Dij为候选穿刺路径与穿刺风险结构的距离,dij为候选穿刺路径的长度,θij为候选穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角,λ1为Dij的归一化参数,λ2为dij的归一化参数,λ3为θij的归一化参数,Dmin和Dmax分别为所有候选穿刺路径与穿刺风险结构的距离中的最小值与最大值,dmin和dmax分别为所有候选穿刺路径的长度中的最小值与最大值,θmin和θmax分别为所有候选穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角中的最小值与最大值。Among them, R ij is the distance between the normalized candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, L ij is the length of the normalized candidate puncture path, and A ij is the distance between the normalized candidate puncture path and the target tissue. Angle, D ij is the distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, d ij is the length of the candidate puncture path, θ ij is the angle between the candidate puncture path and the target tissue, λ 1 is the normalization parameter of D ij , λ 2 is the normalization parameter of d ij , λ 3 is the normalization parameter of θ ij , D min and D max are respectively the minimum and maximum values of the distances between all candidate puncture paths and puncture risk structures, d min and d max are respectively the minimum value and the maximum value among the lengths of all candidate puncture paths, θ min and θ max are respectively the minimum value and the maximum value among the angles between all candidate puncture paths and the target tissue.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于公式(2)-公式(4)确定表面体素Pij对应的候选穿刺 路径的Rij、Lij和Aij,接着将Rij、Lij和Aij代入公式(1),以获得表面体素Pij对应的候选穿刺路径的第一函数项 In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the candidate puncture corresponding to the surface voxel P ij based on equations (2) to (4) R ij , L ij and A ij of the path, and then substitute R ij , L ij and A ij into formula (1) to obtain the first function term of the candidate puncture path corresponding to the surface voxel P ij
在一些实施例中,考虑第二函数项(即,哈密顿量的动能部分)用于提供微扰,处理设备120可以利用公式(5)构建表面体素Pij对应的候选穿刺路径的第二函数项。
Hk=Γ0e-1/T        (5)
In some embodiments, considering the second function term (ie, the kinetic energy part of the Hamiltonian) for providing the perturbation, the processing device 120 can construct the second candidate puncture path corresponding to the surface voxel P ij using equation (5). function term.
H k0 e -1/T (5)
其中,Γ0为常数项,e为自然数,T为迭代过程的温度。Among them, Γ 0 is a constant term, e is a natural number, and T is the temperature of the iterative process.
在一些实施例中,迭代过程的温度T可以采用公式(6)确定,其可以为线性函数。
In some embodiments, the temperature T of the iterative process can be determined using formula (6), which can be a linear function.
其中,T(s)为外循环的当前迭代次数为s时的温度,T0为迭代过程中初始温度,s为外循环的当前迭代次数,M为预设的外循环最大迭代次数。外循环代表的含义是跳出当前选择的初始入针点,随机更新体表轮廓另一个初始入针点(即,其余任一候选入针点),重新进行当前位置的最优路径搜索工作,一次外循环中需要执行N次迭代,以查找满足条件的最优入针点。在执行针对二维入针点搜索的过程中,可以基于随机步长跳动得到新解P′,若该新解较当前解更小,则可以将新解更新为评判标准,反之若大于当前解,则可以根据exp(-ΔH/T)>random(0,1)来判断是否接受新解,随着外循环迭代次数增减,温度逐渐从T0下降到零,而Hk也随之下降。在温度下降的过程中其接受的概率将越来越低,即因量子隧穿效应“穿过”局部最优解(即最优的路径分析结果)两边势垒的概率越来越低。关于外循环、内循环、新解等的更多内容参见图8及其相关描述。Among them, T(s) is the temperature when the current iteration number of the outer loop is s, T 0 is the initial temperature during the iteration process, s is the current iteration number of the outer loop, and M is the preset maximum number of iterations of the outer loop. The meaning of the outer loop is to jump out of the currently selected initial needle entry point, randomly update another initial needle entry point on the body surface contour (that is, any other candidate needle entry point), and re-search for the optimal path at the current location, once N iterations need to be executed in the outer loop to find the optimal needle entry point that meets the conditions. During the process of searching for the two-dimensional needle entry point, a new solution P′ can be obtained based on random step sizes. If the new solution is smaller than the current solution, the new solution can be updated as the criterion. Otherwise, if it is larger than the current solution , you can judge whether to accept the new solution according to exp(-ΔH/T)>random(0,1). As the number of iterations of the outer loop increases or decreases, the temperature gradually drops from T 0 to zero, and H k also drops accordingly. . As the temperature decreases, the probability of acceptance will become lower and lower, that is, the probability of "passing through" the potential barriers on both sides of the local optimal solution (ie, the optimal path analysis result) due to the quantum tunneling effect becomes lower and lower. For more information on outer loop, inner loop, new solution, etc., see Figure 8 and its related descriptions.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以利用公式(7)构建表面体素Pij对应的候选穿刺路径的哈密顿量。
In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may use formula (7) to construct the Hamiltonian of the candidate puncture path corresponding to the surface voxel P ij .
其中,为第一函数项(即,哈密顿量的势能部分),它描述了待优化的候选穿刺路径,可以基于公式(1)确定;JT为耦合系数,满足JT>0且通常为常数,其意义为调整势能项和动能项能量比例;Hk为第二函数项(即,哈密顿量的动能部分)它代表对整个系统的扰动,可以由一个随迭代次数线性变化的函数或描述热平衡状态的函数构成,可以基于公式(5)确定。in, is the first function term (that is, the potential energy part of the Hamiltonian), which describes the candidate puncture path to be optimized and can be determined based on formula (1); J T is the coupling coefficient, which satisfies J T > 0 and is usually a constant, Its meaning is to adjust the energy ratio of the potential energy term and the kinetic energy term; H k is the second function term (that is, the kinetic energy part of the Hamiltonian). It represents the disturbance to the entire system and can be described by a function that changes linearly with the number of iterations or by describing the thermal balance. The function composition of the state can be determined based on formula (5).
在一些实施例中,处理设备可以基于公式(7)计算所有候选穿刺路径的哈密顿量,并将最小的哈密顿量对应的候选穿刺路径,确定为目标穿刺路径。In some embodiments, the processing device may calculate the Hamiltonian of all candidate puncture paths based on formula (7), and determine the candidate puncture path corresponding to the smallest Hamiltonian as the target puncture path.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于哈密顿量,通过量子退火算法确定目标穿刺路径。关于通过量子退火算法确定目标穿刺路径的更多内容参见图8及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the target puncture path through a quantum annealing algorithm based on the Hamiltonian. For more information on determining the target puncture path through the quantum annealing algorithm, see Figure 8 and its related description.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过根据路径关联信息构建第一函数项,接着构建第二函数项,并基于第一函数项、第二函数项以及耦合系数构建哈密顿量,进而基于哈密顿量,通过量子退火算法确定目标穿刺路径,提升了算法效率以及找到最优解概率。In some embodiments of this specification, the first function term is constructed according to the path association information, and then the second function term is constructed, and the Hamiltonian is constructed based on the first function term, the second function term and the coupling coefficient, and then based on the Hamiltonian Quantity, the target puncture path is determined through the quantum annealing algorithm, which improves the algorithm efficiency and the probability of finding the optimal solution.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过计算至少一条候选穿刺路径的路径关联信息,并基于至少一条候选穿刺路径的路径关联信息,通过预设搜索算法确定目标穿刺路径,实现了目标穿刺路径的自动定量规划,能够准确有效地规划目标穿刺路径,提升了目标穿刺路径规划效率。In some embodiments of this specification, by calculating path association information of at least one candidate puncture path, and determining the target puncture path through a preset search algorithm based on the path association information of at least one candidate puncture path, automatic identification of the target puncture path is achieved. Quantitative planning can accurately and effectively plan the target puncture path, improving the efficiency of target puncture path planning.
应当注意的是,上述有关流程700的描述仅仅是为了示例和说明,而不限定本说明书的适用范围。对于本领域技术人员来说,在本说明书的指导下可以对流程700进行各种修正和改变。然而,这些修正和改变仍在本说明书的范围之内。It should be noted that the above description of process 700 is only for example and explanation, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification. For those skilled in the art, various modifications and changes can be made to process 700 under the guidance of this specification. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification.
图8是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的量子退火算法的示例性流程图。如图8所示,流程800包括下述步骤。在一些实施例中,图8所示的流程800的一个或一个以上操作可以在图1所示的介入规划系统的应用场景100中实现。例如,图8所示的流程800可以以指令的形式存储在存储设备中,并由处理设备120调用和/或执行。Figure 8 is an exemplary flowchart of a quantum annealing algorithm according to some embodiments of this specification. As shown in Figure 8, process 800 includes the following steps. In some embodiments, one or more operations of the process 800 shown in FIG. 8 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 . For example, the process 800 shown in FIG. 8 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
步骤8010,初始化各项参数及外循环迭代次数。Step 8010: Initialize various parameters and the number of outer loop iterations.
在一些实施例中,用户可以初始化设置候选穿刺路径与穿刺风险结构的距离的权重w1,候选穿刺路径的长度的权重w2,候选穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角的权重w3,步长α,耦合系数JT,迭代过程中初始温度T0,外循环最大迭代次数M,内循环最大迭代次数N;并将外循环迭代次数s设置为1。In some embodiments, the user can initially set the weight w 1 for the distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, the weight w 2 for the length of the candidate puncture path, the weight w 3 for the angle between the candidate puncture path and the target tissue, and the step size. α, coupling coefficient J T , initial temperature T 0 during the iteration process, maximum number of iterations of the outer loop M, maximum number of iterations of the inner loop N; and set the number of iterations of the outer loop s to 1.
在一些实施例中,上述各项参数及迭代次数也可以为预设的固定配置,无需用户输入。In some embodiments, the above parameters and the number of iterations can also be preset fixed configurations without user input.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以通过执行步骤8020-步骤8130,进行至少一轮外循环,直至s>M。在每一次外循环过程中,处理设备可以通过执行步骤8030-步骤8110,进行至少一轮内循环,直至s>N。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may perform at least one round of outer loop by executing steps 8020 to 8130 until s>M. During each outer loop, the processing device may perform at least one round of inner loop by executing steps 8030 to 8110 until s>N.
步骤8020,随机初始化入针点及内循环迭代次数。 Step 8020: Randomly initialize the needle entry point and the number of inner loop iterations.
在一些实施例中,每次外循环开始时,处理设备120可以随机初始化入针点,确定本轮外循环迭代的初始入针点;并将内循环迭代次数t设置为1。In some embodiments, each time the outer loop starts, the processing device 120 can randomly initialize the needle entry point, determine the initial needle entry point for this round of outer loop iterations, and set the number of inner loop iterations t to 1.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以随机选择任一候选入针点作为为初始入针点。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may randomly select any candidate needle insertion point as the initial needle insertion point.
在一些实施例中,当外循环次数大于等于预设外循环次数阈值时,处理设备120可以确定入针点质量分布,并根据入针点质量分布,将候选入针点集合划分为至少一个抽样区域。接着,以非等可能概率从至少一个抽样区域中,选择其中一个抽样区域作为目标抽样区域,并从目标抽样区域中确定本轮外循环迭代的初始入针点。其中,预设外循环次数阈值可以人为设定,例如,100次、200次、300次等。在一些实施例中,当外循环次数大于等于预设外循环次数阈值时,处理设备120可以在每一次确定初始入针点时,都采用上述方法确定初始入针点。在一些实施例中,当外循环次数大于等于预设外循环次数阈值时,处理设备120可以按照预设规则确定采用上述方法确定初始入针点的外循环迭代次数。其中,预设规则可以包括间隔选取、随机选取等。例如,若预设外循环次数阈值为200次,外循环最大迭代次数为500次,处理设备120可以在第200次、第210次、第220次……第490次和第500次使用上述方法确定初始入针点。In some embodiments, when the number of external circulations is greater than or equal to the preset threshold of the number of external circulations, the processing device 120 can determine the needle insertion point mass distribution, and divide the candidate needle insertion point set into at least one sample according to the needle insertion point quality distribution. area. Then, one of the sampling areas is selected as the target sampling area from at least one sampling area with unequal probability, and the initial entry point of this round of outer loop iteration is determined from the target sampling area. Among them, the preset external circulation times threshold can be set manually, for example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, etc. In some embodiments, when the number of external circulation times is greater than or equal to the preset threshold number of external circulation times, the processing device 120 may use the above method to determine the initial needle insertion point each time it determines the initial needle insertion point. In some embodiments, when the number of external loops is greater than or equal to the preset threshold of the number of external loops, the processing device 120 may determine the number of external loop iterations using the above method to determine the initial needle entry point according to the preset rules. Among them, the preset rules may include interval selection, random selection, etc. For example, if the preset outer loop number threshold is 200 times and the maximum number of outer loop iterations is 500, the processing device 120 can use the above method at the 200th, 210th, 220th... 490th and 500th times. Determine the initial needle entry point.
入针点质量分布可以包括已完成外循环和/或内循环迭代中每轮迭代的入针点及其对应的点位评估值。The mass distribution of needle entry points may include needle entry points and their corresponding point evaluation values for each iteration of the outer loop and/or inner loop iterations.
点位评估值是指可以评估入针点优劣程度的字母、数值等。例如,处理设备120可以将入针点对应的第一函数项的值作为点位评估值,点位评估值越低,该入针点越优。Point evaluation value refers to letters, numerical values, etc. that can evaluate the quality of the needle entry point. For example, the processing device 120 may use the value of the first function term corresponding to the needle insertion point as the point evaluation value. The lower the point evaluation value, the better the needle insertion point.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以计算入针点对应的第一函数项的值,并基于第一函数项的值,确定入针点对应的第一函数项的值在已完成外循环和/或内循环迭代中每轮迭代的入针点对应的第一函数项的值中的排名值。进一步地,基于排名值,确定入针点对应的点位评估值。例如,处理设备120可以基于公式(1)计算入针点对应的第一函数项的值,将已完成外循环和/或内循环迭代中每轮迭代的入针点对应的第一函数项的值由小到大进行排列,以确定入针点对应的第一函数项的值的排名值,排名值越低,该入针点越优,点位评估值越高。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may calculate the value of the first function term corresponding to the needle entry point, and based on the value of the first function term, determine that the value of the first function term corresponding to the needle entry point is the value of the first function term corresponding to the needle entry point after completing the outer loop and /or the ranking value among the values of the first function term corresponding to the needle entry point of each iteration in the inner loop iteration. Further, based on the ranking value, the point evaluation value corresponding to the needle entry point is determined. For example, the processing device 120 may calculate the value of the first function term corresponding to the needle entry point based on formula (1), and calculate the value of the first function term corresponding to the needle entry point of each iteration of the completed outer loop and/or inner loop iteration. The values are arranged from small to large to determine the ranking value of the value of the first function item corresponding to the needle entry point. The lower the ranking value, the better the needle entry point and the higher the point evaluation value.
抽样区域是指基于入针点质量分布的特点,将点位评估值相近的入针点划分到一起的多个区域。例如,抽样区域可以为2个,3个、4个等。The sampling area refers to multiple areas where needle entry points with similar point evaluation values are divided together based on the characteristics of needle entry point mass distribution. For example, the sampling areas can be 2, 3, 4, etc.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以采用随机划分的方法划分抽样区域。具体地,处理设备120可以随机划分抽样区域,并依次评估每次划分是否可以满足预设要求。若可以满足预设要求,则将本次划分的抽样区域作为最终的抽样区域;否则重新进行随机划分抽样区域。其中,预设要求可以为每个抽样区域中的入针点对应的第一函数项的值的方差小于预设方差值。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may divide the sampling area using a random division method. Specifically, the processing device 120 can randomly divide the sampling area, and sequentially evaluate whether each division can meet the preset requirements. If the preset requirements can be met, the sampling area divided this time will be used as the final sampling area; otherwise, the sampling area will be randomly divided again. The preset requirement may be that the variance of the value of the first function term corresponding to the needle entry point in each sampling area is less than the preset variance value.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120还可以采用其它方法划分抽样区域,例如,聚类。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may also use other methods to divide the sampling area, such as clustering.
目标抽样区域是指最终选定的抽样区域。The target sampling area refers to the final selected sampling area.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以以非等可能概率从至少一个抽样区域中,选择其中一个抽样区域作为目标抽样区域。例如,对于至少一个抽样区域中的每个抽样区域,处理设备120可以计算该抽样区域中所有已完成外循环和/或内循环迭代中每轮迭代的入针点的点位评估值的平均值,并将该评估值作为平均点位评估值。接着,处理设备120可以基于至少一个抽样区域中每个抽样区域的平均点位评估值的比例,确定选择各个抽样区域作为目标抽样区域的概率。例如,若抽样区域1的平均点位评估值:抽样区域2的平均点位评估值:抽样区域3的平均点位评估值=1:2:1,则选择抽样区域1作为目标抽样区域的概率为选择抽样区域2作为目标抽样区域的概率为选择抽样区域3作为目标抽样区域的概率为 In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may select one of the sampling areas from at least one sampling area as the target sampling area with non-equal probability. For example, for each sampling area in at least one sampling area, the processing device 120 may calculate the average point evaluation value of the needle entry point of all completed outer loop and/or inner loop iterations of each iteration in the sampling area. , and use this evaluation value as the average point evaluation value. Next, the processing device 120 may determine the probability of selecting each sampling area as the target sampling area based on the proportion of the average point evaluation value of each sampling area in the at least one sampling area. For example, if the average point evaluation value of sampling area 1: the average point evaluation value of sampling area 2: the average point evaluation value of sampling area 3 = 1:2:1, then the probability of selecting sampling area 1 as the target sampling area for The probability of selecting sampling area 2 as the target sampling area is The probability of selecting sampling area 3 as the target sampling area is
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以从目标抽样区域中随机选择任一候选入针点作为为初始入针点。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may randomly select any candidate needle entry point from the target sampling area as the initial needle entry point.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过确定入针点质量分布,将候选入针点集合划分为至少一个抽样区域,并以非等可能概率选择其中一个抽样区域作为目标抽样区域,并从目标抽样区域中确定本轮外循环迭代的入针点,可以选择较优的本轮外循环迭代的入针点,有利于后续确定最优的目标穿刺路径。由于是以非等可能概率选择其中一个抽样区域作为目标抽样区域,而并不是选择其中一个抽样区域作为目标抽样区域,避免了陷入局部最优。In some embodiments of this specification, by determining the mass distribution of needle entry points, the set of candidate needle entry points is divided into at least one sampling area, and one of the sampling areas is selected as the target sampling area with unequal probability, and is sampled from the target The needle entry point of this round of outer loop iteration is determined in the area, and a better needle entry point of this round of outer loop iteration can be selected, which is beneficial to subsequent determination of the optimal target puncture path. Since one of the sampling areas is selected as the target sampling area with unequal probability, rather than one of the sampling areas as the target sampling area, falling into a local optimum is avoided.
步骤8030,随机以步长α移动入针点,产生新解P'。Step 8030, randomly move the needle entry point with a step size α to generate a new solution P'.
在一些实施例中,若之前的入针点为Pij,则随机以步长α移动入针点Pij,产生新的入针点Pi±α,j或Pi,j±α。需要说明的是,新的入针点需要为候选入针点中的点。相应地,上一轮迭代的解为P,产生的新解为P'。In some embodiments, if the previous needle entry point is P ij , the needle entry point P ij is randomly moved with a step size α to generate a new needle entry point Pi ±α,j or Pi,j±α . It should be noted that the new needle entry point needs to be one of the candidate needle entry points. Correspondingly, the solution of the previous iteration is P, and the new solution generated is P'.
在一些实施例中,步长α可以为任意正整数。例如,α可以为1、2、3等较小的值。 In some embodiments, the step size α can be any positive integer. For example, α can be a smaller value such as 1, 2, 3, etc.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以随机选取10以内的正整数,作为步长α。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may randomly select a positive integer within 10 as the step size α.
在一些实施例中,处理器120可以确定当前入针点位置的预设邻域所在的皮肤表面的平均曲度,并根据平均曲度,确定本轮内循环迭代的步长α。预设邻域是指与入针点位置的距离不大于预设阈值的体素点构成的集合。其中,预设阈值可以为预先设定的阈值。In some embodiments, the processor 120 may determine the average curvature of the skin surface where the preset neighborhood of the current needle insertion point position is located, and determine the step size α of the loop iteration within this round based on the average curvature. The preset neighborhood refers to the set of voxel points whose distance from the needle entry point is no greater than the preset threshold. The preset threshold may be a preset threshold.
平均曲度是反映预设邻域所在的皮肤表面的弯曲程度的物理量。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以获取预设邻域所在的皮肤表面上的每个表面体素的曲率半径,并计算所有曲率半径的平均值,并将曲率半径的平均值的倒数作为平均曲度。平均曲度越大,曲率半径的平均值越小,预设邻域所在的皮肤表面起伏越大,则皮肤表面上相邻两体素点作为入针点时,可能具有更大的差别,因此需要减小步长α。The average curvature is a physical quantity that reflects the curvature of the skin surface where the preset neighborhood is located. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may obtain the curvature radius of each surface voxel on the skin surface where the preset neighborhood is located, calculate the average of all curvature radii, and use the reciprocal of the average of the curvature radii as the average curvature. The greater the average curvature, the smaller the average curvature radius, and the greater the undulations of the skin surface where the preset neighborhood is located, then the two adjacent voxel points on the skin surface may have a greater difference when used as the needle insertion point. Therefore, The step size α needs to be reduced.
在一些实施例中,处理设备可以根据当前入针点位置的预设邻域所在的皮肤表面的平均曲度,确定本轮内循环迭代的步长。例如,当前入针点位置的预设邻域所在的皮肤表面的平均曲度越大,路径点步长α可以越小。In some embodiments, the processing device may determine the step size of the loop iteration within this round based on the average curvature of the skin surface where the preset neighborhood of the current needle entry point location is located. For example, the greater the average curvature of the skin surface where the preset neighborhood of the current needle entry point is located, the smaller the path point step size α can be.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,基于当前入针点位置的预设邻域所在的皮肤表面的平均曲度,确定本轮内循环迭代的步长,考虑到了周围体素的差异大小,可以使该步长更为合理。In some embodiments of this specification, the step size of the inner loop iteration of this round is determined based on the average curvature of the skin surface where the preset neighborhood of the current needle entry point is located. Taking into account the difference in surrounding voxels, it can be used This step size is more reasonable.
步骤8040,计算第一函数项Hp(P')。Step 8040, calculate the first function term H p (P').
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于公式(1),计算新解P'的第一函数项Hp(P')。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may calculate the first function term H p (P') of the new solution P' based on formula (1).
步骤8050,判断系统能量是否减少。Step 8050, determine whether the system energy is reduced.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将上一轮迭代的解P的哈密顿量H(P),与新解P'的哈密顿量H(P')进行比较,判断H(P')相对于H(P)是否减小。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将上一轮迭代的解P的第一函数项Hp(P),与新解P'的第一函数项Hp(P')进行比较,判断Hp(P')相对于Hp(P)是否减小。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can compare the Hamiltonian H(P) of the solution P in the previous iteration with the Hamiltonian H(P') of the new solution P', and determine H(P') Whether it decreases relative to H(P). In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may compare the first function term H p (P) of the solution P in the previous iteration with the first function term H p (P') of the new solution P', and determine H Whether p (P') decreases relative to H p (P).
在一些实施例中,响应于系统能量减少,处理设备120可以执行步骤8070。在一些实施例中,响应于系统能量未减少,处理设备120可以执行步骤8060。In some embodiments, in response to a decrease in system energy, processing device 120 may perform step 8070. In some embodiments, in response to the system energy not being reduced, processing device 120 may perform step 8060.
步骤8060,判断是否exp(-△H/T)>random(0,1)。Step 8060, determine whether exp(-△H/T)>random(0, 1).
在一些实施例中,处理设备可以判断是否满足Metropolics准则,即判断exp(-△H/T)>random(0,1)是否成立。其中,△H为新解P'的哈密顿量H(P')与当前最优解Pbest的哈密顿量H(Pbest)的差值,T为迭代过程的温度,random(0,1)为(0,1)的随机数。exp(-△H/T)>random(0,1)可以表示接受表现不佳的新解的条件。随着外循环迭代次数增减,温度逐渐从T0下降到零,第二函数项Hk也随之下降。在温度下降的过程中其接受的概率将越来越低,即因量子隧穿效应“穿过”局部最优解两边势垒的概率越来越低。In some embodiments, the processing device can determine whether the Metropolis criterion is met, that is, whether exp(-ΔH/T)>random(0, 1) is true. Among them, △H is the difference between the Hamiltonian H(P') of the new solution P' and the Hamiltonian H(P best ) of the current optimal solution P best , T is the temperature of the iterative process, random (0, 1 ) is a random number of (0, 1). exp(-△H/T)>random(0,1) can represent the condition for accepting new solutions that perform poorly. As the number of iterations of the outer loop increases or decreases, the temperature gradually decreases from T 0 to zero, and the second function term H k also decreases. As the temperature decreases, the probability of its acceptance will become lower and lower, that is, the probability of "passing through" the potential barriers on both sides of the local optimal solution due to the quantum tunneling effect will become lower and lower.
在一些实施例中,响应于exp(-△H/T)>random(0,1),处理设备120可以执行步骤8070。在一些实施例中,响应于exp(-△H/T)≤random(0,1),处理设备120可以执行步骤8100。In some embodiments, in response to exp(-ΔH/T)>random(0,1), processing device 120 may perform step 8070. In some embodiments, processing device 120 may perform step 8100 in response to exp(-ΔH/T)≤random(0,1).
步骤8070,P=P′。Step 8070, P=P′.
在一些实施例中,响应于步骤8050或步骤8060的判断结果为是,记录P=P′,并进入步骤8080。In some embodiments, in response to the determination result of step 8050 or step 8060 being yes, record P=P′, and enter step 8080.
步骤8080,判断是否H(P′)<H(Pbest)。Step 8080, determine whether H(P')<H(P best ).
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以判断解P′的哈密顿量H(P′)是否小于当前最优解Pbest的哈密顿量H(Pbest)。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine whether the Hamiltonian H(P′) of the solution P′ is smaller than the Hamiltonian H(P best ) of the current optimal solution P best .
在一些实施例中,响应于H(P′)<H(Pbest),处理设备120可以执行步骤8090。在一些实施例中,响应于H(P′)≥H(Pbest),处理设备120可以执行步骤8100。In some embodiments, in response to H(P') < H(P best ), processing device 120 may perform step 8090. In some embodiments, processing device 120 may perform step 8100 in response to H(P′)≥H(P best ).
步骤8090,Pbest=P′。Step 8090, P best =P′.
在一些实施例中,响应于步骤8080的判断结果为是,记录Pbest=P,并进入步骤8100。In some embodiments, in response to the determination result of step 8080 being yes, record P best =P, and enter step 8100.
步骤8100,判断是否t≤N。Step 8100, determine whether t≤N.
在一些实施例中,响应于t≤N,处理设备120可以执行步骤8110。在一些实施例中,响应于t>N,处理设备120可以执行步骤8120。In some embodiments, in response to t≤N, processing device 120 may perform step 8110. In some embodiments, in response to t>N, processing device 120 may perform step 8120.
步骤8110,t=t+1。Step 8110, t=t+1.
在一些实施例中,响应于步骤8100的判断结果为是,即t≤N,令t=t+1,并跳转到步骤8030,进入下一次内循环。In some embodiments, in response to the judgment result of step 8100 being yes, that is, t≤N, let t=t+1, and jump to step 8030 to enter the next inner loop.
步骤8120,判断是否s≤M。Step 8120, determine whether s≤M.
在一些实施例中,响应于s≤M,处理设备120可以执行步骤8130。在一些实施例中,响应于s>M,处理设备120可以执行步骤8140。In some embodiments, in response to s≤M, processing device 120 may perform step 8130. In some embodiments, in response to s>M, processing device 120 may perform step 8140.
步骤8130,s=s+1。Step 8130, s=s+1.
在一些实施例中,响应于步骤8120的判断结果为是,即s≤M,令s=s+1,并调整到步骤8020, 进入下一次外循环。In some embodiments, in response to the determination result of step 8120 being yes, that is, s≤M, let s=s+1, and adjust to step 8020, Enter the next outer loop.
步骤8140,确定目标穿刺路径。Step 8140: Determine the target puncture path.
在一些实施例中,响应于步骤8120的判断结果为否,外循环结束,处理设备可以将最优解Pbest对应的候选穿刺路径确定为目标穿刺路径。In some embodiments, in response to the determination result of step 8120 being negative, the outer loop ends, and the processing device may determine the candidate puncture path corresponding to the optimal solution P best as the target puncture path.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过量子退火算法确定最优解,并将最优解对应的候选穿刺路径确定为目标穿刺路径,能够准确有效地规划目标穿刺路径,提升了目标穿刺路径规划效率。由于目标穿刺路径规划是临床多约束条件的优化问题,该问题是一个非确定多项式问题,即存在确定答案,但其得到解的时间复杂度呈指数增加,经典计算机因自身的性能限制,存在计算时间过长,或无法达到最优解的困难,本实施例的技术方案,可以通过在量子退火机上运行,如将哈密顿量映射至量子退火机的真实量子比特,在量子退火机上进行,使得穿刺路径规划效率更高,能够达到快速、准确的术前穿刺路径规划效果。In some embodiments of this specification, the optimal solution is determined through a quantum annealing algorithm, and the candidate puncture path corresponding to the optimal solution is determined as the target puncture path, which can accurately and effectively plan the target puncture path and improve the efficiency of target puncture path planning. . Since target puncture path planning is a clinical multi-constraint optimization problem, the problem is a non-deterministic polynomial problem, that is, there is a definite answer, but the time complexity of obtaining the solution increases exponentially. Classic computers have calculation problems due to their own performance limitations. If the time is too long or the optimal solution cannot be reached, the technical solution of this embodiment can be run on a quantum annealing machine, such as mapping the Hamiltonian to the real qubits of the quantum annealing machine, so that The puncture path planning is more efficient and can achieve fast and accurate preoperative puncture path planning.
应当注意的是,上述有关流程800的描述仅仅是为了示例和说明,而不限定本说明书的适用范围。对于本领域技术人员来说,在本说明书的指导下可以对流程800进行各种修正和改变。然而,这些修正和改变仍在本说明书的范围之内。It should be noted that the above description of process 800 is only for example and illustration, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification. For those skilled in the art, various modifications and changes can be made to process 800 under the guidance of this specification. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification.
在一些实施例中,以任一候选入针点为目标搜索点,处理设备可以基于任一候选入针点对应的候选穿刺路径,根据哈密顿量计算所述目标搜索点对应的路径分析结果;并从多个路径分析结果中搜索出最优的路径分析结果,并将最优的路径分析结果对应的候选穿刺路径,作为目标穿刺路径。例如,处理设备120可以计算所有候选穿刺路径对应的哈密顿量,并将其中哈密顿量最小的候选穿刺路径,确定为目标穿刺路径。In some embodiments, taking any candidate needle entry point as the target search point, the processing device can calculate the path analysis result corresponding to the target search point according to the Hamiltonian based on the candidate puncture path corresponding to any candidate needle entry point; The optimal path analysis result is searched from multiple path analysis results, and the candidate puncture path corresponding to the optimal path analysis result is used as the target puncture path. For example, the processing device 120 may calculate the Hamiltonian corresponding to all candidate puncture paths, and determine the candidate puncture path with the smallest Hamiltonian as the target puncture path.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以通过其它的预设搜索算法确定目标穿刺路径。例如,遗传算法、模拟退火算法等。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the target puncture path through other preset search algorithms. For example, genetic algorithm, simulated annealing algorithm, etc.
在一些实施例中,当介入手术用于消融治疗时,目标参数可以包括目标穿刺路径、目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数。处理设备120可以采取图9或图13的流程确定目标参数。In some embodiments, when interventional surgery is used for ablation treatment, the target parameters may include target puncture path, target stop point location, and target ablation sphere parameters. The processing device 120 may adopt the process of FIG. 9 or FIG. 13 to determine the target parameters.
图9是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的确定目标参数的示例性流程图。如图9所示,流程900包括下述步骤。在一些实施例中,图9所示的流程900的一个或一个以上操作可以在图1所示的介入规划系统的应用场景100中实现。例如,图9所示的流程900可以以指令的形式存储在存储设备中,并由处理设备120调用和/或执行。Figure 9 is an exemplary flowchart of determining target parameters according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in Figure 9, process 900 includes the following steps. In some embodiments, one or more operations of the process 900 shown in FIG. 9 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 . For example, the process 900 shown in FIG. 9 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
步骤910,基于患者数据,生成至少一组规划参数。Step 910: Generate at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data.
规划参数是指供选择的作为介入设备执行消融治疗手术的一组参数。在一些实施例中,规划参数可以包括穿刺路径数量n、入针点集{Pi1,Pi2,…,Pin}和介入针的靶点集{Pj1,Pj2,…,Pjn}组成的穿刺路径{Pi1j1,Pi2j2,…,Pinjn}、每条穿刺路径上的至少一个停留点位置{T1p1,T2p1,…,Tkpn}、可选消融球参数{R1,R2,…,Rs}等。不同的消融功率和消融时间对应不同的消融球参数,消融功率越大,消融时间越长,消融球参数对应的消融球越大。Planning parameters refer to a set of parameters that can be selected as an interventional device to perform an ablation treatment procedure. In some embodiments, the planning parameters may include the number of puncture paths n, the needle entry point set {P i1 , Pi2 , ..., P in } and the interventional needle target point set {P j1 , P j2 , ..., P jn } The puncture path consisting of {P i1j1 , P i2j2 ,..., P injn }, at least one stop point position on each puncture path {T 1p1 , T 2p1 ,..., T kpn }, optional ablation ball parameters {R 1 , R 2 ,…, R s } etc. Different ablation power and ablation time correspond to different ablation sphere parameters. The greater the ablation power, the longer the ablation time, and the larger the ablation sphere corresponding to the ablation sphere parameters.
其中,Pinjn代表入针点Pin和介入针的靶点Pjn组成的第n条路径;Tkpn代表第n条路径上的第k个停留点位置;Rs代表第s个功率-时间对应下的消融球参数(例如,以消融球为椭球为例,Rs可以为长短轴的长度为36×36×42mm的椭球),s代表供选择的不同消融球参数的数量。在一些实施例中,消融球可以是椭球形、球形等形状。在一些实施例中,同一穿刺路径上的不同停留点位置对应的消融球参数可以是相同的。Among them, P injn represents the nth path composed of the needle entry point P in and the target point of the interventional needle P jn ; T kpn represents the kth stop point position on the nth path; R s represents the sth power-time The corresponding ablation sphere parameters (for example, if the ablation sphere is an ellipsoid, R s can be an ellipsoid with a length of 36 × 36 × 42 mm in its major and minor axes), s represents the number of different ablation sphere parameters for selection. In some embodiments, the ablation sphere may be in the shape of an ellipsoid, a sphere, or the like. In some embodiments, ablation ball parameters corresponding to different stop point positions on the same puncture path may be the same.
例如,如图10所示,虚线区域为病灶,一组规划参数可以包括穿刺路径数量n=2、穿刺路径的入针点集为{Pi1,Pi2}和介入针的靶点集为{Pj1,Pj2}组成的穿刺路径{Pi1j1,Pi2j2}、穿刺路径Pi1j1上具有停留点位置{T1p1,T2p1}、穿刺路径Pi2j2上具有一个停留点位置T1p2、可选消融球参数{R1,R2,R3}。For example, as shown in Figure 10, the dotted area is the lesion, and a set of planning parameters may include the number of puncture paths n=2, the set of needle entry points of the puncture path as {P i1 , P i2 }, and the set of target points of the interventional needle as { The puncture path {P i1j1 , P i2j2 } composed of P j1 , P j2 }, the puncture path P i1j1 has a stay point position {T 1p1 , T 2p1 }, the puncture path P i2j2 has a stay point position T 1p2 , optional Ablation sphere parameters {R 1 , R 2 , R 3 }.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以对患者数据进行三维重建,以获得三维医学影像,并基于三维医学影像,确定结构特征,从而基于三维医学影像确定至少一组规划参数。关于三维医学影像,结构特征的更多内容参见图4及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can perform three-dimensional reconstruction of patient data to obtain a three-dimensional medical image, and determine structural features based on the three-dimensional medical image, thereby determining at least one set of planning parameters based on the three-dimensional medical image. Regarding three-dimensional medical imaging, see Figure 4 and its related description for more information on structural characteristics.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以通过多种方式基于三维医学影像确定规划参数。例如,处理设备120可以将感兴趣区域中的任意两个点组成的路径作为穿刺路径,随机选择每条穿刺路径上的至少一个点作为每条穿刺路径上的至少一个停留点位置,并在可选消融球参数中,确定消融球参数。又例如,医生可以基于三维医学影像手动输入规划参数。再例如,处理设备120可以将历史数据库中与该三维医学影像相似的三维医学影像对应的实际参数作为规划参数。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine planning parameters based on the three-dimensional medical images in various ways. For example, the processing device 120 may use a path composed of any two points in the area of interest as a puncture path, randomly select at least one point on each puncture path as at least one stop point position on each puncture path, and select Select ablation sphere parameters to determine the ablation sphere parameters. For another example, doctors can manually input planning parameters based on three-dimensional medical images. For another example, the processing device 120 may use actual parameters corresponding to three-dimensional medical images similar to the three-dimensional medical images in the historical database as planning parameters.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120还可以对三维医学影像进行预处理操作,其中,预处理操作包括感兴趣区域裁剪、数据点降采样以及血管粗细分级中的一个或多个;然后基于预处理操作得到的结果确定至少一组规划参数。 In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can also perform a preprocessing operation on the three-dimensional medical image, where the preprocessing operation includes one or more of region of interest cropping, data point downsampling, and blood vessel coarse subdivision grading; and then based on the preprocessing The results obtained from the operation determine at least one set of planning parameters.
感兴趣区域裁剪是指对三维医学影像,基于病灶位置进行裁剪,进而限定入针点的有效范围。例如,处理设备120可以依据靶区包围盒或靶区质心位置,截选上下相邻Lmm(例如,10mm、20mm、30mm等)片层用于入针点规划。又例如,处理设备120可以依据皮肤轮廓包围盒和靶点中心位置,裁剪皮肤轮廓包围盒1/4区域作为有效入针点区域。又例如,处理设备120可以采用上述两种方式对感兴趣区域进行裁剪。Region-of-interest cropping refers to cropping three-dimensional medical images based on the location of the lesion, thereby limiting the effective range of the needle entry point. For example, the processing device 120 can select upper and lower adjacent Lmm (for example, 10mm, 20mm, 30mm, etc.) slices for needle entry point planning based on the target area bounding box or the target area centroid position. For another example, the processing device 120 may crop a 1/4 area of the skin contour bounding box as the effective needle entry point area based on the skin contour bounding box and the center position of the target point. For another example, the processing device 120 may use the above two methods to crop the area of interest.
数据点降采样可以对三维医学影像中精度较高的数据点进行稀疏化,从而稀疏化病灶区域的点和皮肤点。数据点降采样的方法包括但不限于重采样、插值法等。Data point downsampling can sparse the higher-precision data points in three-dimensional medical images, thereby sparse points in the lesion area and skin points. Methods for downsampling data points include but are not limited to resampling, interpolation, etc.
血管粗细分级是指对三维医学影像中的血管按直径大小进行分级。不同粗细的血管对消融的影响不同,血管粗细分级可以使在进行路径规划时按不同血管粗细分级结果进行处理,避免穿刺路径经过较粗的血管以及消融场对较粗的血管产生损伤。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以区分三维医学影像中的血管,通过图论方式构建血管树分支,并通过血管中心线计算血管段直径,完成血管粗细分级。在一些实施例中,血管粗细分级的结果可以基于血管段的直径用等级表示,例如,根据血管直径大小可以由小到大划分为1级、2级、3级等。Blood vessel thickness grading refers to grading blood vessels in three-dimensional medical images according to their diameter. Blood vessels of different thicknesses have different effects on ablation. The blood vessel thickness classification allows the path planning to be processed according to the results of different blood vessel thickness classifications to avoid the puncture path passing through thicker blood vessels and the ablation field causing damage to thicker blood vessels. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can distinguish blood vessels in three-dimensional medical images, construct blood vessel tree branches through graph theory, and calculate blood vessel segment diameters through blood vessel center lines to complete blood vessel thickness classification. In some embodiments, the results of the blood vessel thickness classification can be expressed in grades based on the diameter of the blood vessel segment. For example, the blood vessel diameter can be divided into level 1, level 2, level 3, etc. from small to large according to the diameter of the blood vessel.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以根据预处理操作得到的裁剪后的感兴趣区域中的数据点降采样结果确定规划参数中的入针点集、靶点集(例如,将降采样结果得到的数据点作为入针点集、靶点集等),可以根据血管粗细分级结果筛选掉会经过较粗血管的穿刺路径,以及将可选消融球参数构成的消融范围设置在不会对较粗血管产生损伤的范围内。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can determine the needle entry point set and the target point set in the planning parameters based on the downsampling results of data points in the cropped region of interest obtained by the preprocessing operation (for example, the downsampling results are obtained by The data points are used as needle entry point set, target point set, etc.), you can filter out the puncture paths that will pass through thicker blood vessels based on the blood vessel thickness classification results, and set the ablation range composed of optional ablation sphere parameters so as not to affect thicker blood vessels. within the range of blood vessel damage.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过对三维医学影像进行预处理,可以减轻目标参数的确定过程给处理设备性能带来的压力,同时提高了优化消融过程的效率。In some embodiments of this specification, by preprocessing three-dimensional medical images, the pressure brought by the determination process of target parameters on the performance of the processing equipment can be alleviated, while the efficiency of optimizing the ablation process can be improved.
步骤920,基于至少一组规划参数,确定目标参数。Step 920: Determine target parameters based on at least one set of planning parameters.
在一些实施例中,目标参数可以包括目标穿刺路径、目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数。关于目标参数、目标穿刺路径、目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数的更多内容参见图3及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the target parameters may include target puncture path, target stop point location, and target ablation sphere parameters. For more information on target parameters, target puncture path, target stop point location, and target ablation sphere parameters, see Figure 3 and its related descriptions.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于个体生成器,生成个体集合。对个体集合进行至少一轮迭代更新,直至第一迭代完成条件被满足。基于更新后的个体集合,确定至少一组中间参数,进而基于至少一组中间参数,确定目标参数。更多关于确定目标参数的内容,参见图11及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may generate a set of individuals based on the individual generator. Perform at least one iterative update on the individual collection until the first iteration completion condition is met. Based on the updated individual set, at least one set of intermediate parameters is determined, and then based on at least one set of intermediate parameters, the target parameters are determined. For more information on determining target parameters, see Figure 11 and its associated description.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过从规划参数中确定目标参数,可以获得更合理的目标参数以提高医生的手术效率,减轻医生的工作难度。In some embodiments of this specification, by determining the target parameters from the planning parameters, more reasonable target parameters can be obtained to improve the doctor's surgical efficiency and ease the doctor's work difficulty.
应当注意的是,上述有关流程900的描述仅仅是为了示例和说明,而不限定本说明书的适用范围。对于本领域技术人员来说,在本说明书的指导下可以对流程900进行各种修正和改变。然而,这些修正和改变仍在本说明书的范围之内。例如,步骤910中的预处理操作可以省略其中的一项或者多项,也可以全部省略。It should be noted that the above description of process 900 is only for example and illustration, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification. For those skilled in the art, various modifications and changes can be made to process 900 under the guidance of this specification. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification. For example, one or more of the preprocessing operations in step 910 may be omitted, or all of them may be omitted.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以先基于图4的流程确定目标穿刺路径,接着基于图9的流程确定除目标穿刺路径以外的目标参数(即,目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数)。步骤910中,由于目标穿刺路径已确定,处理设备120可以只通过变换停留点位置和消融球参数来生成至少一组规划参数。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may first determine the target puncture path based on the process of FIG. 4 , and then determine the target parameters other than the target puncture path (ie, the target stay point position and the target ablation sphere parameters) based on the process of FIG. 9 . In step 910, since the target puncture path has been determined, the processing device 120 can generate at least one set of planning parameters only by changing the stay point position and the ablation ball parameters.
图11是本说明书的一些实施例所示的另一确定目标参数的示例性流程图。如图11所示,流程1100包括下述步骤。在一些实施例中,图11所示的流程1100的一个或一个以上操作可以在图1所示的介入规划系统的应用场景100中实现。例如,图11所示的流程1100可以以指令的形式存储在存储设备中,并由处理设备120调用和/或执行。Figure 11 is another exemplary flowchart for determining target parameters illustrated in some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in Figure 11, process 1100 includes the following steps. In some embodiments, one or more operations of the process 1100 shown in FIG. 11 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 . For example, the process 1100 shown in FIG. 11 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
步骤1110,基于个体生成器,生成个体集合。Step 1110: Generate an individual set based on the individual generator.
个体是指与规划参数相对应的特定主体。例如,每个个体可以对应一组规划参数,即每个个体可以包括一组穿刺路径、消融球参数、停留点位置等参数。An individual refers to a specific subject corresponding to the planning parameters. For example, each individual can correspond to a set of planning parameters, that is, each individual can include a set of puncture paths, ablation sphere parameters, stay point locations and other parameters.
在一些实施例中,个体生成器可以基于一定规则生成至少一个个体,并计算至少一个个体中每一个的个体属性。其中,个体属性可以包括个体的第一评估值和第一约束判定值等。关于第一评估值和第一约束判定值的更多细节可以参见步骤1130及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the individual generator can generate at least one individual based on certain rules and calculate individual attributes of each of the at least one individual. The individual attributes may include the individual's first evaluation value, first constraint determination value, etc. For more details about the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value, please refer to step 1130 and its related description.
个体集合是指多个个体组成的集合。例如,多组规划参数组成的集合。An individual collection refers to a collection of multiple individuals. For example, a set of multiple planning parameters.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以通过多种方式基于个体生成器生成个体集合。仅作为示例,例如,个体生成器可以从入针点集和靶点集中随机选择入针点和靶点进行配对形成至少一条穿刺路径,在每条穿刺路径上按照间隔一定的规则确定停留点位置(如在穿刺路径与病灶区域相交的部分的中点、三等分点处等),并且从可选消融球参数中随机选择消融球参数,将至少一条具有停留点位置和消融球参数的路径进行随机组合形成多个含有至少一条穿刺路径的个体,多个个体构成个体集合。再例如,个体生成器还可以将历史数据库中至少一个相似度高于相似阈值的患者数据对应的实际参数作为个体,以构建个体集合。其中,相似度为患者数据对应的三维医学影像与历史数据库中的患者数据对应的三维医学影像的相似 程度,相似阈值可以人工设置。In some embodiments, processing device 120 may generate a set of individuals based on the individual generator in a variety of ways. Just as an example, for example, the individual generator can randomly select the needle entry point and the target point from the needle entry point set and the target point set to pair up to form at least one puncture path, and determine the stop point position according to certain intervals on each puncture path. (such as at the midpoint, trisection point, etc. of the intersection between the puncture path and the lesion area), and randomly select the ablation sphere parameters from the optional ablation sphere parameters, and add at least one path with a stay point position and ablation sphere parameters. Randomly combine to form multiple individuals containing at least one puncture path, and the multiple individuals constitute an individual set. For another example, the individual generator can also use the actual parameter corresponding to at least one patient data whose similarity is higher than the similarity threshold in the historical database as an individual to construct an individual set. Among them, the similarity is the similarity between the three-dimensional medical image corresponding to the patient data and the three-dimensional medical image corresponding to the patient data in the historical database. To a certain extent, the similarity threshold can be set manually.
步骤1120,基于个体生成器,生成至少一个新的个体,将至少一个新的个体加入个体集合。Step 1120: Generate at least one new individual based on the individual generator, and add at least one new individual to the individual set.
新的个体是指个体的参数中至少有一项不同于个体集合中任何一个原有个体的个体。例如,入针点不同于所有原有个体的新的个体。A new individual refers to an individual whose at least one parameter is different from any of the original individuals in the individual set. For example, a new individual whose needle entry point is different from all the original individuals.
在一些实施例中,新的个体的数量可以与原个体集合中的个体数量相同,也可以与原个体集合中的个体数量不同。In some embodiments, the number of new individuals may be the same as the number of individuals in the original individual set, or may be different from the number of individuals in the original individual set.
在一些实施例中,个体生成器可以采用与上述步骤1110中所描述的生成个体集合中的个体的方式生成新的个体,在此不再赘述。在一些实施例中,个体生成器还可以通过对集合中的个体的至少一个参数(例如,入针点、靶点、停留点数量、停留点位置、消融球参数等)进行变化生成新的个体。例如,个体生成器可以将至少一个个体的消融球参数缩小20%,即可生成至少一个新的个体。In some embodiments, the individual generator can generate new individuals in the same manner as generating individuals in the individual set described in step 1110 above, which will not be described again here. In some embodiments, the individual generator can also generate a new individual by changing at least one parameter of the individuals in the collection (eg, needle entry point, target point, number of stay points, stay point locations, ablation sphere parameters, etc.) . For example, the individual generator can reduce the ablation sphere parameters of at least one individual by 20% to generate at least one new individual.
在一些实施例中,个体生成器还可以将个体集合中的原有的穿刺路径数量相同的个体进行配对,并将配对的个体通过交叉操作等方式生成新的个体,其中,交叉操作可以包括单点交叉、多点交叉、均匀交叉、多项式交叉等中的至少一种。In some embodiments, the individual generator can also pair individuals with the same number of original puncture paths in the individual set, and use the paired individuals to generate new individuals through crossover operations, etc., where the crossover operation can include a single At least one of point crossover, multi-point crossover, uniform crossover, polynomial crossover, etc.
在一些实施例中,个体生成器可以以更高的概率生成第三个体,并将第三个体作为新的个体。其中,第三个体为与当前个体集合中所占比例最高的维度的同维度个体。In some embodiments, the individual generator can generate a third individual with a higher probability and use the third individual as a new individual. Among them, the third individual is an individual of the same dimension that has the highest proportion in the current individual set.
第三个体是指与当前个体集合中所占比例最高的维度,具有相同纬度的个体。例如,当前个体集合中某维度的个体所占比例为60%,其他维度的个体均低于60%,则第三个体的维度与上述维度相同。The third individual refers to the individual with the same latitude as the dimension with the highest proportion in the current individual set. For example, if the proportion of individuals of a certain dimension in the current individual set is 60%, and the individuals of other dimensions are less than 60%, then the dimensions of the third individual are the same as the above dimensions.
维度是指个体对应的规划参数中的某些参数的数量。例如,个体的规划参数中穿刺路径的数量、每条穿刺路径上的停留点数量等。Dimension refers to the number of certain parameters in the planning parameters corresponding to the individual. For example, the number of puncture paths, the number of stopping points on each puncture path, etc. in the individual planning parameters.
同维度是指个体的维度完全相同。例如,个体A的穿刺路径数量为2,每条穿刺路径上的停留点数量为3个,个体B的穿刺路径数量也为2,每条穿刺路径上的停留点数量也为3个,则个体A和个体B的维度相同。The same dimension means that the dimensions of individuals are exactly the same. For example, the number of puncture paths for individual A is 2, and the number of stay points on each puncture path is 3. The number of puncture paths for individual B is also 2, and the number of stay points on each puncture path is also 3. Then the individual A and individual B have the same dimensions.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,个体生成器以更高的概率生成第三个体,可以使个体集合中的个体的维度趋于稳定,提高迭代更新的效率,同时可以促进个体生成器以更高的概率基于当前个体集合生成新的个体。In some embodiments of this specification, the individual generator generates the third individual with a higher probability, which can stabilize the dimensions of the individuals in the individual set, improve the efficiency of iterative updates, and at the same time promote the individual generator to generate a higher probability. The probability of generating a new individual based on the current set of individuals.
在一些实施例中,响应于满足预设条件,个体生成器还可以以更高的概率基于当前个体集合生成新的个体。In some embodiments, in response to satisfying the preset conditions, the individual generator may also generate new individuals based on the current individual set with a higher probability.
预设条件是指个体集合需要满足的要求。例如,预设条件可以是个体集合迭代更新的次数大于迭代次数阈值(如500次等)。再例如,预设条件还可以是个体集合中某个维度的个体数量占比高于比例阈值(如80%)等。Preset conditions refer to the requirements that a collection of individuals needs to meet. For example, the preset condition may be that the number of iterative updates of the individual collection is greater than the iteration number threshold (such as 500 times, etc.). For another example, the preset condition may also be that the proportion of individuals in a certain dimension in the individual collection is higher than a proportion threshold (such as 80%).
在一些实施例中,响应于满足预设条件,个体生成器可以基于当前的至少一个个体通过一定的演化方式生成新的个体。例如,通过遗传变异、粒子群等演化方式的生成新的个体,而非随机生成新的个体。当个体集合满足预设条件时,个体集合中的个体的维度趋于相同,此时个体集合中占比最大的维度对应的个体有更大的概率为更优的个体。个体生成器可以以更高的概率基于该维度的个体进行演化生成新的个体。In some embodiments, in response to satisfying the preset conditions, the individual generator can generate a new individual based on at least one current individual through a certain evolutionary method. For example, new individuals are generated through evolutionary methods such as genetic mutation and particle swarm, rather than randomly generating new individuals. When the individual set meets the preset conditions, the dimensions of the individuals in the individual set tend to be the same. At this time, the individual corresponding to the dimension with the largest proportion in the individual set has a greater probability of being a better individual. The individual generator can evolve to generate new individuals based on individuals of this dimension with a higher probability.
在一些实施例中,个体生成器可以通过多种方法以更高的概率基于当前个体生成新的个体。例如,个体生成器可以将占比最高的维度对应的个体进行配对,然后让配对的个体的至少一个参数(如入针点、消融球参数等)进行交换,形成两个新的个体。再例如,个体生成器还可以让至少一个参数交换后生成的新的个体按照一定的概率对其至少一个参数(如停留点数量、停留点位置等)进行随机变化,生成新的个体。还例如,个体生成器可以直接将占比最高的维度对应的个体的至少一个参数(如停留点数量、停留点位置等)进行随机变化,生成新的个体。In some embodiments, the individual generator can generate new individuals based on current individuals with a higher probability through various methods. For example, the individual generator can pair individuals corresponding to the highest proportion of dimensions, and then exchange at least one parameter (such as needle entry point, ablation sphere parameters, etc.) of the paired individuals to form two new individuals. For another example, the individual generator can also allow the new individual generated after at least one parameter exchange to randomly change at least one of its parameters (such as the number of stay points, the location of the stay points, etc.) according to a certain probability to generate a new individual. For another example, the individual generator can directly randomly change at least one parameter of the individual corresponding to the dimension with the highest proportion (such as the number of stay points, the location of the stay points, etc.) to generate a new individual.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过个体生成器以更高的概率基于当前个体生成新的个体,可以使生成的新个体保留一些经过多次迭代更新后仍然存留下来的比较可靠的参数,限定迭代更新时参数的变化范围,使个体集合在迭代更新使质量保持相对稳定,更快地得到优质个体。In some embodiments of this specification, the individual generator generates a new individual based on the current individual with a higher probability, so that the generated new individual can retain some relatively reliable parameters that still survive after multiple iterative updates, defining The variation range of parameters during iterative update keeps the quality of the individual collection relatively stable during iterative update and obtains high-quality individuals faster.
在一些实施例中,个体生成器可以基于一定的规则将新的个体加入个体集合。例如,个体生成器可以将生成的所有新的个体加入个体集合。再例如,个体生成器还可以随机选择与当前个体集合中个体数量相同数量的新的个体加入个体集合。In some embodiments, the individual generator can add new individuals to the individual set based on certain rules. For example, an individual generator can add all new individuals generated to the individual collection. For another example, the individual generator can also randomly select new individuals with the same number as the number of individuals in the current individual set to join the individual set.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于个体生成器将第一约束判定值大于判定值阈值(例如,-1,-2,-3等)的个体加入个体集合。其中,判定值阈值可以人为设置。更多关于第一约束判定值的内容参见步骤1140及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may add individuals whose first constraint determination value is greater than the determination value threshold (eg, -1, -2, -3, etc.) to the individual set based on the individual generator. Among them, the judgment value threshold can be set manually. For more information about the first constraint determination value, please refer to step 1140 and its related description.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于个体筛选器,对个体集合中的个体进行筛选,以更新个体集合。其中,筛选可以包括对个体集合中的个体进行步骤1130-步骤1140的选择操作。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may filter individuals in the individual set based on the individual filter to update the individual set. The screening may include performing the selection operations of steps 1130 to 1140 on the individuals in the individual collection.
步骤1130,计算个体集合中的每个个体的第一评估值和第一约束判定值。 Step 1130: Calculate the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value of each individual in the individual set.
第一约束判定值是指可以体现个体对约束条件的符合程度的数值或字母等。例如,第一约束判定值可以用1-10之间的数值,或字母a-f,或星级来表示,值越大、字典排序越大或星级越高符合程度越高。The first constraint judgment value refers to a numerical value or letter that can reflect the degree of compliance of an individual with the constraint conditions. For example, the first constraint determination value can be represented by a numerical value between 1-10, or letters a-f, or a star rating. The larger the value, the greater the dictionary sorting, or the higher the star rating, the higher the degree of compliance.
在一些实施例中,第一约束判定值可以基于至少一个约束条件的判定值确定。其中,至少一个约束条件可以包括器械长度是否满足要求。In some embodiments, the first constraint decision value may be determined based on the decision value of at least one constraint condition. Among them, at least one constraint may include whether the instrument length meets the requirements.
约束条件是指对规划参数的选择产生限制的条件。例如,介入针的长度会限制穿刺路径的长度进而限制入针点和靶点的位置。Constraints refer to conditions that restrict the selection of planning parameters. For example, the length of the interventional needle will limit the length of the puncture path and thus the location of the needle entry point and target point.
在一些实施例中,约束条件可以包括器械长度是否满足要求、穿刺不贯穿风险结构、消融场范围完全覆盖病灶、消融电极距离合理性和穿刺路径之间角度安全的合理性等。In some embodiments, the constraints may include whether the instrument length meets the requirements, the puncture does not penetrate the risk structure, the ablation field completely covers the lesion, the ablation electrode distance is reasonable and the angle between the puncture paths is reasonable, etc.
约束条件的判定值是指能够反映约束条件是否被满足的数值或字母等。例如,某条约束条件被满足时,判定值赋值为0,当该约束条件不被满足时,判定值赋值为-1。The judgment value of a constraint condition refers to a numerical value or letter that can reflect whether the constraint condition is satisfied. For example, when a certain constraint is satisfied, the judgment value is assigned a value of 0, and when the constraint is not satisfied, the judgment value is assigned a value of -1.
器械长度是否满足要求约束条件是指器械长度对穿刺路径长度的限制。穿刺路径的长度不能超过器械长度,否则介入针可能无法到达靶点和/或停留点位置,导致无法对病灶区域进行消融治疗。例如,当器械长度为80mm时,穿刺路径的长度不能超过80mm,否则器械长度的约束条件无法被满足。在一些实施例中,器械长度可以为介入针的长度。Whether the instrument length meets the required constraints refers to the limitation of the instrument length on the length of the puncture path. The length of the puncture path cannot exceed the length of the instrument, otherwise the interventional needle may not be able to reach the target point and/or the stop point, resulting in the inability to perform ablation treatment on the lesion area. For example, when the instrument length is 80mm, the length of the puncture path cannot exceed 80mm, otherwise the instrument length constraint cannot be met. In some embodiments, the instrument length may be the length of the interventional needle.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于个体生成器计算个体中每条穿刺路径的入针点Pin和靶点Pjn组成的路径Pinjn的长度,并将Pinjn的长度与器械长度进行对比,以判断器械长度约束条件是否被满足。当器械长度约束条件被满足时,该约束条件的判定值为0,当器械长度约束条件不被满足时,判定值为-1。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can calculate the length of the path P injn composed of the needle entry point P in and the target point P jn of each puncture path in the individual based on the individual generator, and compare the length of P injn with the instrument length. Compare to determine whether the instrument length constraint is met. When the instrument length constraint is satisfied, the judgment value of the constraint is 0; when the instrument length constraint is not satisfied, the judgment value is -1.
穿刺不贯穿风险结构的约束条件是指危险组织对穿刺路径的限制。危险组织可以包括较粗的血管、重要的器官等。介入针在按照穿刺路径进入人体组织并对病灶进行消融治疗时,会对除了病灶之外的健康组织造成损伤,当损伤到危险组织时,可能威胁到患者生命。The constraint that the puncture does not penetrate the risk structure refers to the restriction of the puncture path by the dangerous tissue. Dangerous tissues can include thicker blood vessels, vital organs, etc. When an interventional needle enters human tissue according to the puncture path and performs ablation treatment on the lesion, it will cause damage to healthy tissues other than the lesion. When dangerous tissue is damaged, it may threaten the patient's life.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以结构特征,确定个体的至少一条穿刺路径是否穿刺不贯穿风险结构。关于结构特征的更多内容参见图4及其相关描述。当穿刺路径与三维医学影像中的危险组织不发生干涉时,该约束条件被满足,判定值为0,当穿刺路径至少与一个危险组织发生干涉时,该约束条件不被满足,判定值为-1。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may characterize the structure to determine whether at least one puncture path of the individual punctures but does not penetrate the risk structure. See Figure 4 and its associated description for more information on structural features. When the puncture path does not interfere with dangerous tissues in the three-dimensional medical image, the constraint is satisfied, and the judgment value is 0. When the puncture path interferes with at least one dangerous tissue, the constraint is not satisfied, and the judgment value is - 1.
消融区域完全覆盖病灶的约束条件是对消融场范围的限制条件。当消融场范围完全覆盖病灶区域时,病灶可被完全消融治疗。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将个体的穿刺路径、停留点位置、消融球参数与三维医学影像结合,判断个体对应的所有消融场范围是否完全包裹病灶区域。当消融场范围完全包裹病灶区域时,消融区域完全覆盖病灶的约束条件被满足。对应的判定值为0,否则,对应的判定值为-1。The constraint that the ablation area completely covers the lesion is the restriction on the scope of the ablation field. When the ablation field completely covers the lesion area, the lesion can be completely ablated and treated. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can combine the individual's puncture path, stop point location, and ablation sphere parameters with three-dimensional medical images to determine whether all ablation field ranges corresponding to the individual completely encompass the lesion area. When the ablation field range completely surrounds the lesion area, the constraint that the ablation area completely covers the lesion is satisfied. The corresponding judgment value is 0, otherwise, the corresponding judgment value is -1.
消融电极距离合理性的约束条件是对多穿刺路径之间消融电极距离的限制条件。当多个介入针按照穿刺路径同时进行消融治疗时,若消融电极段部分的电极过近,则可能产生电弧,对患者安全造成威胁。The constraint on the rationality of the ablation electrode distance is the restriction on the ablation electrode distance between multiple puncture paths. When multiple interventional needles perform ablation treatment simultaneously along the puncture path, if the electrodes in the ablation electrode segment are too close, arcs may occur, posing a threat to patient safety.
在一些实施例中,若穿刺路径数量大于等于2,则处理设备120可以计算个体中不同穿刺路径的消融电极段之间的最短距离,当最短距离大于距离阈值时,穿刺路径消融电极距离合理性的约束条件被满足,判定值赋值为0,反之,穿刺路径消融电极距离合理性的约束条件不被满足,判定值赋值为-1。其中,最短距离是指不同穿刺路径对应的至少两个消融电极段之间的最短距离,距离阈值可以根据介入设备的功率参数和使用规范等设置。In some embodiments, if the number of puncture paths is greater than or equal to 2, the processing device 120 can calculate the shortest distance between the ablation electrode segments of different puncture paths in the individual. When the shortest distance is greater than the distance threshold, the puncture path ablation electrode distance is reasonable. The constraint condition is satisfied, and the judgment value is assigned a value of 0. On the contrary, the constraint condition of the reasonable distance of the ablation electrode on the puncture path is not satisfied, and the judgment value is assigned a value of -1. The shortest distance refers to the shortest distance between at least two ablation electrode segments corresponding to different puncture paths. The distance threshold can be set according to the power parameters and usage specifications of the interventional device.
穿刺路径之间角度安全的合理性的约束条件是指多条穿刺路径下穿刺路径的夹角的限制条件。当多个介入针按照穿刺路径同时进行消融治疗时,若消融电极段的夹角过大,则容易产生电弧,对患者安全造成威胁。The constraints on the rationality of the safety of the angles between puncture paths refer to the constraints on the angles of the puncture paths under multiple puncture paths. When multiple interventional needles perform ablation treatment simultaneously along the puncture path, if the angle between the ablation electrode segments is too large, arcs may easily occur, posing a threat to patient safety.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以对个体中不同穿刺路径进行投影到同一个平面并计算投影的夹角,当夹角小于夹角阈值时,穿刺路径之间角度安全的合理性的约束条件被满足,对应的判定值赋值为0,否则,判定值赋值为-1。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can project different puncture paths in an individual onto the same plane and calculate the included angle of the projection. When the included angle is less than the included angle threshold, the constraints on the rationality of the angle between the puncture paths are safe. is satisfied, the corresponding judgment value is assigned to 0, otherwise, the judgment value is assigned to -1.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以计算不同约束条件的判定值的加和,将约束条件判定值的加和作为第一约束判定值。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may calculate the sum of the determination values of different constraint conditions, and use the sum of the determination values of the constraint conditions as the first constraint determination value.
第一评估值是指可以反映个体的优劣程度的数值。The first evaluation value refers to a numerical value that can reflect the quality of an individual.
在一些实施例中,第一评估值可以包括穿刺路径数量、消融适形率。In some embodiments, the first evaluation value may include the number of puncture paths and the ablation conformation rate.
由于病灶大小、位置等因素,一条穿刺路径可能无法实现完全消融,需考虑多针联合消融的方式进行。穿刺路径数量是指个体中包含的介入针路径条数。介入针进入人体会或多或少的对人体产生损伤,个体的穿刺路径的数量越少,对患者身体的损伤越小,可以用于评估个体的优劣。例如,个体A的穿刺路径数量为2,个体B的穿刺路径数量为3,则个体A会由于穿刺路径数量更少而对患者身体产生更小的损伤。Due to factors such as the size and location of the lesion, one puncture path may not be able to achieve complete ablation, and multiple combined needle ablation methods need to be considered. The number of puncture paths refers to the number of interventional needle paths included in an individual. When an interventional needle enters the human body, it will cause more or less damage to the human body. The smaller the number of individual puncture paths, the smaller the damage to the patient's body, which can be used to evaluate the individual's pros and cons. For example, if the number of puncture paths for individual A is 2 and the number of puncture paths for individual B is 3, then individual A will cause less damage to the patient's body due to the smaller number of puncture paths.
消融适形率是指完全消融条件下,病灶体积占规划消融总体积的百分比。例如,完全消融条件下, 病灶体积为1.5立方厘米,规划消融总体积为2立方厘米,则消融适形率为75%。其中,规划消融总体积为所有停留点位置对应的规划消融体积取并集后的体积。例如,如图10所示,停留点位置T1p1对应的规划消融体积为2立方厘米,停留点位置T2p1对应的规划消融体积为2.5立方厘米,停留点位置T1p2对应的规划消融体积为2立方厘米。停留点位置T1p1和T2p1对应的规划消融体积有1立方厘米为重叠部分(即斜线部位),停留点位置T1p2对应的规划消融体积无重叠,则规划消融总体积为2+2.5-1+2=5.5立方厘米。消融适形率越大,则说明消融治疗手术对周边组织损伤越小,就越符合治疗的期望。The ablation conformity rate refers to the percentage of the lesion volume to the total planned ablation volume under complete ablation conditions. For example, under complete ablation conditions, The lesion volume is 1.5 cubic centimeters and the total planned ablation volume is 2 cubic centimeters, so the ablation conformity rate is 75%. Among them, the total planned ablation volume is the volume of the union of the planned ablation volumes corresponding to all stay point positions. For example, as shown in Figure 10, the planned ablation volume corresponding to the stay point position T 1p1 is 2 cubic centimeters, the planned ablation volume corresponding to the stay point position T 2p1 is 2.5 cubic centimeters, and the planned ablation volume corresponding to the stay point position T 1p2 is 2 cubic centimeters. The planned ablation volumes corresponding to the stay point positions T 1p1 and T 2p1 have an overlap of 1 cubic centimeter (i.e., the diagonal line part). The planned ablation volumes corresponding to the stay point position T 1p2 have no overlap, so the total planned ablation volume is 2+2.5- 1+2=5.5 cubic centimeters. The greater the ablation conformity rate, the smaller the damage to surrounding tissue caused by the ablation treatment surgery, and the more it meets the treatment expectations.
步骤1140,基于第一评估值和第一约束判定值选择个体,确定更新后的个体集合。Step 1140: Select individuals based on the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value, and determine an updated individual set.
在一些实施例中,当新的个体的数量与原个体集合中的个体数量相同时,个体筛选器可以将加入新的个体的个体集合中的个体随机抽取两个,作为两个匹配的个体,并基于第一评估值和第一约束判定值选择其中的一个个体,接着将剩下的个体集合中的个体随机抽取两个并选择其中一个,依此类推,将选择的所有个体汇集起来作为更新后的个体集合。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以计算个体集合中的个体的第一评估值和第一约束判定值,并基于第一评估值和第一约束判定值选择个体,确定更新后的个体集合。更多关于个体筛选器基于第一评估值和第一约束判定值选择个体的内容参见图12及其相关描述。In some embodiments, when the number of new individuals is the same as the number of individuals in the original individual set, the individual filter can randomly select two individuals from the individual set added to the new individual as two matching individuals, And select one of the individuals based on the first evaluation value and the first constraint judgment value, then randomly select two individuals from the remaining individual set and select one of them, and so on, all the selected individuals are collected as an update The subsequent collection of individuals. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may calculate the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value of the individuals in the individual set, select the individual based on the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value, and determine the updated individual set. For more information about the individual filter selecting individuals based on the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value, see Figure 12 and its related description.
步骤1150,判断第一迭代完成条件是否被满足。响应于第一迭代完成条件被满足,处理设备可以执行步骤1160;响应于第一迭代完成条件未被满足,处理设备120可以执行步骤1120。Step 1150: Determine whether the first iteration completion condition is met. In response to the first iteration completion condition being satisfied, the processing device may perform step 1160; in response to the first iteration completion condition being not satisfied, the processing device 120 may perform step 1120.
第一迭代完成条件是指个体集合停止迭代更新需要满足的条件。例如,迭代更新的次数达到最大次数阈值(如500次、1200次、2000次等)。再例如,个体集合中某维度的个体所占比例超过最大阈值(例如80%、85%、90%等)。再例如,个体集合中占比最高维度的个体所占比例差值小于最小阈值(如1%、2%、3%等)。The first iteration completion condition refers to the condition that needs to be met for the individual collection to stop iterative update. For example, the number of iterative updates reaches the maximum number threshold (such as 500 times, 1200 times, 2000 times, etc.). For another example, the proportion of individuals of a certain dimension in the individual set exceeds the maximum threshold (such as 80%, 85%, 90%, etc.). For another example, the proportion difference of the individuals with the highest proportion in the individual set is less than the minimum threshold (such as 1%, 2%, 3%, etc.).
在一些实施例中,处理设备120在对个体集合迭代更新的同时,每迭代更新一次就进行计数,如第一次更新个体集合完成,计数1,第二次更新个体集合完成,计数2,当计数超过最大次数阈值时,判定第一迭代完成条件被满足。在一些实施例中,每次迭代更新完成后,处理设备120可以计算当前个体集合中各维度的个体所占比例,当某维度个体所占比例超过最大阈值时,判定第一迭代完成条件被满足。在一些实施例中,每次迭代更新完成后,处理设备120可以计算占比最高的维度的个体占比与上一次迭代更新完成时的占比差值,当占比差值小于最小阈值时,判定第一迭代完成条件被满足。In some embodiments, while the processing device 120 iteratively updates the individual set, it counts each iterative update. For example, when the first update of the individual set is completed, the count is 1; when the second update of the individual set is completed, the count is 2. When the count exceeds the maximum times threshold, it is determined that the first iteration completion condition is met. In some embodiments, after each iteration update is completed, the processing device 120 can calculate the proportion of individuals in each dimension in the current individual set. When the proportion of individuals in a certain dimension exceeds the maximum threshold, it is determined that the first iteration completion condition is met. . In some embodiments, after each iterative update is completed, the processing device 120 can calculate the difference between the individual proportion of the dimension with the highest proportion and the proportion when the last iterative update is completed. When the proportion difference is less than the minimum threshold, It is determined that the first iteration completion condition is met.
在一些实施例中,响应于第一迭代完成条件被满足,处理设备120可以通过执行步骤1160,以确定目标参数。在一些实施例中,响应于第一迭代完成条件不被满足,处理设备120可以继续执行步骤1120。In some embodiments, in response to the first iteration completion condition being satisfied, the processing device 120 may determine the target parameter by performing step 1160 . In some embodiments, in response to the first iteration completion condition being not satisfied, processing device 120 may continue to step 1120 .
步骤1160,基于更新后的个体集合,确定至少一组中间参数。Step 1160: Determine at least one set of intermediate parameters based on the updated individual set.
中间参数是指供选择的较为优良的一组规划参数。The intermediate parameters refer to a better set of planning parameters for selection.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于更新后的个体集合确定帕累托前沿解,将帕累托前沿解作为至少一组中间参数。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine a Pareto front solution based on the updated set of individuals, using the Pareto front solution as at least one set of intermediate parameters.
帕累托前沿解是指不受其他个体完全支配的个体组成的集合。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以通过将个体集合中任一个体的第一评估值与其他个体的第一评估值进行比较,看是否存在某个其他个体的第一评估值中各个指标(例如,穿刺路径数量、消融适形率)均优于该任一个体,响应于不存在某个其他个体的第一评估值均优于该任一个体(即,该任一个体的穿刺路径数量、消融适形率中至少有一个优于个体集合中的其他个体),则判定该任一个体为帕累托前沿解中的一个解。例如,若个体A的穿刺路径数量为3,消融适形率为90%,且个体集合中其他个体中不存在穿刺路径数量小于3,且消融适形率高于90%的个体,则不存在某个其他个体的第一评估值均优于个体A,则判定个体A为帕累托前沿解中的一个解。The Pareto front solution refers to a set of individuals that are not completely dominated by other individuals. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may compare the first evaluation value of any individual in the individual set with the first evaluation values of other individuals to see whether there is any indicator in the first evaluation value of some other individual ( For example, the number of puncture paths, ablation conformity rate) are better than any one individual, and the first evaluation value in response to the absence of some other individual is better than any one individual (that is, the number of puncture paths for any one individual) , at least one of the ablation conformal rates is better than other individuals in the individual set), then any individual is determined to be one of the Pareto front solutions. For example, if the number of puncture paths for individual A is 3 and the ablation conformity rate is 90%, and there is no other individual in the individual set with a number of puncture paths less than 3 and an ablation conformity rate higher than 90%, then there is no The first evaluation value of some other individuals is better than that of individual A, then individual A is determined to be one of the Pareto front solutions.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,将帕累托前沿解中的多个个体作为中间参数以供选择,可以使用户根据自身手术习惯,选择最合适的目标参数,提高穿刺路径规划方案的泛用性。In some embodiments of this specification, multiple individuals in the Pareto front solution are used as intermediate parameters for selection, which allows users to select the most appropriate target parameters according to their own surgical habits and improves the universality of the puncture path planning scheme. sex.
步骤1170,基于至少一组中间参数,确定目标参数。Step 1170: Determine target parameters based on at least one set of intermediate parameters.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将至少一组中间参数中消融适形率最高的中间参数作为目标参数。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may use the intermediate parameter with the highest ablation conformation rate among at least one set of intermediate parameters as the target parameter.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将至少一组中间参数发送到医生所使用的用户终端供医生自主选择,并将医生自主选择的中间参数作为目标参数。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may send at least one set of intermediate parameters to the user terminal used by the doctor for the doctor to independently select, and use the intermediate parameters independently selected by the doctor as target parameters.
在一些实施例中,当处理设备120将至少一组中间参数发送给医生时,医生还可以选择自动推荐目标参数。当医生选择自动推荐目标参数时,处理设备120可以计算至少一组中间参数的损伤值F,将损伤值F最小的中间参数作为目标参数推荐给用户。其中,损伤值F可以用公式(8)计算:
F=a*n-b*η+c*L      (8)
In some embodiments, when the processing device 120 sends at least one set of intermediate parameters to the doctor, the doctor may also choose to automatically recommend the target parameters. When the doctor chooses to automatically recommend target parameters, the processing device 120 can calculate the damage value F of at least one set of intermediate parameters, and recommend the intermediate parameter with the smallest damage value F to the user as the target parameter. Among them, the damage value F can be calculated using formula (8):
F=a*nb*η+c*L (8)
其中,n为穿刺路径数量,η为消融适形率,L为同一组中间参数中所有穿刺路径的总长度;a为一个较大的常数,用于使损伤值尽量趋近于穿刺路径的数量,穿刺路径的数量越少,对健康组织的损伤越小,损伤值F就越小,越容易被作为目标参数;b为可以平衡穿刺路径数量和消融适形率的参数,当穿刺 路径的数量相同,消融适形率越小,损伤值F越大,对健康组织的损伤越大,不会被作为目标参数;系数c用于当穿刺路径的数量相同,消融适形率大小相近条件下的优选控制参数,优选穿刺路径总和较短的路径,减少患者的损伤和术中风险。通过自动推荐目标参数,直接获得最优的中间参数,提高了医生的手术效率。Among them, n is the number of puncture paths, eta is the ablation conformation rate, L is the total length of all puncture paths in the same set of intermediate parameters; a is a larger constant, used to make the damage value as close as possible to the number of puncture paths. , the smaller the number of puncture paths, the smaller the damage to healthy tissue, the smaller the damage value F, and the easier it is to be used as a target parameter; b is a parameter that can balance the number of puncture paths and the ablation conformity rate. When puncture When the number of paths is the same, the smaller the ablation conformation rate, the greater the damage value F, and the greater the damage to healthy tissue, which will not be used as a target parameter; the coefficient c is used when the number of puncture paths is the same and the ablation conformation rate is similar. Optimize the control parameters under the conditions, and optimize the path with a shorter total puncture path to reduce patient injury and intraoperative risks. By automatically recommending target parameters, the optimal intermediate parameters are directly obtained, which improves the doctor's surgical efficiency.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过个体生成器生成个体集合和新的个体,以及将帕累托前沿解作为至少一组中间参数,可以扩大搜索最优个体的范围,筛选出全局中的较优解,进而避免最终确认的目标参数仅仅是局部中的较优参数。In some embodiments of this specification, the individual generator generates individual sets and new individuals, and the Pareto front solution is used as at least one set of intermediate parameters, which can expand the scope of searching for optimal individuals and screen out relatively small global ones. Optimal solution, thereby avoiding the final confirmed target parameters are only local optimal parameters.
应当注意的是,上述有关流程1100的描述仅仅是为了示例和说明,而不限定本说明书的适用范围。对于本领域技术人员来说,在本说明书的指导下可以对流程1100进行各种修正和改变。然而,这些修正和改变仍在本说明书的范围之内。例如,进行迭代更新时,可以选择一轮迭代更新,即将原来的每次生成10个新个体对个体集合进行迭代更新,共迭代更新10次,合并为直接一次生成100个,个体筛选器直接从100个个体中确定至少一组中间参数,实现一次完成迭代更新。It should be noted that the above description of process 1100 is only for example and explanation, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification. For those skilled in the art, various modifications and changes can be made to the process 1100 under the guidance of this description. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification. For example, when performing iterative update, you can choose one round of iterative update, that is, iteratively update the individual collection by generating 10 new individuals each time, for a total of 10 iterative updates, and merge them to directly generate 100 at a time. The individual filter is directly generated from Determine at least one set of intermediate parameters among 100 individuals to achieve one-time iterative update.
图12是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的个体筛选器筛选过程的示例性流程图。如图12所示,流程1200包括下述步骤。在一些实施例中,图12所示的流程1200的一个或一个以上操作可以在图1所示的介入规划系统的应用场景100中实现。例如,图12所示的流程1200可以以指令的形式存储在存储设备中,并由处理设备120调用和/或执行。Figure 12 is an exemplary flow diagram of an individual filter screening process according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in Figure 12, process 1200 includes the following steps. In some embodiments, one or more operations of the process 1200 shown in FIG. 12 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 . For example, the process 1200 shown in FIG. 12 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
步骤1210,计算两个匹配的个体A、B的第一评估值和第一约束判定值WA,WBStep 1210: Calculate the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value WA, WB of the two matching individuals A and B.
在一些实施例中,当个体生成器计算了至少一个个体中每一个的个体属性时,个体筛选器可以直接调取个体生成器计算的个体属性中的两个匹配的个体A、B的第一评估值中的各个指标(例如,穿刺路径数量、消融适形率)和个体A的第一约束判定值WA、个体B的第一约束判定值WB即可。在一些实施例中,当个体生成器未计算至少一个个体中每一个的个体属性时,个体筛选器可以计算两个匹配的个体A、B的第一评估值中的各个指标和个体A的第一约束判定值WA、个体B的第一约束判定值WBIn some embodiments, when the individual generator calculates the individual attributes of each of at least one individual, the individual filter can directly call the first of the two matching individuals A and B in the individual attributes calculated by the individual generator. Each index in the evaluation value (for example, the number of puncture paths, ablation conformity rate) and the first constraint determination value W A of individual A and the first constraint determination value WB of individual B are sufficient. In some embodiments, when the individual generator does not calculate the individual attributes of each of the at least one individual, the individual filter may calculate each indicator in the first evaluation value of the two matching individuals A and B and the individual A's first evaluation value. A constraint determination value W A and the first constraint determination value WB of individual B.
步骤1220,判断是否WA<WBStep 1220, determine whether W A < WB .
在一些实施例中,响应于WA<WB,处理设备120可以执行步骤1260,即选择个体B。在一些实施例中,响应于WA≥WB,处理设备120可以继续执行步骤1230。In some embodiments, in response to WA < WB , processing device 120 may perform step 1260 of selecting individual B. In some embodiments, in response to W AWB , processing device 120 may proceed to step 1230 .
步骤1230,判断是否WA=WBStep 1230, determine whether WA = WB .
在一些实施例中,响应于WA=WB,处理设备120可以继续执行步骤1240。在一些实施例中,响应于WA>WB,处理设备120可以执行步骤1280,即选择个体A。In some embodiments, in response to W A = WB , processing device 120 may proceed to step 1240 . In some embodiments, in response to WA>WB, processing device 120 may perform step 1280 of selecting individual A.
步骤1240,判断个体A是否完全支配个体B。Step 1240, determine whether individual A completely dominates individual B.
在一些实施例中,响应于个体A完全支配个体B,处理设备120可以执行步骤1280,即选择个体A。在一些实施例中,响应于个体A不完全支配个体B,处理设备120可以继续执行步骤1250。In some embodiments, in response to individual A completely dominating individual B, processing device 120 may perform step 1280 of selecting individual A. In some embodiments, in response to individual A not fully dominating individual B, processing device 120 may proceed to step 1250.
完全支配是指个体的第一评估值均优于另一个个体。例如,当个体A的穿刺路径数量为2,消融适形率为95%,个体B的穿刺路径数量为3,消融适形率为85%时,个体A的穿刺路径数量和消融适形率均优于个体B,则称个体A完全支配个体B。Complete dominance means that the first evaluation value of an individual is better than that of another individual. For example, when the number of puncture paths for individual A is 2 and the ablation conformity rate is 95%, and the number of puncture paths for individual B is 3 and the ablation conformity rate is 85%, the number of puncture paths and the ablation conformity rate for individual A are both equal. is better than individual B, then individual A is said to completely dominate individual B.
步骤1250,判断个体B是否完全支配个体A。Step 1250, determine whether individual B completely dominates individual A.
在一些实施例中,响应于个体B不完全支配个体A,处理设备120可以执行步骤1270,即随机选择。在一些实施例中,响应于个体B完全支配个体A,处理设备120可以执行步骤1260,即选择个体B。In some embodiments, in response to individual B not completely dominating individual A, processing device 120 may perform step 1270 of randomly selecting. In some embodiments, in response to individual B completely dominating individual A, processing device 120 may perform step 1260 of selecting individual B.
步骤1260,选择个体B。Step 1260, select individual B.
步骤1270,随机选择。Step 1270, random selection.
在一些实施例中,步骤1250判断后,响应于个体B不完全支配个体A,即两个匹配的个体互不完全支配时(即,个体A不完全支配个体B,个体B也不完全支配个体A),处理设备120可以基于两个匹配的个体在个体集合中各自完全支配的个体数量确定更新后的个体集合。In some embodiments, after step 1250 determines, in response to individual B not completely dominating individual A, that is, when two matching individuals do not completely dominate each other (that is, individual A does not completely dominate individual B, and individual B does not completely dominate individual A), the processing device 120 may determine the updated individual set based on the number of individuals that the two matching individuals each fully dominate in the individual set.
匹配的个体是指在加入新的个体的个体集合中随机抽取的两个个体。更多关于两两匹配的内容参见步骤1140及其相关描述。Matching individuals refer to two individuals randomly selected from the individual set to which the new individual is added. For more information about pairwise matching, please refer to step 1140 and its related description.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以通过判断两个匹配的个体的第一评估值与个体集合中其他个体之间的关系,判断两个匹配的个体各自完全支配的个体的数量,并将各自完全支配的个体的数量占两个匹配的个体所支配个体的总数量的比例作为两个匹配的个体被保留的概率对个体集合进行更新。例如,个体C和个体D为两个匹配的个体,需要选择其中一个作为更新后的个体集合中的个体,假设个体C在当前个体集合中完全支配了10个个体,个体D在当前个体集合中完全支配了5个个体,则个体C被保留下来的概率为10/15=2/3,于是个体D被保留的概率为1/3。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the number of individuals that are completely dominated by each of the two matching individuals by determining the relationship between the first evaluation values of the two matching individuals and other individuals in the individual set, and assign the respective The set of individuals is updated as the proportion of the number of fully dominated individuals to the total number of individuals dominated by the two matched individuals as the probability that the two matched individuals are retained. For example, individual C and individual D are two matching individuals, and one of them needs to be selected as the individual in the updated individual set. Assume that individual C completely dominates 10 individuals in the current individual set, and individual D is in the current individual set. If 5 individuals are completely dominated, the probability of individual C being retained is 10/15=2/3, so the probability of individual D being retained is 1/3.
在本说明书中的一些实施例中,通过基于完全支配的个体数量确定更新后的个体集合,可以使更优的个体以更高的概率保留下来进行下一次迭代更新,确保了多轮迭代更新的进度和质量。 In some embodiments of this specification, by determining the updated individual set based on the number of fully dominated individuals, better individuals can be retained with a higher probability for the next iterative update, ensuring the success of multiple rounds of iterative updates. Progress and quality.
步骤1280,选择个体A。Step 1280, select individual A.
在本说明书中的一些实施例中,通过个体筛选器基于第一约束判定值和第一评估值对个体集合进行更新,可以筛选出效果更好、对患者损伤最低的个体进入下一轮迭代更新,促使迭代更新更快地得到最适合患者情况的目标参数,从而提高了医生的手术效率,减轻医生的工作难度。In some embodiments of this specification, by updating the individual set based on the first constraint determination value and the first evaluation value through the individual filter, individuals with better effects and the lowest damage to patients can be screened out to enter the next round of iterative updates. , prompting iterative updates to obtain the target parameters most suitable for the patient's condition faster, thereby improving the doctor's surgical efficiency and reducing the difficulty of the doctor's work.
应当注意的是,上述有关流程1200的描述仅仅是为了示例和说明,而不限定本说明书的适用范围。对于本领域技术人员来说,在本说明书的指导下可以对流程1200进行各种修正和改变。然而,这些修正和改变仍在本说明书的范围之内。It should be noted that the above description of process 1200 is only for example and illustration, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification. For those skilled in the art, various modifications and changes can be made to the process 1200 under the guidance of this description. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification.
在一些实施例中,步骤1220-步骤1230可以省略,即处理设备120可以仅基于两个匹配的个体A、B的第一评估值,判断个体A是否完全支配个体B。响应于个体A完全支配个体B,处理设备120可以执行步骤1280,即选择个体A;响应于个体B完全支配个体A,处理设备120可以执行步骤1260,即选择个体B;响应于个体A和个体B互不完全支配,处理设备120可以执行步骤1270,即执行随机选择。当仅基于两个匹配的个体A、B的第一评估值进行选择时,处理设备120可以在预处理阶段通过器械长度是否满足要求、穿刺不贯穿风险结构、消融场范围完全覆盖病灶、消融电极距离的合理性、穿刺路径之间角度安全的合理性等约束条件对规划参数的选择范围进行约束,以确保个体集合中的个体满足约束条件。In some embodiments, steps 1220 to 1230 may be omitted, that is, the processing device 120 may determine whether individual A completely dominates individual B based only on the first evaluation values of the two matching individuals A and B. In response to individual A completely dominating individual B, the processing device 120 may perform step 1280, that is, selecting individual A; in response to individual B completely dominating individual A, the processing device 120 may perform step 1260, that is, selecting individual B; in response to individual A and individual B are not completely dominated by each other, and the processing device 120 can perform step 1270, that is, perform random selection. When making a selection based only on the first evaluation values of the two matched individuals A and B, the processing device 120 can determine whether the length of the instrument meets the requirements, the puncture does not penetrate the risk structure, the ablation field range completely covers the lesion, and the ablation electrode is used in the pre-processing stage. Constraints such as the rationality of distance and the safety of angles between puncture paths restrict the selection range of planning parameters to ensure that individuals in the individual set satisfy the constraints.
图13是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的另一确定目标参数的示例性流程图。如图13所示,流程1300包括下述步骤。在一些实施例中,图13所示的流程1300的一个或一个以上操作可以在图1所示的介入规划系统的应用场景100中实现。例如,图13所示的流程1300可以以指令的形式存储在存储设备中,并由处理设备120调用和/或执行。Figure 13 is another exemplary flowchart for determining target parameters according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in Figure 13, process 1300 includes the following steps. In some embodiments, one or more operations of the process 1300 shown in FIG. 13 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 . For example, the process 1300 shown in FIG. 13 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
步骤1310,基于患者数据确定穿刺路径数量以及消融球参数范围。Step 1310: Determine the number of puncture paths and the parameter range of the ablation sphere based on the patient data.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于患者数据,确定病灶体积,并基于病灶体积,确定穿刺路径数量。其中,穿刺路径数量与所述入针点数量相同。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the lesion volume based on the patient data and determine the number of puncture paths based on the lesion volume. The number of puncture paths is the same as the number of needle insertion points.
病灶体积是指病灶区域的体积。例如,患者肿瘤的体积。Lesion volume refers to the volume of the lesion area. For example, the volume of a patient's tumor.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于患者数据识别病灶区域的体素,并基于病灶区域的体素计算病灶体积。例如,处理设备120可以基于患者数据的三维医学影像中,靶区病灶区域的体素点数量,结合体素当量值确定病灶区域体积。其中,体素当量值为一个体素点对应的实际物理尺寸。关于三维重建的更多内容参见图5及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may identify voxels of the lesion area based on the patient data and calculate the lesion volume based on the voxels of the lesion area. For example, the processing device 120 may determine the volume of the lesion area based on the number of voxel points in the target lesion area in the three-dimensional medical image of the patient data and the voxel equivalent value. Among them, the voxel equivalent value is the actual physical size corresponding to a voxel point. For more information on three-dimensional reconstruction, see Figure 5 and its related description.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于病灶体积与体积阈值的大小关系,确定穿刺路径数量,其中,体积阈值为预设的病灶体积大小。体积阈值可以基于人工经验或者历史数据确定,例如,体积阈值可以包括历史数据中单针消融所能消融的最大病灶体积等。在一些实施例中,体积阈值可以有多个,不同的体积阈值对应不同的穿刺路径数量。示例性的,体积阈值可以为V1、V2、V3、……,当病灶体积V满足0<V<V1时,穿刺路径数量为1;当病灶体积V满足V1≤V<V2时,穿刺路径数量为2;当病灶体积V满足V2≤V<V3时,穿刺路径数量为3。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the number of puncture paths based on the relationship between the lesion volume and the volume threshold, where the volume threshold is a preset lesion volume. The volume threshold can be determined based on manual experience or historical data. For example, the volume threshold can include the maximum lesion volume that can be ablated by a single needle ablation in historical data, etc. In some embodiments, there may be multiple volume thresholds, and different volume thresholds correspond to different numbers of puncture paths. For example, the volume thresholds can be V 1 , V 2 , V 3 ,..., when the lesion volume V satisfies 0<V<V 1 , the number of puncture paths is 1; when the lesion volume V satisfies V 1 ≤V<V When 2 , the number of puncture paths is 2; when the lesion volume V satisfies V 2 ≤ V < V 3 , the number of puncture paths is 3.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过充分考虑病灶的体积确定优选的穿刺路径数量,可以减少确定目标参数的时间,提高穿刺路径规划的效率。In some embodiments of this specification, by fully considering the volume of the lesion to determine the preferred number of puncture paths, the time for determining target parameters can be reduced and the efficiency of puncture path planning can be improved.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于患者数据,确定病灶掩膜,并基于病灶掩膜,确定病灶长轴与病灶短轴,进而基于病灶长轴与病灶短轴,确定消融球参数范围。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can determine the lesion mask based on the patient data, determine the long axis of the lesion and the short axis of the lesion based on the lesion mask, and then determine the ablation sphere parameter range based on the long axis of the lesion and the short axis of the lesion.
病灶掩膜是指从患者数据中分割的病灶区域。例如,从患者数据中分割出的肿瘤区域。在一些实施例中,病灶掩膜可以是三维的。The lesion mask refers to the lesion area segmented from the patient data. For example, tumor regions segmented from patient data. In some embodiments, the lesion mask may be three-dimensional.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以从患者数据中分割出病灶区域,从而生成病灶掩膜。例如,处理设备120可以将患者数据中除病灶之外的区域的体素值都设为0,从而生成病灶掩膜。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can segment the lesion area from the patient data to generate a lesion mask. For example, the processing device 120 may set voxel values in areas other than lesions in the patient data to 0, thereby generating a lesion mask.
在一些实施例中,可以使用掩膜提取模型处理患者数据,以得到病灶掩膜。例如,可以将患者数据输入掩膜提取模型,由掩膜提取模型输出病灶掩膜。所述掩膜提取模型可以是图神经网络(Graph Neural Network,GNN)、卷积神经网络(Convolutional Neural Networks,CNN)或深度神经网络(Deep Neural Networks,DNN)等。可以利用历史数据中的患者数据作为训练数据训练掩膜提取模型,使得掩膜提取模型能够基于患者数据输出病灶掩膜。训练数据对应的标签可以由人工标注的病灶掩膜来确定。In some embodiments, patient data can be processed using a mask extraction model to obtain a lesion mask. For example, patient data can be input into a mask extraction model, and the mask extraction model outputs a lesion mask. The mask extraction model may be a graph neural network (Graph Neural Network, GNN), a convolutional neural network (Convolutional Neural Networks, CNN), or a deep neural network (Deep Neural Networks, DNN), etc. The patient data in historical data can be used as training data to train the mask extraction model, so that the mask extraction model can output the lesion mask based on the patient data. The labels corresponding to the training data can be determined by manually annotated lesion masks.
病灶长轴是指病灶区域边界上任意两点连线的最长线段。The long axis of the lesion refers to the longest line segment connecting any two points on the boundary of the lesion area.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以根据病灶掩膜,求取病灶外周边界点,构成集合E。接着,处理设备120可以随机从集合E中选择两个点A1、A2,A1A2连线构成一条空间线段,计算该线段长度L1;固定A1点,从E中更新A2点,形成新的线段,计算线段长度L2;重复上述步骤,更新A2点,计算线段A1A2的长度,直至A2已完全遍历集合E中的点;从集合E中更新A1点,重复上述步骤,直至A1已完全遍历集合E中的点;将线段长度L1、L2、……、Ln中最大值作为病灶长轴的长度l。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can obtain the peripheral boundary points of the lesion according to the lesion mask to form a set E. Next, the processing device 120 can randomly select two points A 1 and A 2 from the set E. A 1 and A 2 are connected to form a space line segment, and calculate the length L 1 of the line segment; fix point A 1 and update A 2 from E. point, form a new line segment, calculate the length of the line segment L 2 ; repeat the above steps, update the A 2 point, calculate the length of the line segment A 1 A 2 , until A 2 has completely traversed the points in the set E; update A 1 from the set E point, repeat the above steps until A 1 has completely traversed the points in the set E; use the maximum value among the line segment lengths L 1 , L 2 ,..., L n as the length l of the long axis of the lesion.
病灶短轴是指病灶区域的最小投影面积中的最长线段。 The short axis of the lesion refers to the longest line segment in the smallest projected area of the lesion area.
在一些实施例中,如图14所示,处理设备120可以根据病灶掩膜,求取病灶外周边界点,构成集合F;使用距离场计算方法,计算病灶掩膜的中心点Y(例如,病灶的质心、几何中心等);将Y视为射源,向各个方向发生射线;取某一方向的射线I,计算病灶在与射线I垂直的平面G上的投影H;计算投影H的最小外接圆C的直径DI,使圆形能刚好完全覆盖病灶投影;重复步骤上述,获得各个方向最小圆的直径集合D,取集合D中的最小值作为病灶短轴的长度d。In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 14, the processing device 120 can obtain the peripheral boundary points of the lesion according to the lesion mask to form a set F; use a distance field calculation method to calculate the center point Y of the lesion mask (for example, the lesion center of mass, geometric center, etc.); treat Y as a radiation source and emit rays in all directions; take a ray I in a certain direction and calculate the projection H of the lesion on the plane G perpendicular to the ray I; calculate the minimum circumference of the projection H The diameter D I of the circle C is such that the circle can just completely cover the projection of the lesion; repeat the above steps to obtain a set D of diameters of the smallest circles in all directions, and take the minimum value in the set D as the length d of the short axis of the lesion.
一些实施例中,处理设备120可以根据穿刺路径数量n,基于病灶长轴l和病灶短轴d确定消融球参数范围。例如,若多条穿刺路径上的消融球参数相同,当穿刺路径数量n=1时,a的取值范围为d<a<l;当穿刺路径数量n>1时,a的取值范围为示例性地,n=1时,若a>l,则消融球的短轴长度大于病灶长轴,消融适形率过小,对周围组织的损伤较大;若a<d,则消融球的短轴长度必然无法完全覆盖病灶的区域,造成必然无法完全消融。因此a需要满足上述条件。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the ablation sphere parameter range based on the long axis l of the lesion and the short axis d of the lesion according to the number of puncture paths n. For example, if the ablation ball parameters on multiple puncture paths are the same, when the number of puncture paths n=1, the value range of a is d<a<l; when the number of puncture paths n>1, the value range of a is For example, when n=1, if a>l, then the length of the short axis of the ablation sphere is greater than the long axis of the lesion, the ablation conformity rate is too small, and the damage to the surrounding tissue is greater; if a<d, then the length of the ablation sphere is The length of the short axis will inevitably not completely cover the lesion area, resulting in incomplete ablation. Therefore a needs to satisfy the above conditions.
在一些实施例中,若多条穿刺路径上的消融球参数不同。当穿刺路径数量n≥1时,多条穿刺路径上的消融球参数范围可以均为d<a<l。例如,当确定的穿刺路径数量为2(满足n≥1)时,第一条穿刺路径的消融球椭球的短轴长度为a1,第二条穿刺路径的消融球椭球的短轴长度为a2,a1和a2可以不同,第一条穿刺路径的消融球参数范围可以为d<a1<l,第二条穿刺路径的消融球参数范围可以为d<a2<l。In some embodiments, if the ablation ball parameters on multiple puncture paths are different. When the number of puncture paths is n≥1, the parameter range of ablation balls on multiple puncture paths can all be d<a<l. For example, when the number of determined puncture paths is 2 (satisfying n≥1), the short axis length of the ablation spherical ellipsoid of the first puncture path is a 1 , and the short axis length of the ablation spherical ellipsoid of the second puncture path is is a 2 , a 1 and a 2 can be different, the ablation sphere parameter range of the first puncture path can be d<a 1 <l, and the ablation sphere parameter range of the second puncture path can be d<a 2 <l.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过病灶长轴和病灶短轴限制消融球参数范围,可以压缩消融球参数的选择范围,以加快后续通过迭代优化确定目标参数的速度。In some embodiments of this specification, the range of ablation sphere parameters is limited by the long axis of the lesion and the short axis of the lesion, and the selection range of the ablation sphere parameters can be compressed to speed up the subsequent determination of target parameters through iterative optimization.
步骤1320,基于患者数据、穿刺路径数量以及消融球参数范围,确定至少一组规划参数。Step 1320: Determine at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data, the number of puncture paths, and the ablation sphere parameter range.
需要说明的是,为了后续描述方便,图16A中对图10中入针点与靶点的标识进行了调整,入针点Pi1调整为入针点P(i1,j1),入针点Pi2调整为入针点P(i2,j2),靶点Pj1调整为靶点Q1,靶点Pj2调整为靶点Q2It should be noted that, for the convenience of subsequent description, the identification of the needle insertion point and the target point in Figure 10 has been adjusted in Figure 16A. The needle insertion point P i1 is adjusted to the needle insertion point P (i 1 , j 1 ). Point P i2 is adjusted to needle insertion point P(i 2 , j 2 ), target point P j1 is adjusted to target point Q 1 , and target point P j2 is adjusted to target point Q 2 .
规划参数是指供选择的作为介入设备执行消融治疗手术的一组参数。在一些实施例中,规划参数包括入针点集{P(i1,j1),P(i2,j2),……,P(in,jn)}和靶点集{Q1,Q2,……,Qn}组成的穿刺路径P(in,jn)-Qn、系统供选择的消融球参数{R1,R2,……,Rs}、每条穿刺路径上的停留点位置Tkpn。其中,系统供选择的消融球参数中的每一个都符合消融球参数范围要求,n的取值基于穿刺路径数量确定(如,当穿刺路径数量为2时,n=1,2);停留点位置Tkpn中的pn为第n条穿刺路径,k为该穿刺路径上的第k个停留点位置。例如,如图16A所示,多条穿刺路径上的消融球参数相同,虚线区域为病灶,基于患者数据确定的穿刺路径数量为2以及消融球参数范围为一组规划参数可以包括入针点集{P(i1,j1),P(i2,j2)}和靶点集{Q1,Q2}组成了两条穿刺路径P(i1,j1)-Q1、P(i2,j2)-Q2,穿刺路径P(i1,j1)-Q1上存在停留点位置T1p1、T2p1,穿刺路径P(i2,j2)-Q2上存在停留点位置T2p1、可选择消融球参数为R。其中,R的短轴a的长度范围为:R的长轴c的大小基于对应的短轴确定,例如,可以通过查询对照表的方式确定不同的短轴a对应的长轴c的大小。其中,对照表可以通过介入设备生产厂家获取。Planning parameters refer to a set of parameters that can be selected as an interventional device to perform an ablation treatment procedure. In some embodiments, the planning parameters include the needle entry point set {P(i 1 , j 1 ), P(i 2 , j 2 ), ..., P(i n , j n )} and the target point set {Q 1 , Q 2 ,..., Q n } composed of puncture path P(i n , j n )-Q n , system ablation ball parameters {R 1 , R 2 ,..., R s }, each The stop point position T kpn on the puncture path. Among them, each of the ablation sphere parameters available for selection by the system meets the ablation sphere parameter range requirements, and the value of n is determined based on the number of puncture paths (for example, when the number of puncture paths is 2, n=1, 2); stay point pn in position T kpn is the n-th puncture path, and k is the k-th stop point position on the puncture path. For example, as shown in Figure 16A, the ablation sphere parameters on multiple puncture paths are the same, the dotted line area is the lesion, the number of puncture paths determined based on patient data is 2, and the ablation sphere parameter range is A set of planning parameters can include the needle entry point set {P(i 1 , j 1 ), P(i 2 , j 2 )} and the target point set {Q 1 , Q 2 } to form two puncture paths P(i 1 , j 1 )-Q 1 , P(i 2 , j 2 )-Q 2 , there are stay point positions T 1p1 , T 2p1 on the puncture path P(i 1 , j 1 )-Q 1 , the puncture path P(i 2 , there is a stay point position T 2p1 on j 2 )-Q 2 , and the optional ablation ball parameter is R. Among them, the length range of the minor axis a of R is: The size of the major axis c of R is determined based on the corresponding minor axis. For example, the size of the major axis c corresponding to different minor axes a can be determined by querying a comparison table. Among them, the comparison table can be obtained from the interventional equipment manufacturer.
在一些实施例中,同一条穿刺路径上的不同停留点位置的消融球参数可以是相同的。例如,如图16A所示,穿刺路径P(i1,j1)-Q1上的停留点位置T1p1、T2p1处的消融球参数可以是相同的。In some embodiments, ablation ball parameters at different stop point locations on the same puncture path may be the same. For example, as shown in Figure 16A, the ablation ball parameters at the stay point positions T 1p1 and T 2p1 on the puncture path P(i 1 , j 1 )-Q 1 may be the same.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于病灶对应的皮肤区域确定入针点集{P(i1,j1),P(i2,j2),……,P(in,jn)}。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将病灶区域的点构成的集合作为靶点集{Q1,Q2,……,Qn}。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将入针点集中的点P(in,jn)和靶点集中的点Qn相连构成的至少一条线段作为至少一条穿刺路径P(in,jn)-Qn,并在穿刺路径上设置可能的停留点位置Tkpn和消融球参数R,例如,在穿刺路径与病灶区域的相交部分等距设置停留点位置,并随机选择消融球参数R。关于确定规划参数的更多内容参见图15及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the needle entry point set {P(i 1 , j 1 ), P(i 2 , j 2 ), ..., P(in , j n ) based on the skin area corresponding to the lesion . )}. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may use a set of points in the lesion area as a target point set {Q 1 , Q 2 , ..., Q n }. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can connect at least one line segment formed by connecting the point P( in , jn ) in the needle insertion point set and the point Qn in the target point set as at least one puncture path P( in ,j n )-Q n , and set the possible stay point position T kpn and ablation ball parameter R on the puncture path. For example, set the stay point position equidistantly at the intersection of the puncture path and the lesion area, and randomly select the ablation ball parameter R . See Figure 15 and its associated description for more information on determining planning parameters.
步骤1330,基于至少一组规划参数,确定至少一组可行解。Step 1330: Determine at least one set of feasible solutions based on at least one set of planning parameters.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于至少一组规划参数,生成规划集合,规划集合包括多个中间解,每个中间解对应一组规划参数;对规划集合进行至少一轮迭代优化,直至第二迭代完成条件被满足,得到最优规划集合;基于最优规划集合,确定至少一组可行解。关于确定至少一组可行解的更多内容参见图17-图18及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can generate a planning set based on at least one set of planning parameters. The planning set includes multiple intermediate solutions, each intermediate solution corresponding to a set of planning parameters; and perform at least one round of iterative optimization on the planning set until The second iteration completion condition is met, and the optimal planning set is obtained; based on the optimal planning set, at least one set of feasible solutions is determined. See Figures 17-18 and their associated descriptions for more information on determining at least one set of feasible solutions.
步骤1340,基于至少一组可行解,确定目标参数。Step 1340: Determine target parameters based on at least one set of feasible solutions.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于至少一组可行解,确定目标参数。关于确定目标参数的更多内容参见图17-图18及其相关描述。In some embodiments, processing device 120 may determine target parameters based on at least one set of feasible solutions. For more information on determining target parameters, see Figures 17-18 and their related descriptions.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过确定穿刺路径数量和消融球参数范围,确定至少一组规划参数, 并基于至少一组规划参数确定目标参数,可以缩小规划参数的范围,更快速地获得更合理的目标参数以提高医生的手术效率,减轻医生的工作难度。In some embodiments of this specification, at least one set of planning parameters is determined by determining the number of puncture paths and the parameter range of the ablation sphere, And by determining the target parameters based on at least one set of planning parameters, the range of planning parameters can be narrowed, and more reasonable target parameters can be obtained more quickly to improve the doctor's surgical efficiency and reduce the difficulty of the doctor's work.
应当注意的是,上述有关流程1300的描述仅仅是为了示例和说明,而不限定本说明书的适用范围。对于本领域技术人员来说,在本说明书的指导下可以对流程1300进行各种修正和改变。然而,这些修正和改变仍在本说明书的范围之内。It should be noted that the above description of process 1300 is only for example and explanation, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification. For those skilled in the art, various modifications and changes can be made to process 1300 under the guidance of this description. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以先基于图4的流程确定目标穿刺路径,接着基于图13的流程确定除目标穿刺路径以外的目标参数(即,目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数)。步骤1320中,由于目标穿刺路径已确定,处理设备120可以只通过变换停留点位置和消融球参数来生成至少一组规划参数。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may first determine the target puncture path based on the process of FIG. 4 , and then determine the target parameters other than the target puncture path (ie, the target stop point position and the target ablation sphere parameters) based on the process of FIG. 13 . In step 1320, since the target puncture path has been determined, the processing device 120 can generate at least one set of planning parameters only by changing the stay point position and the ablation ball parameters.
在一些实施例中,用户可以手动绘制目标穿刺路径,接着基于图13的流程确定除目标穿刺路径以外的目标参数(即,目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数)。步骤1320中,由于目标穿刺路径已确定,处理设备120可以只通过变换停留点位置和消融球参数来生成至少一组规划参数。In some embodiments, the user can manually draw the target puncture path, and then determine the target parameters other than the target puncture path (ie, the target stop point location and the target ablation sphere parameters) based on the process of FIG. 13 . In step 1320, since the target puncture path has been determined, the processing device 120 can generate at least one set of planning parameters only by changing the stay point position and the ablation ball parameters.
图15是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的确定规划参数的示例性流程图。如图15所示,流程1500包括下述步骤。在一些实施例中,图15所示的流程1500的一个或一个以上操作可以在图1所示的介入规划系统的应用场景100中实现。例如,图15所示的流程1500可以以指令的形式存储在存储设备中,并由处理设备120调用和/或执行。Figure 15 is an exemplary flowchart of determining planning parameters according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in Figure 15, process 1500 includes the following steps. In some embodiments, one or more operations of the process 1500 shown in FIG. 15 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 . For example, the process 1500 shown in FIG. 15 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
步骤1510,对患者数据进行三维重建,以获得三维医学影像。Step 1510: Perform three-dimensional reconstruction on the patient data to obtain a three-dimensional medical image.
在一些实施例中,患者数据可以包括患者的CT或MR数据。关于患者数据的更多内容参见图3及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the patient data may include CT or MR data of the patient. See Figure 3 and its associated description for more information on patient data.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以对患者数据进行三维重建,以获得三维医学影像,并基于三维医学影像,确定结构特征。关于三维医学影像、结构特征的更多内容参见图4及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can perform three-dimensional reconstruction of patient data to obtain a three-dimensional medical image, and determine structural features based on the three-dimensional medical image. For more information on three-dimensional medical images and structural features, see Figure 4 and its related descriptions.
步骤1520,对三维重建的结果进行预处理操作。Step 1520: Perform preprocessing operations on the three-dimensional reconstruction results.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120还可以对三维重建的结果进行预处理操作,其中,预处理操作包括感兴趣区域裁剪、数据点降采样以及血管粗细分级中的一个或多个。关于预处理操作的更多内容参见图9及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can also perform preprocessing operations on the results of the three-dimensional reconstruction, where the preprocessing operations include one or more of region of interest cropping, data point downsampling, and blood vessel coarse subdivision grading. See Figure 9 and its associated description for more information on preprocessing operations.
步骤1530,基于预处理操作得到的结果、穿刺路径数量以及消融球参数范围确定至少一组规划参数。Step 1530: Determine at least one set of planning parameters based on the results of the preprocessing operation, the number of puncture paths, and the ablation sphere parameter range.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于预处理操作得到的结果确定入针点集。例如,图16B为病灶在肺部的感兴趣区域的示意图,患者的肺部横断面图中的虚线区域为患者的病灶,点Q为病灶区域中的点,点Z为感兴趣区域的环绕身体一圈的皮肤轮廓的中心点,选择包含病灶区域最多的1/4感兴趣区域对应的皮肤作为入针点规划区域,以皮肤轮廓的中心点Z为射源,向1/4感兴趣区域一侧边界均匀发射数量为M的射线(例如,图中带箭头的虚线),计算射线与皮肤轮廓的交点,按逆时针求交点的顺序存储(例如,从右侧第一个点开始逆时针方向依次存储为P(1,1)、P(2,1)、P(3,1)、……P(M,1)。其中,中心点Z可以通过质心求解的方式确定。接着,在该边界的垂直方向均匀设置N个片层,对不同片层重复按上述步骤求交点,可构造入针点的N×M矩阵,从而可以确认N×M个入针点集例如,图中P(i,j)可以为一个入针点的坐标,其中,i为逆时针第i个射线,j表示第j层。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the needle entry point set based on results obtained from the preprocessing operation. For example, Figure 16B is a schematic diagram of a region of interest of a lesion in the lungs. The dotted area in the cross-sectional view of the patient's lungs is the patient's lesion, point Q is a point in the lesion area, and point Z is the surrounding body of the region of interest. The center point of a circle of skin outline, select the skin corresponding to the 1/4 area of interest that contains the most lesion areas as the needle entry point planning area, use the center point Z of the skin outline as the radiation source, and move towards the 1/4 area of interest. The side boundary emits a number of M rays uniformly (for example, the dotted line with an arrow in the figure), calculates the intersection point of the ray and the skin contour, and stores the intersection points in a counterclockwise order (for example, starting from the first point on the right in a counterclockwise direction) They are stored in sequence as P(1,1), P(2,1), P(3,1),...P(M,1). Among them, the center point Z can be determined by the center of mass solution. Then, in this Arrange N slices evenly in the vertical direction of the boundary. Repeat the above steps for different slices to find intersection points. An N×M matrix of needle entry points can be constructed, so that N×M needle entry point sets can be confirmed. For example, P(i, j) in the figure can be the coordinates of a needle entry point, where i is the i-th counterclockwise ray, and j represents the j-th layer.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于数据点降采样后的结果,确定靶点集。例如,如图16B所示,处理设备可以将降采样后的病灶区域中的数据点作为靶点Qn,多个靶点构成靶点集{Q1,Q2,……,Qn}。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the target point set based on the results of downsampling the data points. For example, as shown in Figure 16B, the processing device can use the downsampled data points in the lesion area as target points Qn , and multiple target points constitute a target point set { Q1 , Q2 ,..., Qn }.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于血管粗细分级的结果确定穿刺路径。例如,处理设备120可以将入针点集中的点和靶点集中的点进行配对构成多条线段,将其中不经过预设粗细等级(如,血管粗细等级为2级及以上)的血管的线段作为规划参数的穿刺路径。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于穿刺路径与病灶区域相交的部分,等距设置可能的停留点位置。如图16A所示,图中入针点集{P(i1,j1),P(i2,j2)}和靶点集{Q1,Q2}组成了两条穿刺路径P(i1,j1)-Q1、P(i2,j2)-Q2,穿刺路径P(i1,j1)-Q1上存在停留点位置T1p1、T2p1,穿刺路径P(i2,j2)-Q2上存在停留点位置T2p1。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于可选消融球参数,且保证该消融球参数在上述确定的消融球参数范围内的同时,不会对预设粗细等级的血管造成损伤。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the puncture path based on the results of the blood vessel coarse subdivision. For example, the processing device 120 can pair the points in the needle entry point concentration and the points in the target point concentration to form multiple line segments, and combine the line segments of the blood vessels that do not pass through the preset thickness level (for example, the blood vessel thickness level is level 2 and above). The puncture path as a planning parameter. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may equidistantly set possible stay point locations based on the portion of the puncture path that intersects the lesion area. As shown in Figure 16A, the needle entry point set {P(i 1 , j 1 ), P(i 2 , j 2 )} and the target point set {Q 1 , Q 2 } form two puncture paths P( i 1 , j 1 )-Q 1 , P(i 2 , j 2 )-Q 2 , there are stay point positions T 1p1 , T 2p1 on the puncture path P(i 1 , j 1 )-Q 1 , the puncture path P( There is a stay point position T 2p1 on i 2 , j 2 )-Q 2 . In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can be based on selectable ablation sphere parameters and ensure that the ablation sphere parameters are within the above-determined ablation sphere parameter range while not causing damage to blood vessels of a preset thickness level.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,基于患者数据进行三维重建,以获得三维医学影像,并对三维医学影像进行预处理操作,进而确定规划参数,可以根据不同的病灶情况适应性地缩小规划参数的范围,使规 划参数更适合不同患者的病灶情况,提高后续迭代优化的效率。In some embodiments of this specification, three-dimensional reconstruction is performed based on patient data to obtain three-dimensional medical images, and preprocessing operations are performed on the three-dimensional medical images to determine planning parameters. The planning parameters can be adaptively reduced according to different lesion conditions. scope, regulation The delineation parameters are more suitable for the lesion conditions of different patients and improve the efficiency of subsequent iterative optimization.
图17是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的确定目标穿刺参数的示例性流程图。如图17所示,流程1700包括下述步骤。在一些实施例中,图17所示的流程1700的一个或一个以上操作可以在图1所示的介入规划系统的应用场景100中实现。例如,图17所示的流程1700可以以指令的形式存储在存储设备中,并由处理设备120调用和/或执行。Figure 17 is an exemplary flowchart of determining target puncture parameters according to some embodiments of the present specification. As shown in Figure 17, process 1700 includes the following steps. In some embodiments, one or more operations of the process 1700 shown in FIG. 17 may be implemented in the application scenario 100 of the intervention planning system shown in FIG. 1 . For example, the process 1700 shown in FIG. 17 may be stored in a storage device in the form of instructions and called and/or executed by the processing device 120 .
步骤1710,基于至少一组规划参数,生成规划集合。Step 1710: Generate a planning set based on at least one set of planning parameters.
在一些实施例中,规划集合包括多个中间解,每个中间解对应一组规划参数。In some embodiments, the planning set includes a plurality of intermediate solutions, each intermediate solution corresponding to a set of planning parameters.
规划集合是指由多个中间解构成的集合。其中,中间解是规划参数相对应的特定主体。在一些实施例中,中间解的属性包括第二约束判定值、第二评估值。关于第二约束判定值、第二评估值的更多内容参见步骤1740及其相关描述。A planning set is a set composed of multiple intermediate solutions. Among them, the intermediate solution is the specific subject corresponding to the planning parameters. In some embodiments, the properties of the intermediate solution include a second constraint determination value and a second evaluation value. For more information about the second constraint determination value and the second evaluation value, please refer to step 1740 and its related description.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于至少一组规划参数随机选择一定数量(例如,20组、30组等)的规划参数对应的中间解形成规划集合。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于竞标赛选择策略从至少一组规划参数中选择中间解作为规划集合。例如,处理设备120可以随机从至少一组规划参数中选择m个(例如,5个、10个等)中间解,并基于第二评估值和第二约束判定值将其中最优的中间解作为规划集合,重复进行N次,直到规划集合数量满足数量要求,其中,数量要求可以预先设置。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may randomly select intermediate solutions corresponding to a certain number (for example, 20 groups, 30 groups, etc.) of planning parameters to form a planning set based on at least one set of planning parameters. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may select an intermediate solution from at least one set of planning parameters as a planning set based on a tournament selection strategy. For example, the processing device 120 may randomly select m (eg, 5, 10, etc.) intermediate solutions from at least one set of planning parameters, and use the optimal intermediate solution as the optimal intermediate solution based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value. The planning set is repeated N times until the number of planning sets meets the quantity requirements, where the quantity requirements can be set in advance.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以通过执行步骤1720,对规划集合进行至少一轮迭代优化,直至第二迭代完成条件被满足,得到最优规划集合。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may perform step 1720 to perform at least one round of iterative optimization on the planning set until the second iteration completion condition is satisfied, thereby obtaining the optimal planning set.
步骤1720,对规划集合进行变换操作,得到第一预设数量的新的中间解。Step 1720: Perform a transformation operation on the planning set to obtain a first preset number of new intermediate solutions.
变换操作是指基于规划集合中的中间解生成新的中间解的操作。例如,对中间解的参数进行交叉操作、变异操作等生成新的中间解的操作。The transformation operation refers to the operation of generating a new intermediate solution based on the intermediate solution in the planning set. For example, operations such as crossover operations and mutation operations are performed on the parameters of the intermediate solution to generate a new intermediate solution.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将规划集合中的中间解进行两两配对(例如,随机配对),对两个配对的规划集合中的中间解进行交叉操作,得到两个新的中间解。其中,交叉操作是指将相互配对的中间解对应的规划参数中的至少一项参数通过单点交叉、多点交叉、均匀交叉、算术交叉等方式进行交换,以生成两个新的中间解的规划参数。例如,将两个相互配对的中间解的入针点、靶点、消融球参数等中的至少一个相互交换,生成两个新的中间解对应的规划参数。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can pair the intermediate solutions in the planning set (for example, randomly pair them), and perform a crossover operation on the intermediate solutions in the two paired planning sets to obtain two new intermediate solutions. . Among them, the crossover operation refers to exchanging at least one parameter among the planning parameters corresponding to the paired intermediate solutions through single-point crossover, multi-point crossover, uniform crossover, arithmetic crossover, etc., to generate two new intermediate solutions. planning parameters. For example, at least one of the needle entry points, target points, ablation sphere parameters, etc. of two paired intermediate solutions is exchanged with each other to generate planning parameters corresponding to two new intermediate solutions.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以对规划集合中的中间解进行变异操作,得到新的中间解。其中,变异操作是指对规划集合中的中间解对应的规划参数中的至少一个参数进行一定的改变,得到新的中间解对应的规划参数。例如,对规划集合中的中间解的入针点、停留点位置、靶点、消融球参数等中的至少一个进行改变。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can perform a mutation operation on the intermediate solutions in the planning set to obtain a new intermediate solution. The mutation operation refers to making certain changes to at least one parameter in the planning parameters corresponding to the intermediate solution in the planning set to obtain the planning parameters corresponding to the new intermediate solution. For example, at least one of the needle entry point, stay point position, target point, ablation sphere parameters, etc. of the intermediate solution in the planning set is changed.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以对交叉操作得到的新的中间解中的至少一个进行变异操作,得到变异后的新的中间解。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may perform a mutation operation on at least one of the new intermediate solutions obtained by the crossover operation to obtain a mutated new intermediate solution.
在一些实施例中,如图16B所示,处理设备120可以构建确认N×M个入针点集,并将入针点坐标确定为(i,j)。接着,处理设备120可以通过病灶的患者数据(例如,CT、MR数据等),计算病灶最小包围盒,确定病灶靶点在XYZ方向的坐标(x,y,z)。进一步地,处理设备120可以基于消融球参数尺寸,按消融球体积大小进行由小到大排序,对每种尺寸的消融球编码设置为(0,s)。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 16B , the processing device 120 may construct a set of confirmed N×M needle insertion points and determine the coordinates of the needle insertion points as (i, j). Next, the processing device 120 can calculate the minimum bounding box of the lesion through the patient data of the lesion (eg, CT, MR data, etc.) and determine the coordinates (x, y, z) of the lesion target in the XYZ direction. Further, the processing device 120 may sort the ablation spheres from small to large based on the ablation sphere parameter size, and set the ablation sphere encoding of each size to (0, s).
在一些实施例中,当穿刺路径数量为1时,处理设备120可以将一组规划参数确定为(i,j,x,y,z,s),即存在6个变量。在一些实施例中,当穿刺路径数量为2时,处理设备120可以将一组规划参数确定为(i1,j1,x1,y1,z1,s1,i2,j2,x2,y2,z2,s2),即存在12个变量。需要说明的是,为了简化问题设计的复杂程度,无需考虑穿刺路径上存在不同的停留点位置的情况。可以根据消融球尺寸和病灶体积,确定满足完全消融的最佳停留点位置,而不将停留点位置作为变量进行处理。In some embodiments, when the number of puncture paths is 1, the processing device 120 may determine a set of planning parameters as (i, j, x, y, z, s), that is, there are 6 variables. In some embodiments, when the number of puncture paths is 2, the processing device 120 may determine a set of planning parameters as (i 1 , j 1 , x 1 , y 1 , z 1 , s 1 , i 2 , j 2 , x 2 , y 2 , z 2 , s 2 ), that is, there are 12 variables. It should be noted that, in order to simplify the complexity of problem design, there is no need to consider the situation that there are different stop point locations on the puncture path. The optimal stop point position that satisfies complete ablation can be determined based on the ablation sphere size and lesion volume without treating the stop point position as a variable.
在一些实施例中,处理设备可以采用编码、交叉的方式,确定新的中间解。例如,对于两个父代中间解,处理设备120可以将整形变量调整为二进制值编码,并使用整形交叉算子,生成两个子代中间解。子代中间解和父代中间解整形数值和保持一致,不会生成太偏离当前父代中间解位置的点,从而可以起到迭代收敛效果。In some embodiments, the processing device may use coding and interleaving methods to determine the new intermediate solution. For example, for two parent intermediate solutions, the processing device 120 may adjust the integer variable to a binary value encoding, and use an integer crossover operator to generate two offspring intermediate solutions. The integer values of the intermediate solution of the child and the intermediate solution of the parent remain consistent and will not generate points that deviate too far from the position of the current intermediate solution of the parent, thus achieving an iterative convergence effect.
在一些实施例中,处理设备可以采用变异的方式,确定新的中间解。例如,对于一个父代中间解,处理设备120可以将整形变量调整为二进制值编码,并对二进制编码的某些位点进行0,1随机反转,产生新的二进制值,进而形成子代中间解。规划问题中各变量为整形或浮点实数类型,使用多项式变异方法,产生新的个体。In some embodiments, the processing device may adopt a mutation method to determine a new intermediate solution. For example, for a parent intermediate solution, the processing device 120 can adjust the integer variable to a binary value encoding, and randomly invert certain bits of the binary encoding by 0 and 1 to generate a new binary value, thereby forming the descendant intermediate solution. untie. Each variable in the planning problem is an integer or floating point real number type, and the polynomial mutation method is used to generate new individuals.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以通过其他方式对规划集合进行变换操作得到新的中间解,例如,通过多项式交叉、多项式变异等进行变换操作得到新的中间解。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may perform transformation operations on the planning set in other ways to obtain a new intermediate solution, for example, perform transformation operations through polynomial crossover, polynomial mutation, etc. to obtain a new intermediate solution.
新的中间解是指规划参数中至少有一项不同于规划集合中原有中间解的中间解。例如,通过交叉 操作、变异操作得到的新的中间解。A new intermediate solution refers to an intermediate solution in which at least one of the planning parameters is different from the original intermediate solution in the planning set. For example, by crossing The new intermediate solution obtained by operation and mutation operation.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于第二约束判定值从规划集合中选择两个中间解通过上述方式进行交叉操作,生成两个新的中间解。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于第二约束判定值从规划集合中选择一个中间解通过上述方式进行变异操作,生成一个新的中间解。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以同时执行交叉操作、变异操作,生成新的中间解。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may select two intermediate solutions from the planning set based on the second constraint determination value and perform the crossover operation in the above manner to generate two new intermediate solutions. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may select an intermediate solution from the planning set based on the second constraint determination value and perform a mutation operation in the above manner to generate a new intermediate solution. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can perform crossover operations and mutation operations simultaneously to generate a new intermediate solution.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120还可以通过其他方式(如,粒子群算法等)演化产生新的中间解。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can also evolve to generate a new intermediate solution through other methods (such as particle swarm algorithm, etc.).
第一预设数量是指预先设置的新的中间解的数量。在一些实施例中,第一预设数量可以与规划集合中中间解的数量相同,也可以与规划集合中中间解的数量不同。The first preset number refers to the number of new intermediate solutions set in advance. In some embodiments, the first preset number may be the same as the number of intermediate solutions in the planning set, or may be different from the number of intermediate solutions in the planning set.
满足条件是指新的中间解对应的规划参数满足条件。在一些实施例中,满足条件包括入针点、靶点、穿刺路径满足预处理操作后的限制范围,消融球参数满足消融球参数范围,其中,限制范围包括入针点不超过感兴趣区域裁剪得到的1/4感兴趣区域、穿刺路径不经过较粗血管等。Meeting the conditions means that the planning parameters corresponding to the new intermediate solution satisfy the conditions. In some embodiments, meeting the conditions includes that the needle entry point, target point, and puncture path meet the restriction range after the pretreatment operation, and the ablation sphere parameters satisfy the ablation sphere parameter range, wherein the restriction range includes that the needle entry point does not exceed the area of interest cropping The obtained 1/4 area of interest and puncture path do not pass through thick blood vessels, etc.
步骤1730,将新的中间解加入规划集合,得到加入新的中间解的规划集合。Step 1730: Add the new intermediate solution to the planning set to obtain a planning set with the new intermediate solution added.
步骤1740,计算加入新的中间解的规划集合中的每个中间解的第二评估值和第二约束判定值。Step 1740: Calculate the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value of each intermediate solution added to the planning set of the new intermediate solution.
第二评估值是指对中间解的优劣进行评估得到的数值。在一些实施例中,第二评估值可以为穿刺路径评分、消融适形率中的至少一个。The second evaluation value refers to the value obtained by evaluating the quality of the intermediate solution. In some embodiments, the second evaluation value may be at least one of puncture path score and ablation conformity rate.
穿刺路径评分是对穿刺路径的优劣程度进行评分。The puncture path score is to rate the quality of the puncture path.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以通过公式(9)计算穿刺路径的评分S:
S=w1×L+w2×h+w3×c         (9)
In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may calculate the score S of the puncture path through formula (9):
S=w 1 ×L+w 2 ×h+w 3 ×c (9)
其中,L为穿刺路径长度,h为穿刺路径与危险器官之间的最短距离,c为穿刺路径跨越的片层数量,w1、w3为小于0的系数,w2为大于0的系数,w1、w2、w3的具体数值可以根据实际需要进行设置。当穿刺路径L越短、穿刺路径与危险器官的距离h越大、穿刺路径跨越的片层数量c越少时,对病人的伤害越小,且便于术中穿刺引导观察针道。因此,穿刺路径评分S与h正相关,与L、c负相关,穿刺路径评分越高,穿刺路径越优。Among them, L is the length of the puncture path, h is the shortest distance between the puncture path and the dangerous organ, c is the number of slices spanned by the puncture path, w 1 and w 3 are coefficients less than 0, and w 2 is a coefficient greater than 0. The specific values of w 1 , w 2 , and w 3 can be set according to actual needs. When the puncture path L is shorter, the distance h between the puncture path and the dangerous organ is larger, and the number of slices c spanned by the puncture path is smaller, the harm to the patient is smaller, and it is easier to guide and observe the needle path during the operation. Therefore, the puncture path score S is positively correlated with h and negatively correlated with L and c. The higher the puncture path score, the better the puncture path.
在一些实施例中,完全消融条件下,处理设备120可以基于病灶体积和规划消融总体积计算消融适形率。其中,规划消融总体积为所有停留点位置对应的规划消融体积取并集后的体积。关于消融适形率的更多内容参见图11及其相关描述。In some embodiments, under complete ablation conditions, the processing device 120 may calculate the ablation conformity rate based on the lesion volume and the planned total ablation volume. Among them, the total planned ablation volume is the volume of the union of the planned ablation volumes corresponding to all stay point positions. See Figure 11 and its associated description for more information on ablation conformity rate.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以计算不同约束条件的判定值的加和,将约束条件判定值的加和作为第二约束判定值。第二约束判定值与第一约束判定值类似,在此不再赘述。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may calculate the sum of the determination values of different constraint conditions, and use the sum of the determination values of the constraint conditions as the second constraint determination value. The second constraint determination value is similar to the first constraint determination value, and will not be described again here.
在一些实施例中,可以通过其他方式确定第二评估值和第二约束判定值,例如,基于病灶覆盖率或穿刺路径长度确定第二评估值,基于消融适形率确定第二约束判定值,在此不做限制。In some embodiments, the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value may be determined in other ways, for example, the second evaluation value is determined based on the lesion coverage or the puncture path length, and the second constraint determination value is determined based on the ablation conformity rate, There are no restrictions here.
步骤1750,基于第二评估值和第二约束判定值选择中间解,得到包含第二预设数量的中间解的新的规划集合。Step 1750: Select an intermediate solution based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value, and obtain a new planning set containing a second preset number of intermediate solutions.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于中间解的第二评估值和第二约束判定值高的大小选择中间解。关于基于第二评估值和第二约束判定值选择中间解的更多内容参见图18及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may select the intermediate solution based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint decision value of the intermediate solution being high. For more information on selecting an intermediate solution based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint decision value, see Figure 18 and its related description.
第二预设数量是指经过选择中间解后的新的规划集合的数量。第二预设数量与规划集合中中间解的数量相同。The second preset number refers to the number of new planning sets after selecting the intermediate solution. The second preset number is the same as the number of intermediate solutions in the planning set.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过第二评估值和第二约束判定值选择中间解,可以确保每一代规划集合中的中间解对应的规划参数的可行性。In some embodiments of this specification, selecting an intermediate solution through the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value can ensure the feasibility of the planning parameters corresponding to the intermediate solution in each generation of planning set.
步骤1760,判断第二迭代完成条件是否被满足。Step 1760: Determine whether the second iteration completion condition is met.
第二迭代完成条件是指用于判断迭代优化是否完成的条件。例如,迭代次数达到最大值、第二评估值达到预设评估阈值等。The second iteration completion condition refers to the condition used to determine whether the iteration optimization is completed. For example, the number of iterations reaches the maximum value, the second evaluation value reaches the preset evaluation threshold, etc.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以对每一轮迭代优化进行计数,从0开始,每迭代一次计数加1,当计数达到迭代优化次数最大值时,判定第二迭代完成条件被满足。在一些实施例中,处理设备120还可以将每一轮迭代优化后的规划集合中的中间解的第二评估值与预设评估阈值进行比较,当第二评估值大于等于预设评估阈值时,判定第二迭代完成条件被满足。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may count each round of iterative optimization, starting from 0, and adding 1 to the count for each iteration. When the count reaches the maximum number of iterative optimization times, it is determined that the second iteration completion condition is met. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may also compare the second evaluation value of the intermediate solution in the planning set after each round of iterative optimization with the preset evaluation threshold, when the second evaluation value is greater than or equal to the preset evaluation threshold. , determine that the second iteration completion condition is met.
响应于第二迭代完成条件不被满足,处理设备120可以将新的规划集合作为规划集合,并通过执行步骤1720继续对规划集合进行迭代更新,直到第二迭代完成条件被满足。响应于第二迭代完成条件被满足,处理设备120可以执行步骤1770。In response to the second iteration completion condition being not satisfied, the processing device 120 may use the new planning set as the planning set, and continue to iteratively update the planning set by performing step 1720 until the second iteration completion condition is satisfied. In response to the second iteration completion condition being satisfied, processing device 120 may perform step 1770.
步骤1770,得到最优规划集合,基于最优规划集合,确定至少一组可行解。Step 1770: Obtain the optimal planning set, and determine at least one set of feasible solutions based on the optimal planning set.
最优规划集合是指第二迭代完成条件被满足后的规划集合。例如,最后一次迭代优化后生成的规划集合、包含第二评估值超过预设评估阈值的中间解的规划集合等。The optimal planning set refers to the planning set after the second iteration completion condition is satisfied. For example, the planning set generated after the last iteration of optimization, the planning set containing intermediate solutions whose second evaluation value exceeds the preset evaluation threshold, etc.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将满足第二迭代完成条件的规划集合作为最优规划集合。 In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may regard the planning set that satisfies the second iteration completion condition as the optimal planning set.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于最优规划集合确定帕累托前沿解,将帕累托前沿解作为至少一组可行解。确定可行解的流程与确定中间参数的流程类似,关于确定中间参数的更多内容参见图11及其相关描述。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the Pareto front solution based on the set of optimal plans as at least one set of feasible solutions. The process of determining feasible solutions is similar to the process of determining intermediate parameters. For more information on determining intermediate parameters, see Figure 11 and its related description.
步骤1780,基于至少一组可行解,确定目标参数。Step 1780: Determine target parameters based on at least one set of feasible solutions.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将至少一组可行解中消融适形率最高的可行解作为目标参数。在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将至少一组可行解发送到医生所使用的用户终端供医生自主选择,并将医生自主选择的可行解作为目标参数。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may use the feasible solution with the highest ablation conformation rate among at least one set of feasible solutions as the target parameter. In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may send at least one set of feasible solutions to the user terminal used by the doctor for the doctor to independently select, and use the feasible solutions independently selected by the doctor as target parameters.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于穿刺路径评分和消融适形率,确定至少一组可行解的目标函数值,并基于目标函数值,确定目标穿刺参数。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the objective function values of at least one set of feasible solutions based on the puncture path score and the ablation conformation rate, and determine the target puncture parameters based on the objective function values.
目标函数值是指用于选择目标穿刺参数的数值。例如,相关于穿刺路径评分和消融适形率的数值。The objective function value refers to the numerical value used to select the target puncture parameters. For example, values related to puncture path score and ablation conformity rate.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以通过公式(10)计算目标函数值Fmax
Fmax=z1×S+z2×η       (10)
In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may calculate the objective function value F max by formula (10):
F max =z 1 ×S+z 2 ×η (10)
其中,S为穿刺路径评分,η为消融适形率,z1、z2均为大于0的参数,用于平衡穿刺路径评分和消融适形率。Among them, S is the puncture path score, eta is the ablation conformity rate, z 1 and z 2 are parameters greater than 0, which are used to balance the puncture path score and the ablation conformity rate.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将目标函数值最大的穿刺参数确定为目标穿刺参数。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the puncture parameter with the largest objective function value as the target puncture parameter.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过目标函数值确定目标参数,不仅考虑到消融效果,还考虑到了对患者的伤害程度,可以确保得到的目标参数为各方面第二评估值最均衡、最适合当前病灶情况的参数。In some embodiments of this specification, the target parameter is determined through the objective function value, taking into account not only the ablation effect, but also the degree of harm to the patient, which can ensure that the obtained target parameter is the most balanced and suitable second evaluation value in all aspects. Parameters of the current lesion status.
在本说明书的一些实施例中,通过对规划集合进行多轮迭代优化确定最优规划集合,可以在全局搜索最优规划集合,避免最优规划集合中的中间解趋于局部最优;通过最优规划集合确定目标参数,可以得到最适合的目标参数。In some embodiments of this specification, by performing multiple rounds of iterative optimization on the planning set to determine the optimal planning set, the optimal planning set can be searched globally to avoid the intermediate solutions in the optimal planning set from tending to the local optimum; through the optimal The optimal planning set determines the target parameters, and the most suitable target parameters can be obtained.
应当注意的是,上述有关流程1700的描述仅仅是为了示例和说明,而不限定本说明书的适用范围。对于本领域技术人员来说,在本说明书的指导下可以对流程1700进行各种修正和改变。然而,这些修正和改变仍在本说明书的范围之内。It should be noted that the above description of process 1700 is only for example and illustration, and does not limit the scope of application of this specification. For those skilled in the art, various modifications and changes can be made to process 1700 under the guidance of this specification. However, such modifications and changes remain within the scope of this specification.
图18是根据本说明书一些实施例所示的选择中间解的流程示意图。Figure 18 is a schematic flowchart of selecting an intermediate solution according to some embodiments of this specification.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于第二评估值和第二约束判定值选择中间解,得到包含第二预设数量的中间解的新的规划集合。例如,处理设备120可以基于第二评估值和第二约束判定值将加入新的中间解的规划集合进行分层,再基于第二评估值和第二约束判定值确定每个中间解的拥挤距离,从而选择出新的规划集合。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may select an intermediate solution based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value to obtain a new planning set including a second preset number of intermediate solutions. For example, the processing device 120 may hierarchize the planning set to which the new intermediate solution is added based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value, and then determine the congestion distance of each intermediate solution based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value. , thereby selecting a new planning set.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以将规划集合按支配关系分为若干层,第一层为规划集合的帕累托前沿解,第二层为在规划集合中去掉第一层中间解后所求得的帕累托前沿解,第三层为在规划集合中去掉第一层和第二层中间解后所求得的帕累托前沿解,依此类推。例如,如图18所示,处理设备120可以根据上述方法将加入新的中间解的规划集合分为第一层、第二层、第三层等。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 can divide the planning set into several layers according to the dominance relationship. The first layer is the Pareto front solution of the planning set, and the second layer is the result of removing the first layer of intermediate solutions from the planning set. The third level of the Pareto front solution obtained is the Pareto front solution obtained after removing the intermediate solutions of the first and second levels from the planning set, and so on. For example, as shown in FIG. 18 , the processing device 120 may divide the planning set to which a new intermediate solution is added into the first layer, the second layer, the third layer, etc. according to the above method.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以基于第二评估值和第二约束判定值确定选择函数,并基于选择函数确定拥挤距离。例如,处理设备120可以通过公式(11)确定选择函数f:
f=m1×S+m2×η+m3×W         (11)
In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may determine the selection function based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint decision value, and determine the crowding distance based on the selection function. For example, processing device 120 may determine selection function f via equation (11):
f=m 1 ×S+m 2 ×η+m 3 ×W (11)
其中,S为穿刺路径评分,η为消融适形率,W为第二约束判定值,m1、m2、m3均为大于0的参数,用于平衡穿刺路径评分、消融适形率和第二约束判定值。Among them, S is the puncture path score, eta is the ablation conformity rate, W is the second constraint judgment value, m 1 , m 2 and m 3 are all parameters greater than 0, which are used to balance the puncture path score, ablation conformity rate and The second constraint decision value.
接着,处理设备120可以计算加入新的中间解的规划集合中每个中间解的选择函数值,并基于每个中间解的选择函数值对所有中间解进行升序排列,将排在第一位即函数值最小值的中间解的拥挤距离和排在最后一位即函数值最大的中间解的拥挤距离设置无穷大,即对每一选择函数,边界中间解(具有最大和最小选择函数值的中间解)对应的拥挤距离设置为无穷大。非边界第i个中间解的拥挤距离可以通过公式(12)计算:
Then, the processing device 120 can calculate the selection function value of each intermediate solution in the planning set added to the new intermediate solution, and sort all the intermediate solutions in ascending order based on the selection function value of each intermediate solution, ranking first, that is, The crowding distance of the intermediate solution with the smallest function value and the crowding distance of the last intermediate solution with the largest function value are set to infinity, that is, for each selection function, the boundary intermediate solution (the intermediate solution with the largest and smallest selection function values) ) and the corresponding crowding distance is set to infinity. The crowding distance of the non-boundary i-th intermediate solution can be calculated by formula (12):
其中,f为选择函数,i为升序排列后的中间解序号,fmax为加入新的中间解的规划集合中的所有中间解对应的选择函数值中的最大值,fmin为加入新的中间解的规划集合中的所有中间解对应的选择函数值中的最小值,d为拥挤距离。Among them, f is the selection function, i is the serial number of the intermediate solution arranged in ascending order, f max is the maximum value of the selection function values corresponding to all intermediate solutions in the planning set that adds the new intermediate solution, and f min is the value of the new intermediate solution added The minimum value of the selection function values corresponding to all intermediate solutions in the planning set of solutions, d is the crowding distance.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120可以先将第一层中的中间解加入新的规划集合,若第一层的中间解数量小于第二预设数量,则将第二层中的中间解加入新的规划集合,依次类推,直至加入第x层后,新的规划集合的数量大于等于第二预设数量。当加入第x层后,新的规划集合的数量等于第二预设数量时,将第x层及之前的中间解作为新的规划集合;当加入第x层后,新的规划集合的数量大于第二预设数量时,则将第x层的拥挤距离进行降序排序,从前到后依次加入新的规划集合,直至新的规划集合的数量等于第 二预设数量。例如,如图9所示,假设规划集合的数量为50,新的中间解数量为50,加入新的中间解的规划集合划分的第一层的数量25、第二层的数量为10、第三层的数量为30……将第一层的中间解加入新的规划集合,新的规划集合的中间解数量为25,未达到第二预设数量(即,规划集合的数量50);接着将第二层的中间解也加入新的规划集合,新的规划集合的中间解数量为35,未达到第二预设数量;接着将第三层的中间解也加入新的规划集合,新的规划集合的中间解数量为65,超过了第二预设数量,因此需要在第三层中挑选50-25-10=15个中间解加入新的规划集合。具体选择方法为:计算第三层中的每个中间解的拥挤距离,将拥挤距离进行降序排列,取前15个中间解加入新的规划集合,第三层中的后15个以及除第一层、第二层和第三层以外的层优越性不够,淘汰处理。由于拥挤距离越大,拥挤度越小,从而选择拥挤距离较大的中间解可以维持规划集合的多样性,避免陷入局部最优。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 may first add the intermediate solutions in the first layer to the new planning set. If the number of intermediate solutions in the first layer is less than the second preset number, then add the intermediate solutions in the second layer. The new planning set is deduced in sequence until the x-th layer is added and the number of new planning sets is greater than or equal to the second preset number. When the x-th layer is added, the number of new planning sets is equal to the second preset number, the x-th layer and the previous intermediate solutions are used as the new planning set; when the x-th layer is added, the number of new planning sets is greater than When the second preset number is reached, the congestion distance of the xth layer is sorted in descending order, and new planning sets are added from front to back until the number of new planning sets is equal to the 2. Default quantity. For example, as shown in Figure 9, assume that the number of planning sets is 50, the number of new intermediate solutions is 50, the number of the first level divided by the planning set adding the new intermediate solution is 25, the number of the second level is 10, and the number of the second level is 10. The number of three layers is 30... Add the intermediate solution of the first layer to the new planning set. The number of intermediate solutions of the new planning set is 25, which does not reach the second preset number (that is, the number of planning sets is 50); then The intermediate solutions of the second level are also added to the new planning set. The number of intermediate solutions in the new planning set is 35, which does not reach the second preset number. Then the intermediate solutions of the third level are also added to the new planning set. The new planning set has The number of intermediate solutions in the planning set is 65, which exceeds the second preset number. Therefore, 50-25-10=15 intermediate solutions need to be selected in the third layer to add to the new planning set. The specific selection method is: calculate the crowding distance of each intermediate solution in the third layer, arrange the crowding distance in descending order, take the first 15 intermediate solutions and add them to the new planning set, the last 15 in the third layer and the first Layers other than the first, second and third layers are not superior enough and will be eliminated. Since the larger the crowding distance is, the smaller the crowding degree is. Therefore, choosing an intermediate solution with a larger crowding distance can maintain the diversity of the planning set and avoid falling into local optimality.
在本说明书中的一些实施例中,基于第二评估值和第二约束判定值选择中间解,可以选择出效果更好、对患者损伤最低的中间解进入下一轮迭代更新,促使迭代更新更快地得到最适合患者情况的目标参数,从而提高了医生的手术效率,减轻医生的工作难度。In some embodiments of this specification, an intermediate solution is selected based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint judgment value, and the intermediate solution with better effect and lowest damage to the patient can be selected to enter the next round of iterative update, thereby promoting the iterative update. Quickly obtain the target parameters that are most suitable for the patient's condition, thereby improving the doctor's surgical efficiency and reducing the difficulty of the doctor's work.
在一些实施例中,处理设备120仅通过第二评估值筛选中间解确定新的规划集合进入下一轮迭代,即公式(11)中的选择函数f可以不包含最后一项m3×W。仅作为示例,处理设备120可以基于第二评估值计算中间解的支配关系并对规划集合进行分层,并基于分层结果和不包括m3×W项的选择函数f计算的拥挤距离,通过前述的流程的方式筛选中间解确定新的规划集合。若仅通过第二评估值筛选中间解确定新的规划集合,处理设备120可以在预处理阶段通过器械长度、穿刺不贯穿风险结构、消融场范围完全覆盖病灶、消融电极距离的合理性、穿刺路径之间角度安全的合理性等约束条件对规划参数的选择范围进行约束,以确保规划集合中的中间解满足约束条件。In some embodiments, the processing device 120 only filters the intermediate solution through the second evaluation value to determine the new planning set to enter the next round of iteration, that is, the selection function f in formula (11) may not include the last term m 3 ×W. For example only, the processing device 120 may calculate the dominance relationship of the intermediate solution based on the second evaluation value and stratify the planning set, and based on the stratification result and the crowding distance calculated by the selection function f excluding the m 3 ×W term, by The intermediate solutions are screened to determine the new planning set in the aforementioned process. If only the second evaluation value is used to filter the intermediate solution to determine a new planning set, the processing device 120 can determine the length of the instrument, the puncture not penetrating the risk structure, the ablation field range completely covering the lesion, the rationality of the ablation electrode distance, and the puncture path in the pre-processing stage. Constraints such as the rationality of angle safety constrain the selection range of planning parameters to ensure that the intermediate solutions in the planning set satisfy the constraints.
在一些实施例中,提供了一种计算机设备,该计算机设备可以是终端,其内部结构图可以如图19所示。该计算机设备包括通过系统总线连接的处理器、存储器、通信接口、显示屏和输入装置。其中,该计算机设备的处理器用于提供计算和控制能力。该计算机设备的存储器包括非易失性存储介质、内存储器。该非易失性存储介质存储有操作系统和计算机程序。该内存储器为非易失性存储介质中的操作系统和计算机程序的运行提供环境。该计算机设备的通信接口用于与外部的终端进行有线或无线方式的通信,无线方式可通过WIFI、移动蜂窝网络、NFC(近场通信)或其他技术实现。该计算机程序被处理器执行时以实现一种穿刺路径规划方法。该计算机设备的显示屏可以是液晶显示屏或者电子墨水显示屏,该计算机设备的输入装置可以是显示屏上覆盖的触摸层,也可以是计算机设备外壳上设置的按键、轨迹球或触控板,还可以是外接的键盘、触控板或鼠标等。In some embodiments, a computer device is provided. The computer device may be a terminal, and its internal structure diagram may be as shown in Figure 19. The computer device includes a processor, memory, communication interface, display screen and input device connected through a system bus. Wherein, the processor of the computer device is used to provide computing and control capabilities. The memory of the computer device includes non-volatile storage media and internal memory. The non-volatile storage medium stores operating systems and computer programs. This internal memory provides an environment for the execution of operating systems and computer programs in non-volatile storage media. The communication interface of the computer device is used for wired or wireless communication with external terminals. The wireless mode can be implemented through WIFI, mobile cellular network, NFC (Near Field Communication) or other technologies. The computer program implements a puncture path planning method when executed by the processor. The display screen of the computer device may be a liquid crystal display or an electronic ink display. The input device of the computer device may be a touch layer covered on the display screen, or may be a button, trackball or touch pad provided on the computer device shell. , it can also be an external keyboard, trackpad or mouse, etc.
本领域技术人员可以理解,图19中示出的结构,仅仅是与本申请方案相关的部分结构的框图,并不构成对本申请方案所应用于其上的计算机设备的限定,具体的计算机设备可以包括比图中所示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者具有不同的部件布置。Those skilled in the art can understand that the structure shown in Figure 19 is only a block diagram of a partial structure related to the solution of the present application, and does not constitute a limitation on the computer equipment to which the solution of the present application is applied. The specific computer equipment may May include more or fewer parts than shown, or combine certain parts, or have a different arrangement of parts.
在一些实施例中,计算机可读存储介质存储计算机指令,当计算机读取存储介质中的计算机指令后,计算机运行所述介入规划系统的参数规划方法。In some embodiments, the computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions. After the computer reads the computer instructions in the storage medium, the computer runs the parameter planning method of the intervention planning system.
本说明书实施例可能带来的有益效果包括但不限于:(1)通过获取目标患者的患者数据,进而确定目标参数,可以获得更合理的目标参数以提高医生的手术效率,减轻医生的工作难度。(2)通过确定目标患者的结构特征、目标靶点,可以确定临床强约束条件的判定值满足预设条件的候选穿刺路径,进而可以自动且高效地获得合理的目标穿刺路径。(3)通过计算至少一条候选穿刺路径的路径关联信息,并基于至少一条候选穿刺路径的路径关联信息,通过预设搜索算法确定目标穿刺路径,实现了目标穿刺路径的自动规划,能够准确有效地规划目标穿刺路径,提升了目标穿刺路径规划效率。(4)通过量子退火算法确定最优解,并将最优解对应的候选穿刺路径确定为目标穿刺路径,能够准确有效地规划目标穿刺路径,提升了目标穿刺路径规划效率。由于目标穿刺路径规划是临床多约束条件的优化问题,该问题是一个非确定多项式问题,即存在确定答案,但其得到解的时间复杂度呈指数增加,经典计算机因自身的性能限制,存在计算时间过长,或无法达到最优解的困难,本实施例的技术方案,可以通过在量子退火机上运行,如将哈密顿量映射至量子退火机的真实量子比特,在量子退火机上进行,使得穿刺路径规划效率更高,能够达到快速、准确的术前穿刺路径规划效果。(5)通过个体生成器生成个体集合和新的个体,以及将帕累托前沿解作为至少一组中间参数,可以扩大搜索最优个体的范围,筛选出全局中的较优解,进而避免最终确认的目标参数仅仅是局部中的较优参数。(6)通过个体筛选器基于约束判定值和评估值对个体集合进行更新,可以筛选出效果更好、对患者损伤最低的个体进入下一轮迭代更新,促使迭代更新更快地得到最适合患者情况的目标参数。(7)通过确定穿刺路径数量和消融球参数范围,确定至少一组规划参数,并基于至少一组规划参数确定目标参数,可以缩小规划参数的范围,更快速地获得更合理的目标参数以提高医生的手术效率,减轻医生的工作难度。(8)基于患者数据进行三维重建,以获得三维医学影像,并对三维医学影像进行预处理操作,进而确定规划参数,可以根据不同的病灶情况适应性地缩小规划参数的范围,使规划参 数更适合不同患者的病灶情况,提高后续迭代优化的效率。(9)自动确定、裁剪感兴趣区域,并通过降采样的方式离散化数据点,可以减轻设备的运算压力。(10)通过对规划集合进行多轮迭代优化确定最优规划集合,可以在全局搜索最优规划集合,避免最优规划集合中的个体趋于局部最优;通过最优规划集合确定目标参数,可以得到最适合的目标参数。(11)基于评估值和约束判定值选择个体,可以选择出效果更好、对患者损伤最低的个体进入下一轮迭代更新,促使迭代更新更快地得到最适合患者情况的目标参数,从而提高了医生的手术效率,减轻医生的工作难度。The beneficial effects that may be brought about by the embodiments of this specification include but are not limited to: (1) By obtaining the patient data of the target patient and then determining the target parameters, more reasonable target parameters can be obtained to improve the doctor's surgical efficiency and reduce the difficulty of the doctor's work. . (2) By determining the structural characteristics and target points of the target patient, the candidate puncture path whose judgment value satisfies the preset conditions for strong clinical constraints can be determined, and a reasonable target puncture path can be obtained automatically and efficiently. (3) By calculating the path association information of at least one candidate puncture path, and determining the target puncture path through a preset search algorithm based on the path association information of at least one candidate puncture path, automatic planning of the target puncture path is realized, which can accurately and effectively Planning the target puncture path improves the efficiency of target puncture path planning. (4) The optimal solution is determined through the quantum annealing algorithm, and the candidate puncture path corresponding to the optimal solution is determined as the target puncture path, which can accurately and effectively plan the target puncture path and improve the efficiency of target puncture path planning. Since target puncture path planning is a clinical multi-constraint optimization problem, the problem is a non-deterministic polynomial problem, that is, there is a definite answer, but the time complexity of obtaining the solution increases exponentially. Classic computers have calculation problems due to their own performance limitations. If the time is too long or the optimal solution cannot be reached, the technical solution of this embodiment can be run on a quantum annealing machine, such as mapping the Hamiltonian to the real qubits of the quantum annealing machine, so that The puncture path planning is more efficient and can achieve fast and accurate preoperative puncture path planning. (5) By generating individual sets and new individuals through the individual generator, and using the Pareto front solution as at least one set of intermediate parameters, the scope of searching for the optimal individual can be expanded, and the better global solution can be screened out, thereby avoiding the final The confirmed target parameters are only the local optimal parameters. (6) Through the individual filter to update the individual set based on the constraint judgment value and evaluation value, the individuals with better effects and the lowest damage to the patient can be screened out to enter the next round of iterative update, prompting the iterative update to obtain the most suitable patient more quickly target parameters of the situation. (7) By determining the number of puncture paths and the range of ablation sphere parameters, determining at least one set of planning parameters, and determining the target parameters based on at least one set of planning parameters, the range of planning parameters can be narrowed and more reasonable target parameters can be obtained more quickly to improve Improve the doctor's surgical efficiency and reduce the difficulty of the doctor's work. (8) Perform three-dimensional reconstruction based on patient data to obtain three-dimensional medical images, and perform preprocessing operations on the three-dimensional medical images to determine planning parameters. The range of planning parameters can be adaptively narrowed according to different lesion conditions, so that the planning parameters The number is more suitable for the lesion conditions of different patients and improves the efficiency of subsequent iterative optimization. (9) Automatically determine and crop the area of interest, and discretize data points through downsampling, which can reduce the computing pressure on the device. (10) By performing multiple rounds of iterative optimization on the planning set to determine the optimal planning set, the optimal planning set can be searched globally to avoid individuals in the optimal planning set tending to the local optimum; the target parameters are determined through the optimal planning set, The most suitable target parameters can be obtained. (11) Selecting individuals based on evaluation values and constraint judgment values can select individuals with better effects and the least damage to patients to enter the next round of iterative updates, prompting the iterative updates to obtain the target parameters most suitable for the patient's situation faster, thereby improving It improves the doctor's surgical efficiency and reduces the difficulty of the doctor's work.
上文已对基本概念做了描述,显然,对于本领域技术人员来说,上述详细披露仅仅作为示例,而并不构成对本说明书的限定。虽然此处并没有明确说明,本领域技术人员可能会对本说明书进行各种修改、改进和修正。该类修改、改进和修正在本说明书中被建议,所以该类修改、改进、修正仍属于本说明书示范实施例的精神和范围。The basic concepts have been described above. It is obvious to those skilled in the art that the above detailed disclosure is only an example and does not constitute a limitation of this specification. Although not explicitly stated herein, various modifications, improvements, and corrections may be made to this specification by those skilled in the art. Such modifications, improvements, and corrections are suggested in this specification, and therefore such modifications, improvements, and corrections remain within the spirit and scope of the exemplary embodiments of this specification.
同时,本说明书使用了特定词语来描述本说明书的实施例。如“一个实施例”、“一实施例”、和/或“一些实施例”意指与本说明书至少一个实施例相关的某一特征、结构或特点。因此,应强调并注意的是,本说明书中在不同位置两次或多次提及的“一实施例”或“一个实施例”或“一个替代性实施例”并不一定是指同一实施例。此外,本说明书的一个或多个实施例中的某些特征、结构或特点可以进行适当的组合。At the same time, this specification uses specific words to describe the embodiments of this specification. For example, "one embodiment," "an embodiment," and/or "some embodiments" means a certain feature, structure, or characteristic related to at least one embodiment of this specification. Therefore, it should be emphasized and noted that “one embodiment” or “an embodiment” or “an alternative embodiment” mentioned twice or more at different places in this specification does not necessarily refer to the same embodiment. . In addition, certain features, structures or characteristics in one or more embodiments of this specification may be appropriately combined.
此外,除非权利要求中明确说明,本说明书所述处理元素和序列的顺序、数字字母的使用、或其他名称的使用,并非用于限定本说明书流程和方法的顺序。尽管上述披露中通过各种示例讨论了一些目前认为有用的发明实施例,但应当理解的是,该类细节仅起到说明的目的,附加的权利要求并不仅限于披露的实施例,相反,权利要求旨在覆盖所有符合本说明书实施例实质和范围的修正和等价组合。例如,虽然以上所描述的系统组件可以通过硬件设备实现,但是也可以只通过软件的解决方案得以实现,如在现有的服务器或移动设备上安装所描述的系统。In addition, unless explicitly stated in the claims, the order of the processing elements and sequences, the use of numbers and letters, or the use of other names in this specification are not intended to limit the order of the processes and methods in this specification. Although the foregoing disclosure discusses by various examples some embodiments of the invention that are presently considered useful, it is to be understood that such details are for purposes of illustration only and that the appended claims are not limited to the disclosed embodiments. To the contrary, rights The claims are intended to cover all modifications and equivalent combinations consistent with the spirit and scope of the embodiments of this specification. For example, although the system components described above can be implemented through hardware devices, they can also be implemented through software-only solutions, such as installing the described system on an existing server or mobile device.
同理,应当注意的是,为了简化本说明书披露的表述,从而帮助对一个或多个发明实施例的理解,前文对本说明书实施例的描述中,有时会将多种特征归并至一个实施例、附图或对其的描述中。但是,这种披露方法并不意味着本说明书对象所需要的特征比权利要求中提及的特征多。实际上,实施例的特征要少于上述披露的单个实施例的全部特征。Similarly, it should be noted that, in order to simplify the expression disclosed in this specification and thereby help understand one or more embodiments of the invention, in the previous description of the embodiments of this specification, multiple features are sometimes combined into one embodiment. accompanying drawings or descriptions thereof. However, this method of disclosure does not imply that the subject matter of the description requires more features than are mentioned in the claims. In fact, embodiments may have less than all features of a single disclosed embodiment.
一些实施例中使用了描述成分、属性数量的数字,应当理解的是,此类用于实施例描述的数字,在一些示例中使用了修饰词“大约”、“近似”或“大体上”来修饰。除非另外说明,“大约”、“近似”或“大体上”表明所述数字允许有±20%的变化。相应地,在一些实施例中,说明书和权利要求中使用的数值参数均为近似值,该近似值根据个别实施例所需特点可以发生改变。在一些实施例中,数值参数应考虑规定的有效数位并采用一般位数保留的方法。尽管本说明书一些实施例中用于确认其范围广度的数值域和参数为近似值,在具体实施例中,此类数值的设定在可行范围内尽可能精确。In some embodiments, numbers are used to describe the quantities of components and properties. It should be understood that such numbers used to describe the embodiments are modified by the modifiers "about", "approximately" or "substantially" in some examples. Grooming. Unless otherwise stated, "about," "approximately," or "substantially" means that the stated number is allowed to vary by ±20%. Accordingly, in some embodiments, the numerical parameters used in the specification and claims are approximations that may vary depending on the desired features of the individual embodiment. In some embodiments, numerical parameters should account for the specified number of significant digits and use general digit preservation methods. Although the numerical ranges and parameters used to identify the breadth of ranges in some embodiments of this specification are approximations, in specific embodiments, such numerical values are set as accurately as is feasible.
针对本说明书引用的每个专利、专利申请、专利申请公开物和其他材料,如文章、书籍、说明书、出版物、文档等,特此将其全部内容并入本说明书作为参考。与本说明书内容不一致或产生冲突的申请历史文件除外,对本说明书权利要求最广范围有限制的文件(当前或之后附加于本说明书中的)也除外。需要说明的是,如果本说明书附属材料中的描述、定义、和/或术语的使用与本说明书所述内容有不一致或冲突的地方,以本说明书的描述、定义和/或术语的使用为准。Each patent, patent application, patent application publication and other material, such as articles, books, instructions, publications, documents, etc. cited in this specification is hereby incorporated by reference into this specification in its entirety. Application history documents that are inconsistent with or conflict with the content of this specification are excluded, as are documents (currently or later appended to this specification) that limit the broadest scope of the claims in this specification. It should be noted that if there is any inconsistency or conflict between the descriptions, definitions, and/or the use of terms in the accompanying materials of this manual and the content described in this manual, the descriptions, definitions, and/or the use of terms in this manual shall prevail. .
最后,应当理解的是,本说明书中所述实施例仅用以说明本说明书实施例的原则。其他的变形也可能属于本说明书的范围。因此,作为示例而非限制,本说明书实施例的替代配置可视为与本说明书的教导一致。相应地,本说明书的实施例不仅限于本说明书明确介绍和描述的实施例。 Finally, it should be understood that the embodiments described in this specification are only used to illustrate the principles of the embodiments of this specification. Other variations may also fall within the scope of this specification. Accordingly, by way of example and not limitation, alternative configurations of the embodiments of this specification may be considered consistent with the teachings of this specification. Accordingly, the embodiments of this specification are not limited to those expressly introduced and described in this specification.

Claims (23)

  1. 一种介入规划系统,其特征在于,包括控制模块,所述控制模块用于:An intervention planning system, characterized in that it includes a control module, and the control module is used for:
    获取目标患者的患者数据;以及Obtain patient data for target patients; and
    基于所述患者数据,确定所述目标参数。Based on the patient data, the target parameters are determined.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的系统,其特征在于,所述目标参数包括目标穿刺路径,确定所述目标穿刺路径包括:The system according to claim 1, wherein the target parameter includes a target puncture path, and determining the target puncture path includes:
    基于所述患者数据,确定所述目标患者的结构特征;determining structural characteristics of the target patient based on the patient data;
    基于所述结构特征,确定目标靶点;Based on the structural characteristics, determine the target target;
    基于所述结构特征和所述目标靶点,确定候选穿刺路径集合;Based on the structural characteristics and the target target, determine a set of candidate puncture paths;
    从所述候选穿刺路径集合中,确定目标穿刺路径。From the set of candidate puncture paths, a target puncture path is determined.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的系统,其特征在于,所述基于所述患者数据,确定所述目标患者的结构特征包括:The system of claim 2, wherein determining the structural characteristics of the target patient based on the patient data includes:
    基于所述患者数据,确定所述目标患者的三维医学影像;Based on the patient data, determine a three-dimensional medical image of the target patient;
    基于所述三维医学影像,确定所述结构特征。Based on the three-dimensional medical image, the structural characteristics are determined.
  4. 根据权利要求2-3任一项所述的系统,其特征在于,所述基于所述结构特征和所述目标靶点,确定候选穿刺路径集合包括:The system according to any one of claims 2-3, wherein determining a set of candidate puncture paths based on the structural characteristics and the target target includes:
    将所述目标靶点,确定为透视投影中心;Determine the target target point as the perspective projection center;
    以透视投影中心为射源向外发射多条射线,基于所述结构特征,计算每条射线对应的穿刺路径的临床强约束条件的判定值;Use the perspective projection center as the source to emit multiple rays outwards, and based on the structural characteristics, calculate the judgment value of the strong clinical constraints of the puncture path corresponding to each ray;
    将所述临床强约束条件的判定值满足预设条件的穿刺路径,确定为候选穿刺路径;Determine the puncture path whose judgment value of the strong clinical constraint conditions satisfies the preset conditions as the candidate puncture path;
    将所述候选穿刺路径构成的集合,确定为所述候选穿刺路径集合。A set of the candidate puncture paths is determined as the candidate puncture path set.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的系统,其特征在于,所述临床强约束条件包括以下一种或者多种条件:The system according to claim 4, wherein the strong clinical constraints include one or more of the following conditions:
    所述穿刺路径不接触且不贯穿穿刺风险结构、所述穿刺路径的长度小于预设针长度阈值、所述穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角不小于预设夹角阈值和所述穿刺路径经过待穿刺结构的距离长度大于预设距离阈值。The puncture path does not contact and does not penetrate puncture risk structures, the length of the puncture path is less than the preset needle length threshold, the angle between the puncture path and the target tissue is not less than the preset angle threshold, and the puncture path passes through the preset angle threshold. The distance length of the puncture structure is greater than the preset distance threshold.
  6. 根据权利要求2-3任一项所述的系统,其特征在于,所述候选穿刺路径集合包括至少一条候选穿刺路径,所述从所述候选穿刺路径集合中,确定目标穿刺路径包括:The system according to any one of claims 2-3, wherein the set of candidate puncture paths includes at least one candidate puncture path, and determining the target puncture path from the set of candidate puncture paths includes:
    计算所述至少一条候选穿刺路径的路径关联信息;Calculate path association information of the at least one candidate puncture path;
    基于所述至少一条候选穿刺路径的路径关联信息,通过预设搜索算法确定所述目标穿刺路径。Based on the path association information of the at least one candidate puncture path, the target puncture path is determined through a preset search algorithm.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的系统,其特征在于,所述路径关联信息包括以下一种或者多种信息:The system according to claim 6, wherein the path association information includes one or more of the following information:
    所述候选穿刺路径与穿刺风险结构的距离、所述候选穿刺路径的长度和所述候选穿刺路径与目标组织的夹角。The distance between the candidate puncture path and the puncture risk structure, the length of the candidate puncture path, and the angle between the candidate puncture path and the target tissue.
  8. 根据权利要求6所述的系统,其特征在于,所述基于所述至少一条候选穿刺路径的路径关联信息,通过预设搜索算法确定所述目标穿刺路径包括:The system according to claim 6, wherein determining the target puncture path through a preset search algorithm based on the path association information of the at least one candidate puncture path includes:
    根据所述路径关联信息构建第一函数项;Construct a first function term according to the path association information;
    基于所述第一函数项,通过所述预设搜索算法确定目标穿刺路径。Based on the first function term, the target puncture path is determined through the preset search algorithm.
  9. 根据权利要求1所述的系统,其特征在于,所述目标参数包括目标穿刺路径、目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数,所述基于所述患者数据,确定所述目标参数包括:The system according to claim 1, wherein the target parameters include target puncture path, target stop point position and target ablation sphere parameters, and determining the target parameters based on the patient data includes:
    基于患者数据,确定至少一组规划参数;determining at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data;
    基于所述至少一组规划参数,确定目标参数;Determine target parameters based on the at least one set of planning parameters;
    其中,确定目标参数包括:Among them, the determined target parameters include:
    基于个体生成器,生成个体集合,所述个体集合包括多个个体,每个所述个体对应一组规划参数;Based on the individual generator, generate an individual set, the individual set includes multiple individuals, each of the individuals corresponds to a set of planning parameters;
    对所述个体集合进行至少一轮第一迭代更新,直至第一迭代完成条件被满足;Perform at least one round of first iteration update on the individual set until the first iteration completion condition is met;
    基于更新后的所述个体集合,确定所述至少一组中间参数;以及determining the at least one set of intermediate parameters based on the updated set of individuals; and
    基于所述至少一组中间参数,确定所述目标参数。The target parameters are determined based on the at least one set of intermediate parameters.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的系统,其特征在于,所述基于患者数据,确定至少一组规划参数包括: The system of claim 9, wherein determining at least one set of planning parameters based on patient data includes:
    对所述患者数据进行三维重建,以获得三维医学影像,所述患者数据包括患者的CT或MR数据;以及Perform three-dimensional reconstruction on the patient data to obtain a three-dimensional medical image, where the patient data includes the patient's CT or MR data; and
    基于所述三维医学影像确定所述至少一组规划参数。The at least one set of planning parameters is determined based on the three-dimensional medical image.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的系统,其特征在于,所述基于所述三维医学影像确定所述至少一组规划参数包括:The system of claim 10, wherein determining the at least one set of planning parameters based on the three-dimensional medical image includes:
    对所述三维医学影像进行预处理操作,所述预处理操作包括感兴趣区域裁剪、数据点降采样以及血管粗细分级中的一个或多个;以及Perform preprocessing operations on the three-dimensional medical image, the preprocessing operations including one or more of region of interest cropping, data point downsampling, and blood vessel coarse subdivision; and
    基于所述预处理操作得到的结果确定所述至少一组规划参数。The at least one set of planning parameters is determined based on results obtained from the preprocessing operation.
  12. 根据权利要求9-11任一项所述的系统,其特征在于,所述至少一轮第一迭代中的每轮迭代包括:The system according to any one of claims 9-11, wherein each iteration in the at least one first iteration includes:
    基于个体生成器,生成至少一个新的个体;以及Generate at least one new individual based on the individual generator; and
    将所述至少一个新的个体加入个体集合。Add the at least one new individual to the individual collection.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的系统,其特征在于,所述至少一轮第一迭代中的每轮迭代包括:The system of claim 12, wherein each of the at least one first iteration includes:
    基于个体筛选器,对所述个体集合中的每个个体进行筛选,更新所述个体集合,所述筛选包括对所述个体集合中的个体进行选择操作;Based on the individual filter, filter each individual in the individual collection and update the individual collection, where the screening includes selecting individuals in the individual collection;
    其中,所述选择操作包括:Wherein, the selection operation includes:
    计算所述个体集合中的每个个体的第一评估值和第一约束判定值;以及Calculating a first evaluation value and a first constraint determination value for each individual in the individual set; and
    基于所述第一评估值和所述第一约束判定值选择个体,确定所述更新后的个体集合。Select individuals based on the first evaluation value and the first constraint determination value, and determine the updated individual set.
  14. 根据权利要求9所述的系统,其特征在于,所述基于更新后的所述个体集合,确定所述至少一组中间参数包括:The system of claim 9, wherein determining the at least one set of intermediate parameters based on the updated individual set includes:
    基于所述更新后的个体集合确定帕累托前沿解,将所述帕累托前沿解作为所述至少一组中间参数。A Pareto front solution is determined based on the updated individual set, and the Pareto front solution is used as the at least one set of intermediate parameters.
  15. 根据权利要求1所述的系统,其特征在于,所述目标参数包括目标穿刺路径、目标停留点位置和目标消融球参数,所述基于所述患者数据,确定所述目标参数包括:The system according to claim 1, wherein the target parameters include a target puncture path, a target stop point position and a target ablation sphere parameter, and determining the target parameters based on the patient data includes:
    基于患者数据确定穿刺路径数量以及消融球参数范围;Determine the number of puncture paths and the range of ablation ball parameters based on patient data;
    基于所述患者数据、所述穿刺路径数量以及所述消融球参数范围,确定至少一组规划参数;Determine at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data, the number of puncture paths, and the ablation sphere parameter range;
    基于所述至少一组规划参数,确定至少一组可行解;以及determining at least one set of feasible solutions based on the at least one set of planning parameters; and
    基于所述至少一组可行解,确定所述目标参数。Based on the at least one set of feasible solutions, the target parameters are determined.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的系统,其特征在于,所述基于所述至少一组规划参数,确定至少一组可行解包括:The system of claim 15, wherein determining at least one set of feasible solutions based on the at least one set of planning parameters includes:
    基于所述至少一组规划参数,生成规划集合,所述规划集合包括多个中间解,每个所述中间解对应一组规划参数;Generate a planning set based on the at least one set of planning parameters, the planning set including a plurality of intermediate solutions, each of the intermediate solutions corresponding to a set of planning parameters;
    对所述规划集合进行至少一轮第二迭代优化,直至第二迭代完成条件被满足,得到最优规划集合;以及Perform at least one round of second iteration optimization on the planning set until the second iteration completion condition is satisfied, and obtain the optimal planning set; and
    基于所述最优规划集合,确定至少一组可行解。Based on the set of optimal plans, at least one set of feasible solutions is determined.
  17. 根据权利要求15-16任一项所述的系统,其特征在于,确定所述消融球参数范围包括:The system according to any one of claims 15-16, wherein determining the ablation sphere parameter range includes:
    基于所述患者数据,确定病灶掩膜;Based on the patient data, determine a lesion mask;
    基于所述病灶掩膜,确定病灶长轴与病灶短轴;以及Based on the lesion mask, determine the long axis of the lesion and the short axis of the lesion; and
    基于所述病灶长轴与病灶短轴,确定所述消融球参数范围。Based on the long axis of the lesion and the short axis of the lesion, the parameter range of the ablation sphere is determined.
  18. 根据权利要求15-16任一项所述的系统,其特征在于,所述基于所述患者数据、所述穿刺路径数量以及所述消融球参数范围,确定至少一组规划参数包括:The system according to any one of claims 15-16, wherein determining at least one set of planning parameters based on the patient data, the number of puncture paths, and the ablation sphere parameter range includes:
    对所述患者数据进行三维重建,以获得三维医学影像;Perform three-dimensional reconstruction on the patient data to obtain three-dimensional medical images;
    对所述三维医学影像进行预处理操作;以及Perform preprocessing operations on the three-dimensional medical images; and
    基于所述预处理操作得到的结果、所述穿刺路径数量以及消融球参数范围确定所述至少一组规划参数。The at least one set of planning parameters is determined based on the results obtained from the preprocessing operation, the number of puncture paths, and the ablation sphere parameter range.
  19. 根据权利要求16所述的系统,其特征在于,所述至少一轮第二迭代中的每轮迭代包括:The system of claim 16, wherein each of the at least one second iteration includes:
    对所述规划集合进行变换操作,得到第一预设数量的新的中间解;以及 Perform a transformation operation on the planning set to obtain a first preset number of new intermediate solutions; and
    将所述新的中间解加入所述规划集合,得到加入新的中间解的规划集合。The new intermediate solution is added to the planning set to obtain a planning set to which the new intermediate solution is added.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的系统,其特征在于,所述至少一轮第二迭代中的每轮迭代包括:The system of claim 19, wherein each of the at least one second iteration includes:
    计算所述加入新的中间解的规划集合中的每个中间解的第二评估值和第二约束判定值;以及Calculate the second evaluation value and the second constraint determination value of each intermediate solution in the planning set to which the new intermediate solution is added; and
    基于所述第二评估值和所述第二约束判定值选择中间解,得到包含第二预设数量的中间解的新的规划集合,所述第二约束判定值基于至少一个约束条件的判定值确定,所述至少一个约束条件包括器械长度是否满足要求,所述第二评估值包括穿刺路径评分、消融适形率。Select an intermediate solution based on the second evaluation value and the second constraint decision value, and obtain a new planning set including a second preset number of intermediate solutions. The second constraint decision value is based on the decision value of at least one constraint condition. It is determined that the at least one constraint condition includes whether the instrument length meets the requirements, and the second evaluation value includes puncture path score and ablation conformity rate.
  21. 一种介入规划方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:An intervention planning method, characterized in that the method includes:
    获取目标患者的患者数据;Obtain patient data of target patients;
    基于所述患者数据,确定目标参数。Based on the patient data, target parameters are determined.
  22. 一种介入规划装置,其特征在于,包括介入设备、机械臂和处理器;An interventional planning device, characterized by including interventional equipment, a robotic arm and a processor;
    所述介入设备包括介入针;The interventional device includes an interventional needle;
    所述机械臂用于携带所述介入针按照目标参数进行介入手术;The robotic arm is used to carry the interventional needle to perform interventional surgery according to target parameters;
    所述处理器用于控制机械臂,以及确定所述目标参数,所述目标参数的确定包括:The processor is used to control the robotic arm and determine the target parameters. The determination of the target parameters includes:
    获取目标患者的患者数据;以及Obtain patient data for target patients; and
    基于所述患者数据,确定所述目标参数。Based on the patient data, the target parameters are determined.
  23. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述存储介质存储计算机指令,当计算机读取存储介质中的计算机指令后,计算机执行如权利要求21所述的介入规划方法。 A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the storage medium stores computer instructions. After the computer reads the computer instructions in the storage medium, the computer executes the intervention planning method as claimed in claim 21.
PCT/CN2023/111597 2022-08-08 2023-08-07 Interventional planning system, method and apparatus, and a storage medium WO2024032570A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210946070.0 2022-08-08
CN202210946070.0A CN117562632A (en) 2022-08-08 2022-08-08 Puncture path planning method, puncture path planning system and computer equipment
CN202211695301.1 2022-12-28
CN202211695278.6 2022-12-28
CN202211695301 2022-12-28
CN202211695278 2022-12-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024032570A1 true WO2024032570A1 (en) 2024-02-15

Family

ID=89850860

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/111597 WO2024032570A1 (en) 2022-08-08 2023-08-07 Interventional planning system, method and apparatus, and a storage medium

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024032570A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117731376A (en) * 2024-02-20 2024-03-22 四川省肿瘤医院 Gynecological tumor image preoperative intelligent guiding and identifying system

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107296645A (en) * 2017-08-03 2017-10-27 东北大学 Lung puncture operation optimum path planning method and lung puncture operation guiding system
CN109330667A (en) * 2018-08-29 2019-02-15 天津市肿瘤医院 Path reverse optimization searching method for lung CT guiding puncture auxiliary system
CN110151309A (en) * 2018-02-14 2019-08-23 上海交通大学 The preoperative planing method of multi-modal ablation and its equipment
CN113456219A (en) * 2021-06-15 2021-10-01 艾瑞迈迪医疗科技(北京)有限公司 Liver cancer radio frequency ablation operation path planning method and device based on CT image
CN113610824A (en) * 2021-08-13 2021-11-05 推想医疗科技股份有限公司 Puncture path planning method and device, electronic device and storage medium
CN113693725A (en) * 2021-10-22 2021-11-26 杭州维纳安可医疗科技有限责任公司 Needle insertion path planning method, device, equipment and storage medium
CN114010310A (en) * 2021-09-15 2022-02-08 苏州中科华影健康科技有限公司 Path planning method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium
CN114557770A (en) * 2022-02-23 2022-05-31 上海精劢医疗科技有限公司 Interactive path planning method and system for microwave ablation operation

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107296645A (en) * 2017-08-03 2017-10-27 东北大学 Lung puncture operation optimum path planning method and lung puncture operation guiding system
CN110151309A (en) * 2018-02-14 2019-08-23 上海交通大学 The preoperative planing method of multi-modal ablation and its equipment
CN109330667A (en) * 2018-08-29 2019-02-15 天津市肿瘤医院 Path reverse optimization searching method for lung CT guiding puncture auxiliary system
CN113456219A (en) * 2021-06-15 2021-10-01 艾瑞迈迪医疗科技(北京)有限公司 Liver cancer radio frequency ablation operation path planning method and device based on CT image
CN113610824A (en) * 2021-08-13 2021-11-05 推想医疗科技股份有限公司 Puncture path planning method and device, electronic device and storage medium
CN114010310A (en) * 2021-09-15 2022-02-08 苏州中科华影健康科技有限公司 Path planning method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium
CN113693725A (en) * 2021-10-22 2021-11-26 杭州维纳安可医疗科技有限责任公司 Needle insertion path planning method, device, equipment and storage medium
CN114557770A (en) * 2022-02-23 2022-05-31 上海精劢医疗科技有限公司 Interactive path planning method and system for microwave ablation operation

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117731376A (en) * 2024-02-20 2024-03-22 四川省肿瘤医院 Gynecological tumor image preoperative intelligent guiding and identifying system
CN117731376B (en) * 2024-02-20 2024-04-19 四川省肿瘤医院 Gynecological tumor image preoperative intelligent guiding and identifying system

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN109069858B (en) Radiotherapy system and computer readable storage device
US20240075315A1 (en) System and method for learning models of radiotherapy treatment plans to predict radiotherapy dose distributions
US10765888B2 (en) System and method for automatic treatment planning
Rhee et al. Automatic contouring system for cervical cancer using convolutional neural networks
US10668304B2 (en) Phantom for adaptive radiotherapy
CA2796159A1 (en) Multi-objective radiation therapy optimization method
US20100063496A1 (en) Rf ablation planner
US11605452B2 (en) Radiotherapy treatment plan optimization using machine learning
WO2024032570A1 (en) Interventional planning system, method and apparatus, and a storage medium
CN108348771A (en) Method Knowledge based engineering Spatial dose measurement in radiation-therapy and generate beam-positioning
US10596391B2 (en) Systems and methods of accounting for shape change during radiotherapy
US11410766B2 (en) Methods and systems for radiotherapy treatment planning based on continuous deep learning
Camps et al. Automatic quality assessment of transperineal ultrasound images of the male pelvic region, using deep learning
US20240058062A1 (en) System and method for ablation treatment of tissue with interactive guidance
Adamson et al. Evaluation of a V‐Net autosegmentation algorithm for pediatric CT scans: Performance, generalizability, and application to patient‐specific CT dosimetry
WO2023041167A1 (en) Generative model of phase space
CN115861716B (en) Glioma classification method and device based on twin neural network and image histology
Zhang et al. Individualized and inverse optimized needle configuration for combined intracavitary-interstitial brachytherapy in locally advanced cervical cancer
Zhu et al. Embedding expertise knowledge into inverse treatment planning for low‐dose‐rate brachytherapy of hepatic malignancies
US20220051781A1 (en) Methods and systems for radiotherapy treatment planning based on deep transfer learning
Zhu et al. Intelligent and automatic treatment planning system for low-dose-rate brachytherapy of malignant hepatic tumors
Camps et al. Quality assessment of transperineal ultrasound images of the male pelvic region using deep learning
US11826560B2 (en) Radiation therapy treatment planning
Feng et al. Path Planning Method for Robot-assisted Puncture Based on Genetic Algorithm
Kitner Automatic localization of catheters in prostate brachytherapy

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23851791

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1